Home

MaxWorkFlow 3.6.1

1. Boc A e Figure 15 6 Page and page block layout dialog 172 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 15 2 Imposition controls Page size definition The options in the Page section of this dialog define the size of the pages to be added to the plate signature If pages have already been defined you can select them from the drop down list Alternatively to create a new page size enter the width and depth of the new page and click Save page into pool Page rows columns These fields define the number of rows top to bottom and columns side to side used for the plate signature Gutter width height The Gutter width field defines the amount of space to be placed between columns The Gutter height field defines the amount of space to be placed between the rows Pages rotate From the drop down list you can select how you want to rotate the pages You can rotate None of the pages A11 of the pages or only the odd or Even pages In addition to this you can select the amount by which you want to rotate the page rows or columns The options are 90 180 or 270 degrees MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 173 15 Imposition Plate Layout Select the Plate Layout icon from the Imposition bar to display the Plate Layout dialog E Imposition setup olx Current project Project 0 Signature Wizard Piate Layout bk j Block Rows f gt Block Gutter Width fo inch Block Columns f gt Block Gutter He
2. M Monochrome Images Downsample Subsample 7 Resolution eoo dpi Compression ccTT Group 4 z V Compress Text Figure 21 7 PDF module compression settings MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 293 21 PDF Creator Downsample The downsampling options determine how images in the document are handled Using the options you can control downsampling for color grayscale and monochrome images independently of each other The downsample options are as follows Subsampling Removes and discards vital information from the image as it recalculates the image resolution This can some times affect color integrity smoothness of tones and type Subsampling is an effective method for making documents web ready Average downsampling Takes an average number of dots per inch and re sam ples the image Bicubic Reduces the resolution by performing bicubic interpo lation to generate new pixel values This option can generate more pleasing results though the PDF file will be slower to generate Bicubic is not available with monochrome images Compression 294 Compression squeezes the image into a smaller package It calculates how to fit twice as much information sometimes more into a smaller package Unlike subsampling most compression algorithms do not dis card valuable information JPEG being an exception Therefore com pression is an effective way to manage file sizes on disk for press quality documents You
3. Figure 33 3 Device tab for the ECRM SCSI Imagesetter module The options in the Device tab fall into categories output options media tracking options page layout options and punch setup options as described in the following subsections 33 2 1 1 Output options Device name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 427 33 ECRM SCSI SCSI address Host Adapter ID A host adapter is the card that connects your computer to the SCSI bus An example would be a PCI SCSI host adapter like the Adaptec 2940UW Adaptec set all their host adapters to ID 7 by default Enter the ID for your host adapter ECRM SCSI ID Several devices can be connected to the SCSI interface Enter the SCSI ID for your ECRM device Imaging Exposure 0 255 Enter a value to adjust the exposure setting of the imagesetter Overscan Select this check box to increase the image s scan line by one bit Negate Select this check box to override all exposure settings specified in the control panel of the imagesetter Debug output Select this check box to generate more detailed log file messages when sending output to the imagesetter This may help you diagnose a problem The messages appear in the Viewer window for the module and are added to the general log file if the module is se
4. Enter as a percentage the total ink limit or Total Area Coverage TAC supported by the press The default is 300 and is used for UCR and GCR Max Black Enter as a percent the black ink limit supported by the press The default is 100 and is used for UCR and GCR 22 2 4 Separation naming options Print Separation Names Select this check box to print the color name on separations You must specify where the color name is printed using the x and Y coordinate values X Enter a value specifying a coordinate on the X axis of the page where the separation name must be printed Choose the units of measurement from the menu alongside this text box This value is only used if the Print Separation Names check box is selected Y Enter a value specifying a coordinate on the Y axis of the page where the separation name must be printed Choose the units of measurement from the menu alongside this text box This value is only used if the Print Separation Names check box is selected MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 22 3 Halftone screening options 22 3 Halftone screening options If your output module supports halftone screening the options for screening control are accessible in the Screens tab as shown in Figure 22 4 Setup for Max Imagesetter x Regular Harlequin Dispersed Separation Angle 45 0000 Dot shape 730000 Euiden x 15 0000 0 0000 Frequency 53 45 0000 I Override Angle I Override Do
5. Status This column indicates the status of the module Log This column indicates whether or not the module is set to record all mes sages in a log file yes no See page Log file directory on page 15 for details on how to specify the location and other properties of the log file Paused This column indicates whether or not the module has been paused yes no You can click the GO STOP button to start or stop the module MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 379 26 CIP3 For further details on the general controls in the dialog see Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 380 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 27 Windows Printer The Windows Printer module allows you to send files that have been pro cessed by the Harlequin RIP to a Windows printer This module is ideal for high end office printing tasks and allows you to output jobs your laser printer could never handle before It combines the Harlequin RIP and workflow capa bilities of MWF to turn all non PostScript language capable printers on the network into PostScript compatible printers You can send output to any net work printer accessible to the computer running MWF You can configure the format of the output using the Document Properties dialog box for the printer which is a standard Windows dialog box 27 1 Windows Printer workflow The Windows Printer module is an output device module that accepts raster image data from the Harlequin RIP The raster
6. 17 Preps 17 4 4 2 Advanced options Click the Advanced button to display more module options IV View Preps server log window p Default media size T Run Preps after created preps job Width fo Sate Height fn inch I Use this size for all output devices OK Cancel I Backup preps job files I Run Preps for error jobs View Preps server log window Click this option to view the log window that contains information about the Preps module Run Preps after created Preps job Click this option to automatically run Preps when a job has been saved Backup Preps job files Click this option to automatically create backups of Preps job files Backup files are stored in the MWF_Data Imposition Preps Save folders Run Preps for error jobs Click this option to automatically run Preps when a job has caused an error Default media size In this section enter the width and depth of the media If you want this media size to apply to all devices check the Use this size for all output devices option 17 4 4 3 Profiles You are able to store various user preferences for the Preps module in configu ration files called profiles In addition you are able to edit or create new pro files for customization purposes 236 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 17 4 Preps setup To create a new profile click the New button To edit an existing profile select the profile to be edited in the drop down list and then click Edit The Pro
7. T Is not Valid T Valid only if effective resolution is in the range DPI Figure 11 6 Images tab Image Color Space Choose a color format from this menu You can then specify that images in the file must not be this color format by selecting the Is Not Valid check box For example you may wish to send files containing RGB images to the Invalid jobs folder so that they can be converted to CMYK images Alternatively you can specify that the chosen color format is only allowed if the resolution of the image is within a certain range by select ing the Valid only if check box Is Not Valid Select this check box to ensure that files containing images using the color format chosen in the Image Color Space menu will be sent to the Invalid jobs folder for correction Valid only if effective resolution is in the range DPI Select this check box and enter some values in the accompanying text boxes to specify that images using the color format chosen in the Image Color Space menu are only allowed in files if their resolution dpi is within the specified range MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 135 11 PreCheck 11 2 2 Fonts To add remove or substitute fonts choose Fonts from the PreCheck module pop up The Fonts dialog opens Fonts x Font File Add New Sr Aavasaksa Book ayskb ps f E Ee Aavasaksa B ook0 blique avskbo ps Remove Cr Aavasaksa Demi avskd ps r Aavasaksa DemiOblique avskdo ps 2 Ava
8. 4 Configure the Queuer 2 module as follows e To hold output for the devices until jobs are manually released or they are deleted in the Hold device list select the check boxes for Ultre SCSI Imagesetter 1andUltre SCSI Imagesetter 2 e Click OK to close the Queuer setup dialog box Step 3 Process jobs 1 To process jobs the modules in a workflow must be started The easiest way to do this is to press F2 on you keyboard 2 In your page generating application such as QuarkXPress open a page that you want to process with MWF 3 Print the page with the MwF Ultra94 printer Note that if you are print ing the page from a client machine that is one that sends jobs for pro cessing you will need to add the MwF Ultra94 printer to your list of installed printers See Section 2 8 on page 20 for more information Step 4 Save the configuration To save your new configuration choose Save from the Configuration menu Enter a name and a location for the configuration and then click Save 26 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 4 SmartScan The SmartScan module accepts jobs into the workflow for processing It moni tors a scan directory and filters jobs before passing them on for further pro cessing by the workflow 4 1 SmartScan workflow The SmartScan module is always the first module in a workflow since it s role is to receive jobs into the workflow for processing SmartScan accepts Post Script language files PS and E
9. J Embed base 14 fonts I Use original True Type fonts Figure 21 8 Fonts tab Embed all fonts except base 14 fonts With this option selected fonts used in the original document are embed ded in the PDF document This means text in the document can be dis played correctly with no font substitution on whichever machine views the document With this option selected all characteristics for the entire font family are included in the PDF file For example your page may only call for Helvetica Regular but since it is part of a family which also includes bold italic black condensed and compressed the information MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 21 3 PDF Creator options for all font variations are embedded in the PDF document thereby increasing the overall file size To limit the increase in file size you should consider selecting Subset all fonts Embed base 14 fonts If this is selected all base 14 fonts present in the document are embed ded in the output PDF file Selecting this option implicitly adds the base 14 fonts to the Always embed list Subset all fonts With this option selected only subsets of the original fonts are embed ded in the PDF file This is the preferred setting since it leads to smaller files However since not all members of the font family are available in the PDE selecting this may inhibit you from cutting and pasting text and prevent a reader from editing text in the PDF For e
10. The Setup for CIP3 dialog box opens The options in the Device tab Alt D allow you to select device specific settings Setup for CIP3 module 1 x Page Colors Calibration Color profile Device Name cies module 1 Output EAMWF_Data Qupu CIPS K Password pooo on Pace o Csr Y File Naming Use flobName T Strip Page No Sufix PPF I Use 8 3 file names IV Must be unique Extents and Transforms Contents DIG Comments IV Include all Extents and Transforms Work Style Singe Sided z Sheet Lay Let x Width 0 inch asJob Left Offset 0 inch I Center Height fo inch asJob Bottom Offset 0 inch Center Rotation fo x Mirror None x Eim Plate Press _ Paper_ Cancel Figure 26 3 Device tab for the DCS module The options in the Device tab fall into categories output options file naming options extents and transforms options contents options and DIG comments options as described in the following subsections 26 2 1 1 Output options Device name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 367 26 CIP3 368 Output This is the location of the output folder to which CIP3 files will be sent You may either click within the text box and type in the path of your choice or click Fe alongside the te
11. The command string should normally include the file extension and the full path name of the application file However you can type just the file name if the command file has extension EXE and is in one of the folders specified by the PATH variable Table 21 1 lists the substitution codes that can be used by the PDF Creator module Code Meaning f The output PDF file name not including the full path 0 The full output directory path For example C S PDF ou User name of the client who submitted the job Defaults to Unknown if the user name is not known d Date the job was submitted for processing n The job name of the PDF file This is not necessarily the same as the file name Table 21 1 Post processing substitution codes Share output folder as This feature allows you to publish the Output folder on your network as a shared resource Select the check box and enter a name for the folder in the text box Use file naming template This field allows you to specify a file naming template so that PDF files are named according to the tags that are specified The following tags are sup ported lt NAME gt the job name e g jobname ps lt COLOR gt the color name e g Gray Cyan Magenta etc lt PAGE gt the page number e g 1 2 etc lt TITLE gt the name of the PostScript language file without the ps extension e g jobname MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 21 3 PDF Creator options If you us
12. 9 Harlequin RIP PDF Options tab Figure 9 4 shows the dialog box that is displayed when you click PDF Options in the Harlequin RIP Setup dialog box This view shows some settings that are not at their default values If you need to print PDF files with different options for example with different passwords you can create a number of PDF page setup configurations Setup for Harlequin RIP 1 x General PDF Options Extras Print Pages Page range numbers Erample 247 11 Page size bounding box MediaBox x PDF Types Accept type s Auto detect types hd On error Report errors and accept as PDF 1 3 7 M Password Use password to print protected documents Password fo M Color I Honor PDF Color Management Figure 9 4 PDF Options dialog box The options are in sections for page selection PDF type acceptance passwords and color handling Page selection These options allows you to select exactly which pages you want to print Print all pages Leave this check box selected to print all the pages in the PDF document If you wish to print only a subset of the pages from a PDF job deselect this check box and enter the desired pages in the Page s text box 94 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 9 3 Harlequin RIP setup Reselect this check box when you have finished printing the subset of pages This enables the printing of all pages from other PDF jobs You do not need to
13. Clicking the Add New button displays a browser dialog allowing you to select the folder where Page Splitter can find the fonts you want to add Add Fonts x List of fonts GillSans BoldCondensed GilS ansCE Bolditalic GNBIC__PFB GillSans Boldltalic GNBI___ PFB Cancel GillS ans BoldE xtraCondensed Folder C Public fonts Drive E ES c z amp Public Figure 7 5 Font browser dialog You can select as many fonts as you like Shift To select a block of several fonts select the first font in the block and then hold down the Shift key and select the last font in the block em To select several unconnected fonts hold down the Control key while making your selection MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 7 2 Page Splitter controls To select all the fonts displayed in the list click the Select All button When you have selected the required fonts to be loaded click OK Remove To remove fonts from the system highlight the fonts in the list and click the Remove button followed by accepting the Are you sure prompt Substitution This option allows you to substitute one font for another The dialog that appears when this option is selected has two areas the upper text box labeled Name of the substitution is where you enter the name of the font to be substituted and the lower menu labeled Font to Substitute is where you select the font to be used as the substitution Generally it is pref
14. Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 6 2 BarCode pop up The following controls are available for the BarCode module e Setup see Section 6 2 1 BarCode setup e View see Section 6 2 2 BarCode Viewer See Module shortcut menus on page 18 for details on the other general options in the pop up MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 6 2 BarCode controls 6 2 1 BarCode setup To configure the BarCode module select Setup from the pop up menu Module BarCode M Placement Encoding EAN 13 add 2 Rotation jo degrees x g inch ve fs inch Scale 200 Page origin left top tight top left bottom tight bottom Encoded string Numbers only 12 data digits 2 supplemental 123456789012 12 If barcode can not be created fenor job x Cancel Figure 6 3 BarCode module setup dialog box This dialog provides access to various configuration options Module name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules BarCode The options in this section define the type of barcode and the informa tion contained within the barcode Encoding Selecting the drop down menu provides a number of barcode options in all the common formats Encoded string This text box is where you type in the specific informa tion you want designed into the b
15. Document must be preseparated Select this check box if you wish to ensure that the file is a preseparated file If you select this check box and the file is a composite file it will be sent to the Invalid jobs folder Document must NOT be preseparated Select this check box if you wish to ensure that the file is a composite file If you select this check box and the file is a preseparated file it will be sent to the Invalid jobs folder Number of pages must not be LESS than Enter a value in this text box specifying the minimum number of pages that must be defined within the file This option will not work properly with preseparated files because most page setup applications label each color of a preseparated file as a distinct page For example the module will consider a 1 page job with four colors as 4 separate pages Number of pages must not be MORE than Enter a value in this text box specifying the maximum number of pages that can be defined within the file This option will not work properly with preseparated files because most page setup applications label each color of a preseparated file as a distinct page For example the module will consider a 1 page job with four colors as 4 separate pages Page must not be smaller x Select this check box and enter values in the accompanying check boxes to specify dimensions for the minimum page size allowed in the file You must choose the units of measurement from the menus alon
16. MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 157 14 Composition Server 14 1 Composition server workflow The Composition server module is typically placed between a Down Sample module and a proofing device it accepts rasters and outputs imposed com posed rasters for use on the proofing device t e I 2 we Scan 7 Down sample 1 Composition 1 HP Plotter 1 Figure 14 1 Composition workflow 14 2 Composition server controls Right click the Composition server module to display the pop up menu show ing the configuration and viewing options Setup F5 View F4 Gleare Lau dule Change Computer F6 Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 14 2 Composition server pop up The following controls are available for the Composition server module e Setup see Composition server setup on page 159 e View see Composition Viewer on page 162 See Module shortcut menus on page 18 for details on the other general options in the pop up 158 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 14 2 Composition server controls 14 2 1 Composition server setup To configure the Composition server module select Setup from the pop up menu Composition module setup x Module name Composition 1 Bleed amp Trim Boxes Files in Job fa I Print Bleed Box Print Trim Box Strip Area Left fo inch Right fo inch M Composing method _ C Separations of one plate Top fo inch Bottom fo inch Any
17. MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 409 30 Epson Printer 410 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 31 Oc The Oc module allows you to you to send TIFF files to an Oc device The models that you can output to are the 9400 and the 9455 You can send TIFF files to these devices at a resolution of 300 dpi dots per inch You can also print to file and transfer this file for output to an Oc device 31 1 Oc workflow The Oc module is an output device module that accepts raster image data from the Harlequin RIP The raster image data is then passed to an Oc device The figure below illustrates such a workflow t o P Scan folder Harlequin RIP Oce Figure 31 1 Oc workflow MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 411 31 Oc 412 31 2 Oc controls Right click the Oc module to display the pop up menu showing all the con figuration and viewing options Setup ES View F4 Lau jule Change Computer F6 Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 31 2 Oc module pop up The following controls are available for the Oc module e Setup all output modules share common controls These are described in Chapter 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules For details on device specific controls see Device specific controls below e View see Oc Devices Viewer on page 414 See Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 for details on the other general options in the pop up MaxWorkFlow
18. These tags do not require a prefix and are not case sensitive Strip Page No Select this check box to strip all page numbers from files being processed Use 8 3 file names Select this check box to name output files using the DOS naming convention Maximum allowed characters are eight with a three character extension 342 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 23 2 TIFF controls Suffix Enter the suffix to use for output files in this text box The default value is TIF By convention many applications expect the suffix of a TIFF file to be tif or TIF Must be unique Select this check box to ensure that all output files generated by the TIFF module have a unique name A unique file name is created by adding a sequentially increasing number to the file name as shown in the exam ple on page 341 Having this box turned on will prevent files from being overwritten if the same file name is resubmitted to the workflow This is especially important with multipage pre separated files where each page sepa ration may have the same title as the previous page This is quite common with Quark files 23 2 1 3 File format options The following controls determine the data format of the TIFF file A particular data format may be required by the specific application that will read the TIFF files or may improve the portability or speed of access of the files Byte ordering You can choose between Macintosh and IBM PC byte ordering from this
19. This is useful when an output device does not have a punch and a single tile is imaged When the Profile has been completed click OK to save the values Clicking Cancel will abort any changes 17 4 4 4 Job Information Job Information is text that is printed on the final imposition page Usually it is placed along the lower edge of an aluminium plate or imagesetter media It picks up information about the job and places that information on each side of each signature template This option is used in conjunction with text marks that are predefined in the stand alone version of the Preps program when a template is created The Preps module takes the information provided in this dialog finds the corre sponding section of the Preps template text mark and labels the signature with this information Job Information comes in two parts e Job Type e Job Contents 244 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 17 4 Preps setup To create Job information 1 Select Job gt Job Information The following dialog appears Job Information Cancel Type j x Add Modify Note Content l Delete Note Figure 17 14 Job information dialog 2 Inthe Type field either select an option from the drop down menu or key in anew information Type The job information Types must match a variable that exists on the signature template In addition you should use the predefined variables that Preps has been programmed to recog nize For a list of those v
20. When you have selected the required fonts to be loaded click OK You will be prompted to restart the module for your changes to take effect Remove MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 137 11 PreCheck To remove fonts from the system highlight the fonts in the list and click this button You must click Yes in the Confirmation dialog box Substitution This option allows you to substitute one font for another The dialog that appears when this option is selected has two areas the upper text box labeled Name of the substitution is where you key in the name of the font to be substituted and the lower menu labeled Font to Substitute is where you select the font to be used as the substitution Generally it is preferable to use the exact font that was used in the design of the document However there are times when this is not possible a font may be corrupt or the original font may not have been sent with the original file In such cases the only solution is to substitute with a font that is very similar in design to the original specified font The customer may ask you to do this to get the job done on time One solution is to open up all the pages in the original application program and search and replace every occurrence of the problem font This is not ideal as it is time consuming you may not have the original application and if you miss one or two occurrences where the font was used the processing time would be wasted Having the P
21. ait bmp 2312 62 04 04 01 12 04 32 tiff balon bmp 2322 22 04 04 01 12 05 22 tiff aurora bmp 1415 10 04 04 01 12 05 38 tiff OPI 2 Finish processing file balon bmp at 04 04 01 12 05 18 OPI 2 Start processing tiff file aurora bmp at 0404 01 12 05 36 OPI 2 Finish processing file aurora bmp at 04 04 01 12 05 36 OPI 2 Start processing tiff file blue bmp at 0404 01 12 05 53 OPI 2 Finish processing file blue bmp at 0404 01 12 05 53 Figure 10 7 OPI Viewer File name This column lists jobs which have been processed by the OPI module Size This column lists the low resolution image file size measured in bytes Last access time This column lists the date and time that a low resolution image file was last accessed in the OPI low resolution folder Type This column lists the file type of the low resolution image MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 127 10 OPI 128 10 2 2 1 OPI window controls Many of the controls in the OPI Viewer window are described in Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 Those which are not already covered are described below Delete selected jobs Pal This button will remove selected files from the low resolution folder You will be prompted to confirm the action before the file is deleted O Preview Select a file from the job list and click this button to open a preview window with the image displayed ip Force replication This button will force the
22. box and then click on the option you are interested in 384 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 27 2 Windows Printer controls 27 2 2 Windows Printers Viewer If you choose View from the Windows Printer module pop up menu the Windows Printers Viewer opens Windows Printers System View Help Windows Printer End spooling Everglades c at 4 2 01 3 31 54 PM Windows Printer Start spooling Everglades c color Magenta at 4 2 01 3 31 54 PM soy Windows Printer Closing document 19 JobID 35 Windows Printer End spooling Everglades c at 4 2 01 3 31 54 PM A Figure 27 4 Windows Printers Viewer This dialog box allows you to view the status of all the Windows Printer mod ules that are in the workspace This dialog consists of a table listing the status of each Windows Printer module as well as a log monitor window in which you can view progress and error messages All messages in the log monitor window are prefixed by the name of the module to which they refer Name This column lists the name of the Windows Printer module that appears in the workspace The name of the Windows Printer module is specified in the Device tab as described in Device name on page 383 Status This column indicates the status of the module Log This column indicates whether or not the module is set to record all mes sages in a log file yes no See Log file directory on page 15 for details on how to specif
23. fo inch I Force To Print Monochrome Contigure Printer Figure 27 3 Device tab for the Windows Printer module The options in the Device tab fall into categories printer options and output options as described in the following subsections 27 2 1 1 Printer options Device name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 383 27 Windows Printer Prints On MWF displays all network printers accessible from your computer in this menu Choose the Windows printer to which you wish to send out put 27 2 1 2 Output Options Custom Bottom Margin You can specify a bottom margin by entering the value in this text box You can choose the units of measurement from the menu alongside this text box Force To Print Monochrome Select this check box to ensure that you output to the printer in a mono chrome color format This overrides any setting you make in the Document Properties dialog box Configure Printer Click this button to set your output options The standard Windows Document Properties dialog opens which displays controls specific to your printer For example you can specify the paper size and orientation that you wish to use For full details on the options in the Page Setup and Advanced tabs in this dialog click 2 at the top right of the dialog
24. if you select the 90 degrees Rotation radio button the page icon is rotated by 90 degrees Trim Select this check box to trim any white space off the top and bottom of each page Note If you are sending output to a sheet fed device such as a typical laser printer using Trim does not save media and is very likely to alter the registration between pages for example when the content of those pages has a variable outline By default this option is not selected Mirror Select this check box to produce a mirrored image which is reflected about the vertical axis If the job being sent was already reflected select ing the Mirror option cancels this out giving a non mirrored image This control allows you to undo the settings required by some print shops that the job be provided ready for film or plate By default this option is not selected MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 309 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules 310 Negative Select this check box to produce the page in negative If the job was already in negative that is a negative image is defined in the page description the two negatives cancel each other out giving positive output This provides a mechanism to reverse a photographic image produced on acetate based film a film negative or photosensitive resin coated paper a paper negative On a black and white negative white images become black and black images become white on color negatives each tone value i
25. it is converted into DLD1 format before being added to the folder This can then be loaded into the RIP whenever necessary Installation is performed on a copy of the font so your original font file remains intact Microsoft Windows handles the Windows Fonts folder and its contents specially If you wish to install a font found in this folder first make a copy of the font in another place and then install that copy into the RIP You can then discard the copy that you made MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 9 4 Fonts Setup Downloading fonts to the RIP This section describes how to download fonts to the Harlequin RIP e Multiple Master fonts Multiple Master fonts may be downloaded over AppleTalk from a Macintosh using the downloader supplied with them FireWorks the Harlequin font downloader can considerably ease the task of installing some composite fonts If you would like more informa tion about FireWorks please contact your supplier e TrueType fonts Some downloaders are available for installing TrueType fonts on RIP disks Such downloaders work with the Harlequin RIP e CID fonts If your CID font is supplied with a downloader install the font and any relevant CMAP file over AppleTalk using the supplied down loader If no downloader is supplied use the Install Fonts command All installed fonts are placed in the MAxWorkFlow swnt sw fonts folder except for CID fonts and CMAP files which are placed in the crpFont and cma
26. method which suits you best Note The terms ZIP and Flate are interchangeable they both refer to the same kind of compression Quality This option is available when JPEG is used as the image compression method From the drop down menu select the image quality to use for JPEG compression 272 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 20 2 Optimizer controls 20 2 1 3 Additional tab Setup for Optimizer x General Images i Fonts IV Preserve Font Embedding OPI Information fignore x I Produce True Type Fonts I Convert spot colors for legacy systems I CMYK Separation I Use title as output file name I Preserve QuarkXPress halftone information Figure 20 5 Optimizer Setup Additional tab CMYK Separation Select this check box to convert a CMYK composite file into CMYK separations OPI Information This determines how OPI information contained in the PostScript lan guage file is maintained The options in the menu are Ignore OPI information present in the PostScript language file is removed during optimization Preserve OPI information present in the PostScript language file is not removed during optimization Apply The optimizer applies OPI information into the optimized PostScript language file using the OPI infor mation already present in the job file MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 273 20 Optimizer Convert Spot Colors for legacy systems Select the check box to convert spot colors such
27. o C390 C 180 C 270 Margins Left 0 inch Right 0 inch Top 0 inch Bottom J0 inch Resolution Horizontal X Vertical DPI Default resolution 300 x 300 Scaling Vertical 100 00 Horizontal 100 00 F Page adjustment Cancel Figure 22 1 Page tab The options generally comprise of media and page size options output options resolution options and scaling options and each are described in the following subsections 22 1 1 Media and page size options Roll Width If you are using media on a roll enter its width in the text box using the units from specified in the adjacent drop down list 308 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 22 1 Page set up options Max width Enter the maximum page width allowed for jobs Normally a job sets its own page size but if your job exceeds this setting then Page adjustment when selected will automatically resize the page proportionally to fit this max width value Choose the units of measurement from the menu alongside this text box Max height Enter the maximum page height allowed for jobs Normally a job sets its own page size but if your job exceeds this setting then Page adjustment when selected will automatically resize the page proportionally to fit this max height value Choose the units of measurement from the menu alongside this text box 22 1 2 Output options The output options that you choose are reflected by the page icon in this section For example
28. on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules File options PDF File Format Selects the output format for the PDF files created by the module The options are PDF v1 2 PDF file can be read using Acrobat Reader 3 0 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 285 21 PDF Creator PDF v1 3 PDF file can be read using Acrobat Reader 4 0 and later Thumbnail generation When selected this option causes PDF Creator to generate and embed thumbnail images of each page into the PDF These thumbnails are used as a navigation aid in Acrobat Reader It should be noted that Acrobat Reader 5 0 also generates thumbnails although these are produced at the time the PDF is opened Although embedding thumbnails results in slightly larger file sizes it enables a faster redraw of the thumbnails in Acrobat Reader Resolution Allows you to specify the resolution at which the job is rendered This affects jobs which contain resolution dependent and therefore device dependent code If your job contains pattern fills the printer driver attempts to snap the pattern frequency to a sub multiple of the device resolution Some drawing packages also use the resolution in conjunc tion with the halftone frequency to calculate the number of steps to use for graduated fills All other page elements should be unaffected by the resolution If the PDF is intended for printing you should set the resolu tion to be the same as the resolution
29. signatures For example if you applied rotation to the even pages in the Run List and then you decide you need to now apply rotation to the odd pages in the Run List you should clear the old selection or your rotation will be added again to the even pages when it is added to the odd pages Applying offsets to source files You are able to apply offsets to source files one at a time Different offsets can be applied to different source files in the same job You should apply offsets to source files when even and odd pages in your job need different offsets or when the offsets required vary from source file to source file If you want to apply different offsets to individual pages within a job you can apply them in the Run List To apply offsets to source files 1 In the File List either double click the file to be edited or select a range of pages right click and select Edit from the pop up menu The follow ing Page Position Adjustment dialog will appear Page Position Adjustment x Odd page Horizontal ff inch Vertical 0 Even page Horizontal fo inch inch Vertical fo inch T Ignore bounding box information Cancel Figure 17 6 Page Position Adjustment dialog 2 Enter horizontal and vertical offset amounts as required for both odd and even pages 3 If you want the Preps module to ignore the bounding box in the source file click the Ignore bounding box information option Every page ina source fil
30. such as name storage directory hold devices and so on This dialog box is described in Section 5 2 1 Spot colors Choosing this menu item opens the Spot Colors window as shown in Figure 5 12 All spot colors present in your MWF system are listed along with their component color density values and a preview of the color If you want to change a spot color click the CMYK value and enter a new MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 61 5 Queuer value directly into the text box The spot color preview changes to reflect the new value The other controls available in this dialog box are described next Spot Colors OL x i0 0 0 0 PANTONE PROCESS MAGENTA CV o ao pay __ Add color Delete color Find OK Cancel Figure 5 12 Spot Colors window PANTONE PROCESS YELLOW CY PANTONE PROCESS CYAN CY PANTONE PROCESS BLACK CY PANTONE ORANGE 021 CV PANTONE RED 032 CY PANTONE BLUE 072 C t PANTONE 100 CY PANTONE 101 CY PANTONE 102 CY PANTONE YELLOW CY PANTONE 103 CY PANTONE 104 CY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 62 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 5 2 Queuer controls Add color Use this control to add new spot colors to the list In the Spot Color Editor dialog box Figure 5 13 enter a name for the new spot color and set percent age density values for each color component Spot color editor olx Name m Logo Color Cyan Cancel Magenta 00 Yellow Black Figur
31. swapped in the document Generally it is preferable to use the exact font that was used in the design of the document However there are times when this is not possible a font may be corrupt or the original font may not have been sent with the original file In such cases the only solution is to substitute with a font that is very similar in design to the original specified font If substitution were not available the PDF module would do one of two things error and refuse to produce the job or substitute a default font that is not even close to the way it should look Either result is unacceptable One solution is to open up all the pages in the original application pro gram and search and replace every occurrence of the problem font This is not ideal as it is time consuming you may not have the original appli cation and if you miss one or two occurrences where the font was used the processing time would be wasted Having the PDF module offer to do the substitution for you on the fly is the best solution because all occurrences are guaranteed to be substi tuted In the Fonts window click the Select button to open the Create font substitution dialog box Figure 21 12 Create font substitution x Name of the substitution OK Courier Cancel Font to substitute Garamond SA Figure 21 12 Create font substitution dialog box Name of substitution Enter the name of the font to substitute swap out from the d
32. tags are also available for use in a file name template e lt TIME gt the time at which the file was processed e g 153936 approxi mately 3 39 pm e lt DATE gt the date on which the file was processed e g 20000412 for a file processed on the 4th of April 2000 e lt PLATE gt the plate number e g 01 e lt PROJECT gt the project name as specified in the Imposition module e g Project_0 These tags do not require a prefix and are not case sensitive Overwrite output file Selecting this option will cause the module to overwrite any files with the same name in the output folder Extension This is the file extension name that is added to the optimized file From the drop down list choose EPs or Ps or enter your own extension if required 270 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 20 2 Optimizer controls One output file per page Select this check box when you want the Optimizer to break a print job containing composite pages into separate files each with its respective page number as seen in the PostScript language file comments Default page size This specifies the page size for the output device so that the job can be optimized accordingly Choose the accompanying unit of measurement points inches mm and so on from the list Level This option is used to select the PostScript language level for the optimized file Data encoding Specifies the encoding type for the optimized file There are
33. 11 13 03 RST _ 28 97Kb Tiff x Passer Page Color Date Time Type Size Destination lobe gif a 19 03 02 11 16 35 RST 45 98Kb Tiff 1 a Gra 19 03 02 11 13 28 RST 130 24 Kb Tiff 1 4 Et Processed jobs window Queuer 2 File httpwww globalgraphics compdfssoftwareworkflowmax_output_prep pdf spooling at 19 03 02 11 21 51 Queuer 2 File httpwww globalgraphics compdfssoftwareworkflowmax_output_prep pdf spooled at 19 03 02 11 21 52 Message Log window Figure 5 14 Queuer Viewer 5 2 2 5 Jobs menu Reprocess Reprocesses selected jobs from the Passed jobs list to the output module The passed jobs list shows jobs which are being kept in the storage folder until they are deleted according to the delete policy setting as explained on page 52 Redirect selected jobs This option allows you to select an output device so that jobs which have already passed through the module can be sent to another device From the list choose the device you want to use for output and click OK The job will be reprocessed for the new output device MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 5 2 Queuer controls Abort job This option removes a job from the Process Jobs list that contains jobs which are awaiting processing or are currently being processed Delete This option removes a job from the Passed Jobs list and deletes the job from the Storage folder Hold This control stops a job from being sent to an output device after it has been relea
34. 20 2 6 Saving and opening workflows After creating a workflow it is a good idea to save it to disk so that it can be recalled at a later date When saving a workflow you save the workspace con figuration which includes all the modules and links that are present on the workspace as well as all the module settings To save a configuration click the Configuration menu and choose Save or Save as to save a previously saved configuration with another name Please note that saved workflows cannot be used on other installations of MWF To do that you must use the export import tools as described in Section 2 7 below To open a saved workspace configuration click the Configuration menu and choose Open Before opening the workspace will be cleared and you will be prompted to save any unsaved configurations 2 7 Importing and exporting workflows MWF allows you to import and export workflows so they can be used on other installations of MWF An imported workflow contains all the modules links and module options from the original configuration To export a configuration click the Configuration menu and choose Export To import a configuration click the Configuration menu and choose Import 2 8 Submitting jobs for processing Jobs can be submitted to MWF using either a MWF Virtual printer or through a MWF shared folder Use a virtual printer when you want to process a page from an application such as QuarkXPress Use a shared folder
35. 3 Queuer 3 PDF Creator 4 Harlequin RIP 1 Trapiorks 1 Tiff 1 Figure 21 2 Example 2 PDF Creator produces optimized job prior to ripping 282 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 21 2 PDF Creator controls In the third example Figure 21 3 the PDF Creator module is employed in the workflow to create a virtual proof Virtual proofs sometimes referred to as soft proofs are very desirable in high production shops especially for imposed sig natures By being able to quickly check the imposition for obvious flaws you can prevent wasting time and material t o It SmartScan 4 Queuer 4 imposition 1 Harlequin RIP 2 Tiff 2 t gt PDF Creator 5 Figure 21 3 Example 3 PDF Creator used to create soft proofs 21 2 PDF Creator controls To access the PDF Creator controls right click the PDF Creator module on the workspace to open a pop up menu as shown in Figure 21 4 From the menu all the module s configuration and viewing options can be accessed Setup F5 Fonts Ctrl F2 View F4 Change Computer F6 Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 21 4 PDF Creator pop up menu The PDF Creator pop up menu contains the following options Setup Opens the Queuer setup dialog box where configura tion options for the module can be specified Section 21 3 PDF Creator options describes each available option MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 283 21 PDF Creator Fonts Opens the Fonts dialog box where you can m
36. 6 D r 7Fof 21 runlen_53r2_final ps 7 D 0 8 of 21 runlen_53r2_final ps b D r Sof 21 runlen_53r2_final ps 9 D 0 10 of 21 tunlen_5312_final ps 10 Q o ora pele fe oi P Signature List 0 Records Total Pages 0 x No Template Signature Page start Figure 17 4 Manual mode with files The position of a page within the Run List determines the order in which it is imposed in the job Files in the Run List can be rearranged by dragging and dropping the pages into a new position You are able to sort pages by number by clicking the Page column title Similarly you can sort each column by click ing the column title Blank pages With the Preps module you are able to add blank pages to your Run List By adding blank pages to the Run List you can force a chapter to start on a right hand page This is helpful especially if you find that you have been sup plied PostScript language files where blank pages were not allowed to be MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 217 17 Preps 218 output like those generated by QuarkXpress Another example would be a catalog that needs blank pages interspersed throughout for sections to flow correctly To add a blank page into a job use one of the following methods e Right click in the Run List and select Insert blank page from the pop up menu e Drag and drop the Blank page icon into the Run List The position of the blank page within the Run List can be changed by drag ging and dropping the page
37. 7 User Manual 17 Preps i The Preps Automation Server is an imposition module for MWF You can use Preps to create production output on various types of device such as image setters platesetters and digital presses Preps can handle any imposition layout from saddle stitched and perfect bound jobs to more complex magazine layouts with pull out sections Jobs are flowed from source files into the imposition layout in the correct order required by the selected binding style 17 1 Installation To make use of the MWF Preps module you must purchase a full version of Preps from ScenicSoft E mail info scenicsoft com A number of points should be noted e Preps from ScenicSoft must be installed on the same machine as MWF for the Preps module to perform its functions e When you receive your version of Preps from ScenicSoft you must insert the dongle supplied with Preps into the dongle supplied with MWF and plug them into the machine running the applications MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 209 17 Preps 210 It is better to install Preps before MWF is installed MWF rewrites or appends some printer files found in the Preps program directory If these are not rewritten which happens if Preps is installed after MWF there will be undesirable results in the final imposition files clipped signatures errors such as Cannot read the Preps log file If Preps from ScenicSoft is already being used you will need to re install
38. 7 User Manual 4 2 SmartScan controls 4 2 1 2 Additional SmartScan Setup x General Additional virtual Printers Name Convention Error policy IV Enable RST to PS conversion I Use Ascii for convert TIFF to PS I Auto rotate Creo PRY raster files Pause Scan module on error Delete error file and continue work Move error file to error directory File stabilize time 3 sec Custom PS Comments Buffer size 2048 KB Defaut DPI 74 Queuer job priority p 0 minimal priority 10 maximum I Use Config Snap h NT shae I Mac Share NT share name Mac Share name Figure 4 3 Additional tab Error policy Determines the action to take when an error file is encountered in the workflow There are three options to choose from Pause scan module on error Processing is halted until the error file is deleted and the module is started again Delete error file and continue work The process is not interrupted but the error file is lost Move error file to error directory The file is moved to MWF_Data Input Scan lt x gt Error and processing continues MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 31 4 SmartScan Enable RST to PS Conversion This feature encapsulates raster data TIFF with a PostScript language wrapper producing a binary data file that can be processed by the RIP This feature is enabled by default Use Ascii for convert TIFF to PS Select this check box if you wish
39. A Rotation No Change x Creal Figure 17 7 Modify Run List Page dialog MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 225 17 Preps 226 3 In the Page Position Adjustment section select an option from the menu and enter Horizontal and Vertical values No Change This will not change the current position Set To This will set the position to the values in the Horizontal and Vertical text boxes Change By This will add the values in the Horizontal and Vertical text boxes to the existing value 4 Inthe Page Scaling Adjustment section select an option from the menu and enter Horizontal and Vertical values No Change This will not change the current scaling Set To This will set the scaling to the values in the Horizontal and Vertical text boxes Change By This will add the scaling in the Horizontal and Vertical text boxes to the existing scaling value 5 In the Rotation section select the required option from the menu 6 Click OK Layout details When required you are able to apply Page Position Adjustment Shingling creep Scaling and Bleed margins to an entire template or to individual page signatures Changes made in the Layout Details dialog affect the entire job If you make adjustments to one signature in the Signature Selection dialog you will notice that upon selecting another signature and choosing Layout Details those values have also been entered for the second signature and every other signa ture th
40. Add source files to the File List and create the Run list To add files to the File List they must first be available to the Preps module Therefore setup a SmartScan module with a drop folder into which you should place the files to be imposed When the files have been passed to the Preps module use one of the following options to add files e Click the Add files icon e Right click with the cursor in the File List and select Add Pages e Select Add Pages from the Job drop down menu The Available files dialog will appear Within this dialog are all the files avail able to Preps for imposition To add files to the File List they must be marked Files are identified as marked when a tick appears in the box at the left side of the window in the column There are several ways of selecting and marking files e Select the files in the list to be added to the File List You can use the Shift click option to select a range of files e You can click the check box in the column to mark the files e Alternatively with the files selected right click to display a pop up menu This menu has several options Mark Selected will mark all the selected files Uncheck all not used will uncheck any file in the list which is not used Mark above will mark the selected file and all files above the cur rently selected file Mark below will mark the selected file all files below the currently selected file MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manua
41. DCS module to display the pop up menu showing all the con figuration and viewing options Setup F5 View F4 Lau Jule Change Computer FG Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 25 2 DCS module pop up The following controls are available for the DCS module e Setup all output modules share common controls These are described in Chapter 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules For details on device specific controls see Device specific controls below e View see DCS Devices Viewer on page 362 See Module shortcut menus on page 18 for details on the other general options in the pop up MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 359 25 DCS 360 25 2 1 Device specific controls To configure the DCS module choose Setup from the DCS module pop up The Setup for DCS dialog box opens The options in the Device tab Alt D allow you to select device specific settings Page Colors Calibration Color profile Hl Device Name DCS Mode 00 Dutput type Singefe gt Compression None F Composite DPI 72 be V Composite VV Preview Output Folder JESMWF_Data Qutpu DCS2 Fl Backup Folder EE Figure 25 3 Device tab for the DCS module The options in the Device tab are all output options as described in the following subsection 25 2 1 1 Output options Device name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the wor
42. Enter a name for the virtual printer that will be published on the Apple Talk network MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 35 4 SmartScan 36 PPD Enter the location of the printer driver PPD used by the virtual printer The default location for the PPDs used by MWF is C MaxWorkFow PPD Depending on your installation this location may contain several PPDs Your supplier will be able to advise you on the appropriate PPD to use for the workflow you are setting up NT printer Select this check box to publish the MWF virtual printer on an NT net work This allows Microsoft clients to submit jobs from an application directly to MWF by printing to the virtual printer The virtual printer handles the PostScript language rendering process and places the job in the scan directory Printer name Choose a name for the MWF virtual printer and type it in the text box Printer shared name If you want to publish the printer on your NT network enter a name that clients will see on the network when adding the printer otherwise leave this field blank It is usual to use the same name for the shared printer as that used on the server as specified in Printer name However when choosing a name do not use the same name as a shared folder as this may problems If you have Windows 95 98 clients the virtual printer name must not be more than 8 characters and spaces are not permitted This limitation does not apply to Windows NT 2000 clients wh
43. Optimizer controls Right click the Optimizer module to display the pop up menu showing the configuration and viewing options Setup f5 Fonts Ctrl F2 View F4 Lau jule Change Computer F6 Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 20 2 Optimizer pop up menu The following controls are available for the Optimizer module e Setup see Optimizer setup below e Fonts see Optimizer fonts on page 275 e View see Optimizer Viewer on page 278 See Module shortcut menus on page 18 for details on the other general options in the pop up 20 2 1 Optimizer setup To set configuration options for the Optimizer right click the module and choose Setup from the pop up menu Configuration options for the Optimizer are described in the following subsections MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 267 20 Optimizer 20 2 1 1 General tab Images Additional Device Name Optimizer 1 M Output Format EPS Preview id Level Data Encoding gt Level 2 ASCII IV Use preview if available Preview DPI fr2 IV Compress View amp Level3 Binary Output Folder EAMWF_Data Output eps fl I Name template IV Overwrite output file Extension Default Page Size Width X Height Jv Gre Output kile Per Page fes loch E HEN Backup Folder f amp Error Folder amp E Figure 20 3 Optimizer Setup General tab Device name Allows you to enter a new name for the modu
44. Postscript Input Figure 2 3 SmartScan monitor window MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 17 2 MaxWorkFlow Manager 2 4 Module shortcut menus Frequently used module commands may be accessed by right clicking a module and choosing the appropriate command from a shortcut menu Setup F5 Fonts Ctrl F2 View F4 Lau ule Change Computer FG Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 2 4 Module shortcut menu Although each module uses a different shortcut module certain commands are common throughout Setup Can be used to open a module s setup screen where module options can be accessed View Can be used to open the module monitor window Clear Error Can be used to clear an error which may have stopped a module from processing Launch module Can be used to restart a module that has been shut down on the workspace Modules that are shut down appear disabled on the workspace Change computer Can be used to select a remote installation of MWF that will process jobs entering the module Delete Can be used to delete a module and remove it from the workspace 18 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 2 5 Networking MaxWorkFlow 2 5 Networking MaxWorkFlow MWF is a powerful server based application that is used to process jobs in a digital prepress environment MWF exerts a heavy processing workload on the server and at times of increased workload you may notice a degeneration of throughout To increase job output M
45. RIP at least 4096 KB the RIP displays a warning and quits The Memory for RIP text box is used for the amount of RAM designated to the RIP at start up The RIP consumes more RAM if needed while processing data Print buffer The print buffer is used to store processed raster data that is ready to be sent to the printer The Print buffer KB text box is used to define the amount of RAM designated to the RIP for the output of bitmap image data The print buffer is divided into regions of equal size called Bands which are typically 2048 KB in size Both Print buffer and Band size are configurable in MWF The Print buffer defaults to 10 000 KB and must be at least double the size of the Band buffer To change the size of the print buffer enter the number of kilobytes KB you require in the text box labeled Print buffer If there is not enough memory for the requested print buffer its size can be reduced automatically The figure you enter is the minimum amount of memory that the Harlequin RIP uses for buffering output Band buffer KB This text box is used for the amount of RAM designated to the Band buffer output This buffer accepts image data in strips from the Printer buffer for outputting to the DCOM CORBA bus The value specified in the Band buffer text box specifies the size in kilobytes KB of the bands into which the Harlequin RIP divides a page for rendering in the slow scan direction Larger bands mean the page is div
46. Select a font in the list box 2 Click Open Note Normally only LaserWriter font format files and PC format files with a pfb or pfa extension are visible in the upper list box If your fonts are not in this format select All files from the Files of type drop down list Use the Look in menu list to use other directories or drives You can also select several fonts and install them together Shift To select a block of several files select the first file in the block and then hold down the Shift key and select the last file in the block em To select several unconnected files hold down the Control key while making your selection A successfully installed font produces the message MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 105 9 Harlequin RIP 106 Installed font font_name in Type 42 format The Install Fonts dialog box allows you to install into the RIP Type 1 excluding multiple master fonts Type 3 and single byte PC format TrueType fonts or OpenType fonts with TT outlines There is no support for double byte fonts Macintosh format resource fork fonts or OpenType fonts with CFF outlines If you try to install a file that does not contain a font or that contains a font of another type the RIP displays a message in the RIP Monitor This does not harm the RIP or the file in any way the RIP just refuses to install it All fonts installed are placed in the MAxWorkFlow swnt sw fonts folder If a font is of Type 1
47. The values in this option determines the dimensions of the grids 15 2 2 Imposition Viewer Select the View option from the pop up menu or double click the Imposition module to display the Imposition Viewer window The status of the Imposition module is displayed Imposition Module System View Help Status Lo Paused Figure 15 13 Imposition Viewer For more information on the standard controls displayed in the Viewer see Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 189 15 Imposition Click this icon to display the Imposition Status dialog BSlo a m Color Page Page title Page file name E Tiff5 E Project name Tiff 5 amp 04 page2 ps page3 ps page4 ps page5 ps page6 ps page ps page8 ps Figure 15 14 Imposition status dialog You can choose how you view the files in this dialog by selecting an option from the drop down menu The options are No group Select this option to view all the pages to be included in the imposition Group by device Select this option to group all the pages by the same output device Group by device color Select this option to group all the pages by the same output device and color The following icons are available for selection wu Force imposition allows you to start the placement of the pages into the signatures manually This option is necessary when Early print in the Opti
48. This provides a list of jobs which are currently held in the Queuer as well as a list of jobs which have already passed through it For details on the Viewer window see Section 5 2 2 Queuer Viewer See Module shortcut menus on page 18 for details on the other options in the pop up menu MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 49 5 Queuer 5 2 1 Queuer setup To configure the Queuer module choose Setup from the pop up menu to display the Queuer setup dialog box shown in Figure 5 3 Queuer setup x Module name Queuer Storage Directory EAMAXWORKFLOW Storage Vv Multiplex Hold devices IV Copy Multiplex Last job on top J Spool job before processing Copies fi I Use name convention copies Delete policy Immediately after process Keep fi 440 min Never delete only manual Delete oldest file if free disk space lt fo Mb Max files V Generate preview for raster files IV Freeze when imagesetter is imaging Figure 5 3 Queuer Setup dialog box The dialog contains the following options Module Name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules Storage directory This option is used to set the folder location for jobs entering the Queuer module Files are held in the folder until they are deleted according to the Delete policy setting described below The defa
49. When using a perfect binding style Preps flows the Run List pages through the signa ture in the order in which they appear in the Run List When using the Auto select option Preps uses the largest signature available for auto matic selection based on the number of pages in the Run List To manu ally choose which page signature is applied to which pages use the Add option e Saddle stitched The Saddle stitched option is generally used for booklets catalogs and programs as long as the number of pages is not too many With saddle stitching sheets are folded and placed one inside the other When this is done the inner pages of the booklet will protrude beyond the edge of the outer pages Therefore the edge will often be trimmed to size The Preps module flows an equal number of pages from the begin ning and end of the Run List through the largest signature in the tem plate available for automatic selection If there are not enough pages to complete another full signature Preps flows the remaining pages through the signature within the template that most closely matches the MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 221 17 Preps 222 remaining number of pages If there are not enough pages to fill the selected signature blank pages are automatically added to the end of the Run List Alternatively you can manually select signatures using the Add option Come n Go Use the Come and go binding style to produce two perfect bound books bou
50. You may also access this command from the Modules menu or press Delete on your keyboard Setup This tool is used to access a selected module s setup dialog box where module options can be configured You may also access this command from the Modules menu or press F5 on your keyboard Pause Use this tool to start and stop job processing in the selected module s The button shows the current state of the selected module You may also access this command from the Modules menu or press F2 on your keyboard to start or stop all modules on the workspace e Auto Arrange Use this tool to have MWF organize the modules that are on the workspace Depending on which tool is selected from the drop down list the modules are automatically arranged in horizontal tree vertical tree or line tree alignment A certain amount of experimentation may be necessary to achieve the best layout with this tool MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 13 2 MaxWorkFlow Manager You may also access this command from the View menu or press F8 for horizontal tree F9 for vertical tree or F10 for Line tree 2 2 Manager options MWF Manager has a set of options that control general settings for MWF To access these options open the Manager Options dialog box by selecting the File menu and choosing the Options command or by pressing F3 on your key board System Desktop Network IV Auto load last configuration T Stop system if illegal link ad
51. a regular basis A solution to this problem is to set up a double Queuer workflow as shown in Figure 5 5 Connect Queuer 1 to the Imagesetter and Queuer 2 to another output modules such as a TIFF module Set Queuer 1 to Spool job before Processing so that it does not stall the pipe MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 53 5 Queuer line between the RIP and Queuer 1 as the imagesetter starts to write This way it frees up the RIP to open the pipeline to Queuer 2 and allows the RIP to write freely to it without interruption Ha 3 3 Queuer 1 Max Imagesetter 1 i SmartScan 1 Harlequin RIP 1 3 3 s ii Queuer 2 Tiff 1 Figure 5 5 Workflow with double Queuer modules Hold devices list window Shows the list of output devices that are attached to the Queuer and is used to select which devices should have their jobs held by the Queuer When the Multiplex option is selected any devices selected are overrid den by multiplexing Hold devices Max Imaqesetter Figure 5 6 Hold devices window 54 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 5 2 Queuer controls 5 2 2 Queuer Viewer The Viewer window shown in Figure 5 7 shows jobs that are currently held pending release for when the destination module becomes available The Viewer also lists those jobs that have passed through the Queuer and have been retained possibly for re processing at a later date To open the Viewer right click the Queuer module and choose View from
52. advance the media before cutting it use the Media Feed menu option as described above 32 2 4 Max Imagesetter Devices Viewer If you choose View from the Max Imagesetter module pop up menu the Max Imagesetter Devices Viewer window opens MAX Imagesetter Devices System View Help O Name Status L Paused Max Imagesetter Max Imagesetter 2 Idle no no Max Imagesetter Started 2 22 00 PM Max Imagesetter 2 Started 2 22 00 PM Max Imagesetter 2 Paused 2 22 00 PM Figure 32 4 Max Imagesetter Devices Viewer This dialog box allows you to view the status of all the Max Imagesetter mod ules that are in the workspace This dialog consists of a table listing the status of Max Imagesetter module as well as a log monitor window in which you can view progress and error messages All messages in the log monitor window are prefixed by the name of the module to which they refer MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 423 32 Max Imagesetter Name This column lists the name of the Max Imagesetter module that appears in the workspace The name of the Max Imagesetter module is specified in the Device tab as described in Output options on page 419 Status This column indicates the status of the module Log This column indicates whether or not the module is set to record all mes sages in a log file yes no See Log file directory on page 15 for details on how to specify the location and other propertie
53. all the configuration and viewing options Setup F5 Fonts Ctrl F2 View F4 Lau jdule Change Computer F6 Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 7 2 Page Splitter pop up The following controls are available for the Page Splitter module e Setup see Section 7 2 1 Page Splitter setup e Fonts see Section 7 2 2 Fonts e View see Section 7 2 3 Page Splitter Viewer See Module shortcut menus on page 18 for details on the other general options in the pop up MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 7 2 Page Splitter controls 7 2 1 Page Splitter setup To configure the Page Splitter module select Setup from the pop up menu to open the Setup for the Page Splitter dialog Setup for Page Splitter x Device Name Page Splitter Output Folder EAMWF_D ata Output eps A File Name k NAME gt lt PAGE gt PS lV Overwrite output file Fonts Default Page Size Width X Height IV Preserve Font Embedding fas inchy X fn inch I Produce True Type Fonts AS ih I Preserve Halftone Figure 7 3 Setup Page Splitter dialog box This dialog provides access to various configuration options which are described in this section 7 2 1 1 General tab The options in the General tab allow you to name the module and direct files to their output folder Device name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log fi
54. also contains a Scan folder table listing the scan folders connected to Harlequin RIP modules to which files will be sent Both the output options and the Scan folder table are described in the following subsections MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 143 12 Load Balancer 12 2 1 1 Output options Module name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules File Transfer Select a radio button to specify how you wish the files to be distributed amongst the multiple Harlequin RIP modules Load Balance Select this radio button to balance the load between the Harlequin RIP modules according to specific criteria For example you can suspend output to a scan folder if 5 files already exist in that folder or if the total size of the files in the scan folder exceeds 1000 Kb Files are then sent to the next available scan folder Polling Select this radio button to send files to whichever RIP is free for processing If all RIPs are free for processing individual files are sent to each Harlequin RIP module in the order that they appear in the Scan folder table Use File Mask Select this radio button to use a file mask such as eps to decide which files will be sent to each Harlequin RIP module For example when adding the scan folder of a particular Harlequin RIP module to the Scan folder table you can specif
55. and a TIFF image is created to provide a record of the page Queuer modules are used in the workflow to facilitate job flow and to hold jobs before being output to an imagesetter Step 1 Place and link modules on the workspace 1 Start by clearing the workspace From the Configuration menu choose New If prompted by MWF save the existing workflow on the workspace if needed 2 Place a SmartScan module on the workspace Click the SmartScan module in the Module toolbar as shown in Figure 3 2 and then click on the workspace to place the module SmartScan module NIC phosphorus Figure 3 2 The SmartScan module 3 Place the other modules that comprise the workflow on the workspace these are Queuer 2 Imposition 1 Harlequin RIP 1 TIFF 1 Ultre SCSI Imagesetter 2 Arrange the modules on the workspace using Figure 3 1 as a guide 22 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 4 Create the workflow by linking the modules Click the Link tool to select it Click the first module in the workflow the SmartScan module and then click the second module the Queuer module to create a link Link tool EK A Saher Figure 3 3 The Link tool 5 Complete the workflow by creating links between the other modules Link the modules as follows SmartScan 1 Queuer 1 Queuer 1 Optimizer 1 Optimizer 1 Harlequin RIP 1 Harlequin RIP 1 TrapPro1 TrapPro 1 _ TIFF1 Queuer 2 Queuer 2 Ultr
56. are converted to RGB images in the PDF This may result in a smaller PDF file that displays on 290 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 21 3 PDF Creator options screen more quickly You should enable this if your documents are intended for on screen viewing but disable it if the PDF is destined for printing Convert device independent colors to device dependent colors Enabling this option can cause an apparent color shift in the images to which it is applied The conversion that PDF Creator uses is better suited to photographic images than to CMYK approximations of spot colors You may find that on screen reproduction of some graduated fills and tinted images is better with this option disabled than with it enabled With this option selected PDF Creator converts colors specified in device independent CIE based color spaces into device dependent RGB This produces PDF files which display more quickly Otherwise these colors are converted into a device independent calibrated RGB color space This produces PDF files which render more slowly but whose colors are more constant across properly set up output devices Preserve Halftones With this option selected any halftone changes requested by the job are passed through to the PDF file You should select this option when pro ducing PDF files for print and disable it when producing PDF files for on screen viewing Preserve Overprint When this option is selected any overprint parameters re
57. as Pantone colors to equivalent CMYK colors This option is designed as a workaround for use with certain editorial systems Use title as output file name Select the check box so that the PostScript language file title is used as the optimized output file name instead of the printed file name That is when printing the PostScript language file from a page layout program the name given the PostScript language file may be pages 1 16 whereas the original file name was Framed Kitchen Cabinets Select ing this option forces the file to be named by the original document name Framed Kitchen Cabinets Preserve QuarkXPress halftone information Select this check box to retain halftone screening information set in QuarkXPress The halftone frequency and angles specified in the Output tab of the Print dialog in are retained but the Dot shape information is not saved Fonts Preserve Font embedding Select this check box to keep fonts which are embedded in the PostScript language file Embedded fonts maintain their integrity across different machines even when the machine does not have the font installed Produce TrueType fonts Select this check box if you want to maintain the embedded TrueType fonts present in the PostScript language file When this box is not selected TrueType fonts are substituted with Type 1 fonts Preserve Font embedding must be selected for this option to be effective 274 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manu
58. be released before jobs with lower priorities See Queuer Job priority on page 33 for details on determining job priority This option is selected by default MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 51 5 Queuer 52 Spool job before processing When this option is selected the job is spooled to disk and allowed to sta bilize before it is processed any further This ensures that all of the job file is present before processing commences The disadvantage of select ing this option is that it may result in longer processing times since the module waits a short period for each file to be become stable We there fore recommend that you select this option only if you are experiencing spooling issues which may result in damaged files Delete policy Select an option to determine when files are removed from the Queuer storage folder This is an important factor to consider when setting up your workflows Disk space can quickly fill up when too many files are retained especially complex graphics that may themselves contain large previews MWF will shutdown any workflow where it is unable to retain a file due to lack of storage space Choose from one of the following options Immediately after processing Files are never saved in the storage folder they are deleted immediately after processing Keep nn minutes Files are retained for the specified period after which they are deleted Never delete only manual Files must be manually deleted fr
59. be printed You must select the Create X ruler check box to enable this option Click OK to generate a calibration page that is sent along the workflow to the output device an example of a simple workflow needed to create a rulers test calibration on an imagesetter is shown in Figure 4 9 t o j Scan Harlequin RIP Max Imagesetter Figure 4 9 Example workflow to output rulers test calibration page MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 43 4 SmartScan 4 2 3 Insert from The Insert from option available in the SmartScan pop up menu see Smart Scan controls on page 28 allows you to add jobs from a folder into the SmartScan module s scan folder For example you may want to resubmit jobs that have already been processed and stored in a backup folder or submit jobs from another folder as and when the need arises From the Select directory dialog box Figure 4 10 choose a folder where the jobs are located and click OK It should be noted that files are not deleted from the Insert from folder as is the case when using a scan directory Also job files which are not of the correct type that is those that are not PostScript language files EPS PDF or TIFF images are simply ignored and are not sent for pro cessing Select Directory xi Directory Name EAMWF_Data Backup 0000 M WF_Data B EAMWF_Data Backup 0000 Directories Files E EA ra M WF_Data Figure 4 10 Select the folder to Insert from 44 MaxWo
60. box Backup Folder This is the location of a folder to which backup copies of DCS files will be sent Select a backup folder in the same manner as described for selecting an output folder MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 361 25 DCS 362 25 2 2 DCS Devices Viewer If you choose View from the DCS module pop up menu the DCS Devices Viewer opens System View Help E DCS Module Finish processing color Black Everglades c ps at 4 4 01 4 13 26 PM DCS Module Building the main EPS file for Everglades c ps DCS Module Building composite RGB image DCS Module Composite RGB image done Figure 25 4 DCS Devices Viewer This dialog box allows you to view the status of all the DCS modules that are in the workspace This dialog consists of a table listing the status of each DCS module as well as a log monitor window in which you can view progress and error messages All messages in the log monitor window are prefixed by the name of the module to which they refer Name This column lists the name of the DCS module that appears in the work space The name of the DCS module is specified in the Device tab as described in Output options on page 360 Status This column indicates the status of the module which can be Idle or Busy Log This column indicates whether or not the module is set to record all mes sages in a log file yes no See Log file directory on page 15 for details on
61. box and Bitmap Images in the Sub directory text box then MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 10 2 OPI controls click Add When the OPI module receives a file of type bmp it will auto matically create a new folder called Bitmap Images and place a low reso lution image file there E Structure Of x tiff TIFF ipo JPegs Cancel bmp Bitmaps Bob_ Bob Images Mary_ Mary Images File mask Sub directory Frit p TIFF Add Remove Change Figure 10 4 OPI Structure dialog box PostScript comment Use PostScript language comments within the image file to create the directory structure These comments are added to the file in the SmartScan module Additional tab in the Custom PS Comments text box see Additional on page 31 Low resolution nn dpi Sets the resolution to which images will be converted Auto delete after nn hours Select the check box and then set a period after which the low resolution image will be deleted By default this option is not enabled You can also set a backup directory to store images see Additional tab on page 124 Printable EPS When this check box is selected a low resolution image file is generated that can be used for printing proofs to a printer For example a page layout can be sent to a Windows printer and low resolution images will show on the page without this option selected the page would merely show gray boxes where the image should be M
62. contain a preview image to allow a soft proof as well as a low resolution composite image that can be used to generate a printed proof 25 1 DCS workflow The DCS module is a file format module that is commonly used in MWF con figurations as an output module accepting raster image data from the Harle quin RIP This raster image data is converted into either a single file 2 0 specification DCS file or multiple DCS files 1 0 specification DCS files MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 357 25 DCS If you use the DCS module to produce individual files for color separations as well as a composite EPS file you can create additional workflows to process the composite and separation files e Composite files You can create a scan folder for composite EPS files which can then be sent to an output device module such as the HP Plotter This allows you to create a printed proof of the original input file before producing separations on an imagesetter e Separation files You can create a scan folder for separation files which can then be sent to an output device module such as Max Imagesetter to produce separations The figure below illustrates these workflows t 9 5 Input folder Harlequin RIP DCS Module Scan for composite EPS fies Harlequin RIP HP Plotter Scan for separation files Harlequin RIP Max Imagesetter Figure 25 1 DCS workflow 358 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 25 2 DCS controls 25 2 DCS controls Right click the
63. contain partial pages Preps will as a default tile the press sheet using only complete pages If the Preps module can only tile a press sheet by splitting pages a message will be displayed Auto place tile marks Click this option and Preps will automatically add tile marks to the overlapping areas of adjacent tiles The tile marks are used as an aid for manual stripping Tiling dimensions These options control the placement of tiles Selecting the down arrow at the right of each option allows the units to be changed Press sheet border When using a template that contains marks that are outside the press sheet you should configure a press sheet border so that the marks print with the job The values specified in this field are added to all sides of the press sheet Punch to image margin When using a device with a punch you can specify a Punch to image margin to ensure that the image area of the tile does not appear in the punch area of the tile When only a single tile is used this value is ignored Minimum tile overlap This field specifies the smallest amount of overlap allowed for tiles The overlap area may be larger than the specified amount When the Allow split pages option MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 243 17 Preps is checked partial pages can appear in the overlap area If this option is not checked the partial page will not be imaged No punch margin This option allows an image free area for manual punching
64. delete the entry in the Page s text box Page s Enter numbers for the page or pages that you wish to print You can enter individual page numbers or ranges separating each number or range with a comma character To enter a page range enter the numbers of the first and last pages in the range using a hyphen to separate them for example 7 16 If you wish to print all pages from a particular page to the end of the job enter a range starting with that particular page and ending with a number that you know to be higher than the last page in the PDF job for example 47 10000 You can combine individual page numbers and ranges for example 1 2 7 16 23 24 When printing a PDF job the Harlequin RIP displays a message for each page that is not printed because of being unlisted in this field This is a typical message Warning Skipping page 1 not in requested page range Page size bounding box PDF version 1 4 offers several options for defining a rectangular area that is the area of interest for a PDF page A PDF file may set values for one or more of these areas to be used as appropriate to the different ways that the PDF file can be used viewing office printing imposition commercial printing and so on The RIP looks for the values of the option chosen in this list and makes a page buffer of the size set by that option Only MediaBox must be present in a file but the other areas inherit default values from Med
65. described in the following subsections 29 2 1 1 Printer options Device name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 395 29 HP Printer 396 Device type Choose the device that you wish to output to from this menu Currently you can output to the HP DesignJet 5000 Calibration Choose a calibration profile to ensure quality printing You must choose a calibration profile that matches the paper type and resolution at which you are printing Passwords for To enable output to the HP DesignJet 5000 you must enter a password for the device as well as passwords to enable the use of color manage ment in the Harlequin RIP Choose the computer on which the Harlequin RIP is running from this menu and enter valid passwords in the Device HDS and ICC text boxes Device HDS ICC You must enter a valid password in this text box to enable the use of your chosen device If necessary speak to your vendor to obtain a password You must enter a valid password in this text box to enable the use of HDS screening If necessary speak to your vendor to obtain a password You can choose the particular type of HDS screening that you wish to use in the Colors tab as described in Harlequin Dispersed Screening options on page 319 However you should not change the defau
66. device along it in a drum device after selecting this check box the problem can probably be corrected by adjusting settings in MWF if they do not your hardware may be at fault 22 4 Calibration options Calibration settings for the output module are accessible in the Calibration tab as shown in Figure 22 8 Setup for Oce x Page Colors Screens Calibration Device Separations Cyan Magenta C Yellow f Black Default All Same Add point Save as Load value 10 20 Bo 40 50 jso 70 80 J30 Import Value 0 00 25 00 50 00 75 00 100 0 Transfer 0 00 30 00 55 00 70 00 100 0 Linearization 4 Press Calibration Figure 22 8 Calibration tab The calibration data is used to ensure that requested tint levels in a job can be reproduced accurately on the output device For example you can print cali bration targets with requested tint values 1 100 for all separations Cyan Magenta Yellow Black and then use a densitometer to measure the actual tint values produced by the output device If you discover that the output device produces a tint level for Cyan of 55 when only 50 was requested MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 327 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules 328 you can enter this calibration data in the Calibration tab as shown in Figure 22 8 MWF uses this data in color transfer calculati
67. directory Enter a folder location to store backup copies of your low resolution images This option can also prove useful in working with the Imposition module The directory can be pointed to for use in imposing low resolu tion pages into the imposition template This creates much faster throughput as each module SmartScan Queuer and so on does not have to digest and pass on the high resolution data The high resolution swap out occurs at the RIP module 10 2 1 3 Replication tab The Replication tab provides controls for replicating OPI images to other OPI modules on the workspace OPI setup Eg General Additional Replication Local WorkFlow OPI replication list aI All files coming to this module OPI 3 will replicate to all checked OPI modules Synchronization checking C On startup Even f1 hours Remote WorkFlow OPI replication list i Scanned graphics on PHOSPHORUS Add Remote OPI Delete Remote OPI Figure 10 6 OPI setup dialog box with Replication tab selected Local workflow replication list Select the local OPI modules to replicate with MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 125 10 OPI Remote workflow OPI replication list This option is similar to the Local workflow replication list option described above but here OPI low resolution and high resolution images are distributed across a network The advantage of this is that network traffic is tremendously scaled back as the
68. file page4 ps BarCode 1 File page4 ps done BarCode 1 Processing file pageS ps BarCode 1 File page5 ps done BarCode 1 Processing file page6 ps BarCode 1 File page6 ps done BarCode 1 Processing file page ps BarCode 1 File page ps done BarCode 1 Processing file paged ps X BarCode 1 File page8 ps done Figure 6 4 BarCode Viewer For more information on the standard controls displayed in the Viewer see Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 As each page is run through the BarCode module it appears in the lower list 72 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 7 Page Splitter h The Page Splitter module takes a multi page file and splits it into one file for every page Thus a single PostScript file with 10 pages will be converted into 10 separate PostScript files The Page Splitter module consumes and generates PDF EPS and PostScript language files 7 1 Page Splitter workflow The Page Splitter module would generally be placed in the workflow after a Smart Scan or Queuer module The files generated by the module can be made available to other systems via another Queuer module or sent for output via a Harlequin RIP module t NO0 a I Scan 1 Queuer 1 Page Splitter 1 Harlequin RIP 4 Tiff 4 Figure 7 1 Page Splitter workflow MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 73 7 Page Splitter 74 7 2 Page Splitter controls Right click the Page Splitter module to display the pop up menu showing
69. frequency and angles specified in the Output tab of the Print dialog in QuarkXpress are retained but the Dot shape information is not saved 7 2 2 Fonts To add remove or substitute fonts select Fonts from the Page Splitter pop up menu Fonts x Font File Add New r Aavasaksa Book avskb ps s r Aavasaksa B ook0 blique avskbo ps PERRA Cr Aavasaksa Demi avskd ps r Aavasaksa DemiOblique avskdo ps Z AvantGarde Book Aavasaksa Book Substitution Z vantGarde BookOblique Aavasaksa BookOblique Z AvantGarde Demi Aavasaksa Demi Z AvantG arde D emiOblique 2 Bookman Demi 2 Bookman Demiltalic z Bookman Light rim ea oe fa fonts hd Aavasaksa Demi0blique Puumala Demi Puumala Demiltalic 84 Puumala Light zi Fonts Cancel Figure 7 4 Page Splitter Fonts menu This dialog lets you manage both Type 1 fonts also known as ATM fonts or PFB format fonts and TrueType fonts MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 77 7 Page Splitter 78 The core font set includes clones of the 35 standard PostScript compatible printer fonts as well as stub files which refer to them For example Helvetica is one of the standard fonts but the font file for Helvetica is just a stub that substitutes the clone font Helsinki instead Use the pull down menu in the lower left corner of the dialog to select the type of fonts to be viewed The A11 fonts option displays all the installed fonts Add New
70. general options in the pop up MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 403 30 Epson Printer 404 30 2 1 Device specific controls To configure the Epson Printer module choose Setup from the Epson Printer module pop up The Setup for Epson Printer dialog box opens The options in the Device tab Alt D allow you to select device specific settings Setup for Epson printer x Page Colors Screens Calibration Color profile Device Name Epson piter Device Type Stylus Pro 7000 Calibration None z Passwords for WHIRLYGIG 7 Device 0 Hsp eo Windows Printer Media type Sheet z M Page Size No Printer jE Leter hd I Center Page on Media m Margins Left fo inch Top fo inch Quality Enhanced Microweave 7 Compression Run Length 7 Figure 30 4 Device tab for the Epson Printer module The options in the Device tab fall into categories printer options password options and output options as described in the following subsections 30 2 1 1 Printer options Device name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 30 2 Epson Printer controls Device Type Choose the device that you wish to use to create a proof from this menu You must enter a valid password for the device in the Passwords for section Calib
71. generating the plates and films themselves and using those files with your press can bring you to color far faster reducing make ready times and wastage and removing the need for plate scanners MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 365 26 CIP3 366 26 1 CIP3 workflow The CIP3 module is a file format module that is commonly used in MWF con figurations as an output module accepting raster image data from the Harle quin RIP This raster image data is converted into a PPF file The figure below illustrates this workflow t 0 3 SmartScan Harlequin RIP CIP3 module Figure 26 1 CIP3 workflow 26 2 CIP3 controls Right click the CIP3 module to display the pop up menu showing all the con figuration and viewing options Setup F5 View F4 Laune Jule Change Computer F6 Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 26 2 CIP3 module pop up The following controls are available for the CIP3 module e Setup all output modules share common controls These are described in Chapter 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules For details on device specific controls see Device specific controls below e View see CIP3 Devices Viewer on page 379 See Module shortcut menus on page 18 for details on the other general options in the pop up MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 26 2 CIP3 controls 26 2 1 Device specific controls To configure the CIP3 module choose Setup from the CIP3 module pop up
72. how to specify the location and other properties of the log file MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 25 2 DCS controls Paused This column indicates whether or not the module has been paused yes no You can click the GO STOP button to start or stop the module For further details on the general controls in the dialog see Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 363 25 DCS 364 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 26 CIP3 CIPS a The CIP3 module allows you to convert files that have been processed by the Harlequin RIP to Print Production Format PPF files as specified by a group called International Cooperation for Integration of Pre press Press and Post press CIP3 PPF files contain information about print jobs including adminis trative data information about inks and register marks comments and pre view images The CIP3 specification is available on the World Wide Web www cip3 org Briefly the group wish to provide enabling standards for applying Computer Integrated Manufacturing CIM techniques to printing workflows by avoid ing the need for recalculation or re entry of information The result of this work is the Print Production Format PPF file specification In the Harlequin RIP you can use the same RIP that generates your film or plates to create CIP3 PPF files enabling ink keys to be set quickly and easily on press CIP3 file generation is just as easy and automatic as
73. in the Viewer is listed with the following information Job Id An identification number assigned to each job Sepa rated jobs CMYK are assigned the same id number since they are part of the same job MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 55 5 Queuer 56 Processing job and Passed job Page Color Date Time Type Size Destination The file name of the job You may change the job name by using the Change name tool as described in Change names on page 65 The page number of the job when the job consists of multiple pages The color designated from the final output specifica tions For example CMYK composites are Device CMYK monochrome separations are Cyan Magenta Yellow Black Date the job was submitted to the Queuer module Time the job was submitted to the Queuer module File type for the job Memory byte size of the job file Final destination output module for the job 5 2 2 1 Viewer toolbar The Viewer toolbar shown in Figure 5 8 contains tools for manipulating jobs listed by the Queuer Some of the buttons in the toolbar are applicable to only one of the lists processing jobs or passed jobs and consequently appear dimmed when the tool is not available for a particular job ADO GAIA IG a a 0 Figure 5 8 Viewer toolbar The controls in the toolbar work on selected jobs as follows Hide window 4 mas Closes the Viewer window MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 5 2 Queuer controls Go St
74. is a mismatch between the Port setting in the Configuration dialog box and the port interface to which your measuring instrument is con nected Try changing the Port setting or connecting your measuring instrument to the specified interface port Error No responding device attached to selected serial line This message may appear if the measuring instrument does not have any power supply Check the power supply to the measuring instrument and ensure that it is switched on If the problem persists there may be a fault with the power adapter or cabling MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 115 9 Harlequin RIP Error Failed to open serial line Restart your Mac This message may appear if you attempt to read a target after having communication problems Restart your computer and ensure that you have the correct Port setting in the Configuration dialog box and that your instrument is powered on Error Unknown This message may appear if you have used the File gt Abort Target menu option This message may also appear if the RIP is unable to recognize the error generated by your measuring instrument Check any display panel on a manual instrument for more details In all cases you will be asked whether you wish to re try measuring the target If the error persists consider recalibrating the measuring instru ment or following advice in the Symptoms section Symptoms Failure to communicate with the measuring instrument This may be du
75. is adequate for most screen preview purposes Output Folder Use this option to specify a folder for optimized PostScript language files produced by the Optimizer module If the Optimizer passes its output directly to another module as seen in Figure 20 1 then it is not necessary to specify an output folder However you may wish to set an output folder so that the optimized PostScript language files are avail able for later use Enter the folder location directly in the text box or click and use your mouse to navigate to a folder MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 269 20 Optimizer Name template This field allows you to specify a template so that PDF files are named accord ing to the tags that are specified The following tags are supported e lt NAME gt the job name e g jobname ps e lt coLOR gt the color name e g Gray Cyan Magenta etc e lt PAGE gt the page number e g 1 2 etc e lt TITLE gt the name of the PostScript language file without the ps extension e g jobname If you use the naming convention feature in the SmartScan module to create other tags with different field names for example name1 you can also use these tags To use tags created by the naming convention feature you must precede them with pg_ for example lt pg_name1 gt The prefix pg_ and the field names are not case sensitive and can be in any order If an Imposition module is part of your workflow then the following standard
76. is ignored if you select the as Job check box Rotation Select one of the rotations available in this list The default is 0 zero degrees for no rotation Left Offset and Center Select the Center check box to center the image horizontally on the film Alternatively to set a fixed offset deselect the check box and enter a value in the Left Offset text field A positive value moves the image to the right The value set here is ignored if you select the Center check box MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 373 26 CIP3 374 Note Figure 26 4 page 370 shows the effect of positive values for left and bottom offsets You can also enter negative values Bottom Offset and Center Select the Center check box to center the image vertically on the film Alternatively to set a fixed offset deselect the check box and enter a value in the Bottom Offset text field A positive value moves the image upwards The value set here is ignored if you select the Center check box Mirror Select one of the choices available in this list The default is None for no mirroring but you can choose Horizontal or Vertical for cases that require it For example you may require mirroring where outputting the image emulsion down 26 2 1 4 Contents options Version Select your PPF readers language version The options are Version 2 0 2 1 and 3 0 with the default set to 2 0 Compression The options are None and Run length None produces an uncompre
77. it to activate the Automation option Before reinstalling Preps you should copy the templates folder to another safe location This will save all your custom templates Reinstallation of Preps for additional features such as Automation will rewrite the templates folder and sub sequently all templates designed up to that time will be lost When Preps is installed copy the templates folder back into the new Preps directory Be careful to put the templates folder back into the right sub directory so that Preps can find the templates during imposition When you install Preps you must activate the Automation option This can be done during the initial installation of Preps or later after Preps has already been installed Use the following procedure to activate the Automation option within Preps 1 2 5 Double click setup exe Click Next or Yes until the options for Standard install and Custom install are displayed Click Custom Install followed by Next If you have already installed Preps check the Automation option and uncheck any other options If Preps is not already installed check the Automation option and leave all other options unselected Now continue the installation as normal Note MWE supplies the necessary dongle and Sentinel drivers When the Preps icon is added to the MWF desktop the Preps Automatic Server will automatically be started This is indicated by the ScenicSoft splash screen briefly appearing Y
78. log file MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 34 2 Ultre SCSI Imagesetter controls Paused This column indicates whether or not the module has been paused yes no You can click the GO STOP button to start or stop the module There are also some device specific controls that are accessible from the System menu Media Feed If you choose this menu option the media in the imagesetter is advanced as discussed in Media Feed on page 439 Media Cut If you choose this menu option the media in the imagesetter is cut as discussed in Media Cut on page 439 For further details on the general controls in the dialog see Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 441 34 ULTRE SCSI Imagesetter 442 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual
79. may ask you to do this to get the job done on time One solution is to open up all the pages in the original application pro gram and search and replace every occurrence of the problem font This is not ideal as it is time consuming you may not have the original appli cation and if you miss one or two occurrences where the font was used the processing time would be wasted Having the Optimizer module offer to do the substitution for you on the fly is the solution because all occurrences are guaranteed to be substituted MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 277 20 Optimizer 20 2 3 Optimizer Viewer Right click the Optimizer module and choose View from the pop up menu to display the Optimizer Viewer window as shown in Figure 20 8 System View Help Er Devices Jobs l Name Status Li Paused Optimizer Optimizer Idle no no PS PDF Optimizer Start processing job Butterfly c ps at 11 04 01 14 06 58 PS PDF Optimizer Finish processing file Butterfly c ps at 11 04 01 14 07 09 PS PDF Optimizer Start processing job GOLFER PS at 11 04 01 14 07 12 PS PDF Optimizer Finish processing file GOLFER PS at 11 04 01 14 07 13 PS PDF Optimizer Start processing job train ps at 11 04 01 14 07 18 PS PDF Optimizer Finish processing file train ps at 11 04 01 14 07 19 Figure 20 8 Optimizer Viewer The Viewer allows you to view the status of all Optimizer modules on the workspace as well as a list of all jobs which have been co
80. menu This is the order of bytes in a word needed by the TIFF reader to correctly interpret the TIFF header Most TIFF readers can read both sorts of header Compression You can choose the compression format to use for the output file from this menu The choices are None CCITT Group 4 LZW Or Packbits The TIFF module is configured to use LZW compression by default and this works well with both monochrome and CMYK output Note The CCITT Group 4 compression format is only suitable for monochrome output MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 343 23 TIFF 344 TIFF format You can choose the basic internal format used for the file from this menu TIFF files can either contain the image data ina Single strip all in one chunk or Multiple strips several chunks Reverse bit order Select this check box to produce monochrome TIFF files with reverse bit ordering This reverses the order of bits in a byte in the raster data of a monochrome TIFF file so if the byte was 11010001 it becomes 10001011 Pad to 32 bit alignment Select this check box to make each line of the TIFF file data end on a mul tiple of 32 bits This is an efficiency setting for monochrome output only that may make the file faster to read in some applications 23 2 1 4 Post processing options You can use this section of the dialog box to define extra actions after the TIFF module has created each TIFF file These actions depend on commands sup plied with Micro
81. module e Setup all output modules share common controls These are described in Chapter 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules For details on device specific controls see Device specific controls below e View see HP Plotter Devices Viewer on page 391 See Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 for details on the other general options in the pop up 388 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 28 2 HP Plotter controls 28 2 1 Device specific controls To configure the HP Plotter module choose Setup from the HP Plotter module pop up The Setup for HP Plotter dialog box opens The options in the Device tab Alt D allow you to select device specific settings Setup for HP Plotter x Page Colors Screens Calibration Color profile Device Device Name JHP Plotter Port fie Quality n JetDirect Draft f Final i a Color Mode ie o Ir Monochrome Color High Speed Option Figure 28 3 Device tab for the HP Plotter module The options in the Device tab fall into categories printer options and output options as described in the following subsections 28 2 1 1 Printer options Device name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 389 28 HP Plotter Port Choose the port t
82. module appears disabled on the workspace and its icon is remove from the Windows System Tray The module MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 303 21 PDF Creator 304 code is also removed from system memory It may be necessary to shut down a module if the system becomes unstable or if a system access violation error occurs To re launch the module right click it on the workspace and choose Launch module from the pop up menu View gt Hide window This menu item closes the Viewer View gt Toolbar This command shows hides the toolbar The toolbar tools are described next 21 5 2 PDF Creator toolbar The PDF Creator Viewer toolbar contains tools for the most commonly used commands in the Viewer The toolbar is usually anchored at the top of the Viewer but it can be pushed off and become free floating on the desktop Push the toolbar at its edges to detach it To place it back in the Viewer move the toolbar into the Viewer just under the menus and release 9 O iel l Hide Use this tool to hide the Module View window when the toolbar is anchored or to show hide the View list when the toolbar is detached Start Stop Use this tool to start and stop modules A module must be started in a workflow before it is allowed to process jobs The button icon shows the current active state of the module so that when the control shows the module is started Abort job Use this tool to abort the current job in progress The t
83. module tries to send files to the next scan folder in the table if the current scan folder exceeds the specified limits Add Click this button to add a scan folder to the list of available scan folders The Add Directory dialog opens which is the same as the Edit Directory dialog box shown in Figure 12 4 except that you must enter values in the text boxes MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 145 12 Load Balancer Edit Highlight a scan folder in the Scan folder table and click this button to edit the details The Edit Directory dialog box opens E Edit Directory O x Name Path EAMWF_Data Input Scan 1 EA Error Path CAMWE_Data Input Scan 15Error Log File EAMWF_D ata lnput Scan 1 LogFile Mask fr IV Hold on Start Cancel Figure 12 4 Edit Directory dialog box The values that you enter into the text boxes in this dialog are displayed in the Scan folder table Name Enter a name to help you to distinguish the scan folder For example if you have three Harlequin RIP modules in your workspace and the scan folder is connected to the first module you can label the scan folder as RIP 1 as shown in Figure 12 4 This field can display up to 256 characters with spaces Path This is the location of the scan folder to which files pro cessed by the Load Balancer module will be sent You may either click within the text box and type in the path of your choice or click EA alongside the text box Error Path This
84. no You can click the GO STOP button to start or stop the module There are also some device specific controls that are accessible from the System menu Feed and Cut If you choose this menu option the media in the imagesetter is advanced and then cut as discussed in Feed and Cut on page 432 For further details on the general controls in the dialog see Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 433 33 ECRM SCSI 434 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 34 ULTRE SCSI Imagesetter The Ultre SCSI Imagesetter module allows you to send files that have been processed by the Harlequin RIP to an Ultre SCSI imagesetter You can use this module to track the media used by the imagesetter and to specify other output options such as the amount of space to leave between pages of a job 34 1 Ultre SCSI Imagesetter workflow The Ultre SCSI Imagesetter module is an output device module that accepts raster image data from the Harlequin RIP The raster image data is then passed to an Ultre SCSI imagesetter The figure below illustrates such a workflow t o v Scan folder Harlequin RIP Ultre SCSI Imagesetter Figure 34 1 Ultre SCSI workflow MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 435 34 ULTRE SCSI Imagesetter 34 2 Ultre SCSI Imagesetter controls Right click the Ultre SCSI Imagesetter module to display the pop up menu showing all the configuration and viewing options Setup FS Media Feed Ctrl
85. of the dot shape specified in the job Override Frequency Select this check box to use the halftone frequency specified in the Screens tab instead of the frequency specified in the job Advanced Click this button to use Harlequin Precision Screening which allows you to add extra gray levels to your job as described in Section 22 3 3 on page 321 22 3 2 Harlequin Dispersed Screening options If you click Harlequin Dispersed in the Screens tab you can choose the type of HDS screening that you wish to use MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 319 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules 320 Note This feature is a purchasable option When licensed a password is pro vided for activation Setup for Max Imagesetter x Page Colors Calibration Device Regular Hariequin Dispersed Type HDS The main advantages of using Harlequin Dispersed Super Fine Screening are that it produces no moir it has better definition than conventional screening and registration is C Fine less critical if HDS also has a visually pleasing screen structure Medium and is generally more printable than other FM screens Finally it should be noted that HDS is intended for use C Coarse with a wide range of printing processes C Super Coarse Password I Override Angle Override Dot Shape Advanced I Override Frequency Cancel Figure 22 5 Harlequin Dispersed Screening options The main advantages of using Harle
86. of the intended final output device otherwise you should only change the resolution if you experience poor quality output with pages containing patterns or graduated fills ASCII format If this option is selected any binary data including compressed text in the PDF file is converted to a printable ASCII representation This makes it safe to transmit your PDF pages over a medium that does not support binary transmission e mail for example It should be noted that using ASCII format increases the size of your PDF file Auto rotate Pages When selected the module attempts to determine the orientation of the majority of the text on the page and rotates the page until this text is ori entated upright The PDF Creator module will always honor requests for landscape output however some Windows applications produce land 286 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 21 3 PDF Creator options scape output by rotating the output onto a portrait page When printed out this is not a problem as the page can easily be rotated However when producing a PDF this leads to text running up the screen Output options Output Folder The Output folder is used to specify a directory for the finished PDF file Enter the location directly into the text box or use the navigation button to the right to locate a folder Backup Folder When a backup folder is specified a duplicate PDF of the processed file is created This is an efficient method for producing copi
87. option all other file naming options are disabled MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 341 23 TIFF The default file name template is lt NAME gt TIF which produces a file name of the form jobname ps TIF The following standard tags are available for use in a file name template e lt NAME gt the job name e g jobname ps e lt coLOR gt the color name e g Gray Cyan Magenta etc e lt PAGE gt the page number e g 1 2 etc e lt TITLE gt the name of the PostScript language file without the ps extension e g jobname If you use the naming convention feature in the SmartScan module to create other tags with different field names for example name1 you can also use these tags To use tags created by the naming convention feature you must precede them with pg_ for example lt pg_name1 gt The prefix pg_ and the field names are not case sensitive and can be in any order See Name Convention on page 37 for further details If an Imposition module is part of your workflow the following standard tags are also available for use in a file name template e lt TIME gt the time at which the file was processed e g 153936 approxi mately 3 39 pm e lt DATE gt the date on which the file was processed e g 20000412 for a file processed on the 4th of April 2000 e lt PLATE gt the plate number e g 01 e lt PROJECT gt the project name as specified in the Imposition module e g Project_0
88. or polyester that comes out of the plate output device Plate sheet Enter the width and height for the default plate sheet Plate sheet width and height represents the size of the piece of paper that goes through the printing press and gets printed on Imageable area is the area on that sheet of paper that can be printed affected by things such as non print ing gripper margins non printing gutters and folds Therefore plate sheet sizes are usually always larger than the imageable area Script manual plate design only Select the script most used for your plate signatures Plate start number The Plate start number option lets you choose to start a set of plates for the job with a number other than the default of 0 or the usual 1 This may be useful if you are only processing certain sections of a book that MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 187 15 Imposition 188 will later be collected together to form the whole project Perhaps you are treating each section as its own distinct job but for plate archival purposes for future reprints you have to keep the plates for the entire book together in numerical order Often jobs arrive in sections sometimes weeks apart It is not practical to hold everything waiting for all the parts of the job If the printing press and the bindery can get a head start on some of the book production schedules can be met much easier The ability to choose the Plate start number allows better job
89. page 423 See Module shortcut menus on page 18 for details on the other general options in the pop up 418 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 32 2 Max Imagesetter controls 32 2 1 Device specific controls To configure the Max Imagesetter module choose Setup from the Max Imagesetter module pop up The Setup for Max Imagesetter dialog box opens The options in the Device tab Alt D allow you to select device specific settings Setup for Max Imagesetter 1 x Page Colors Screens Calibration Device Device Name M ax Imagesetter Imagesetter type None Select imagesetter M Debug messages Fim conter Enabled I Use Film Counter Level 0 10 fi Film Left fo inch M Margins 7 Top fo inch Left fo inch Bottom fo inch Right a inch I Black margins Buffer Size Kb E 2 I Autologic III 3850 Advanced Figure 32 3 Device tab for the Max Imagesetter module The options in the Device tab fall into categories output options and media tracking options as described in the following subsections 32 2 1 1 Output options Device name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 419 32 Max Imagesetter Imagesetter type Click Select imagesetter to choose the imagesetter to which you wish to send output The imagesette
90. page size specified by the output device in the work flow From the menu choose the required output device When selected the page size specified in the output device appears in the Width and Height fields Width Height You should use these fields if you want to manually enter the width and height of the plate Plate sheet sizes Sheet size is the size of the piece of paper that goes through the printing press and gets printed on The plate sheet size is usually larger than the imageable area which is the available area on that sheet of paper that can be printed affected by things such as non printing gripper mar gins non printing gutters and folds Width Height You should enter the width and height of the plate sheet size in these text boxes Left top offset Enter values in these text boxes to offset the pages from the left moved to the right or from the top move the pages further down on the plate Gutter The gutter is the space between page pairs You can dictate how much the gutters are creeped moved from initial page pairing to final page pairing This allows for what is called page creep Page creep is a function employed when printing magazines that are stapled along the spine otherwise known as saddle stitching Saddle stitch is a binding method where each printed form is placed over the top of the previous as if you were saddling the form This is where the binding style First and Last is used see
91. pages are running through the Pairs module the output device appears in the window on the left of the module Click the plus signs to show the next level Keep selecting until the individual pages or separations are dis played When a page is selected it appears in the top right of the window Page attributes window together with its pair if created in the lower right of the window Plate attributes window MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 16 2 Pairs module controls By selecting the down arrow to the right of the Page Attributes option in either the Page attributes or Plate attributes window you display the Page or Plate attributes dialog The dialog can be pinned to the desktop by selecting the pin icon The attributes dialog displays information about the selected page or plate If you decide when viewing the plate setups that pages are not being posi tioned correctly you can change the Left offset Top offset and Gutter values in the Plate Attributes dialog To apply any changes you must select the Recreate plate button The Pairs status window provides the following controls m Select a page or plate then select the hold icon to hold the page in a queue Xe Select a held page or plate then select the release icon to allow the page i to continue processing S Select a page or a plate and select the delete icon to remove it MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 207 16 Pairs module 208 MaxWorkFlow 3
92. plates signatures can be written to and recalled from disk by using the Load from template and Save as template buttons Page design style Plate signatures are set up manually or by using the Signature wizard Alternatively you can use a combination of both Signature wizard and Manual design plate options MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 169 15 Imposition Use signature wizard Select this radio button to activate the Signature wizard icon making it available for use For more information see Signature wizard on page 171 Manually design plate Select this radio button to manually set up the plate sig nature For more information see Manual plate signa ture design on page 181 Whether you decide to use the Signature wizard or create manual signatures you should complete the plate dimensions before proceeding These values relate directly to the size of the output media onto which the signature is placed It is possible to use a combination of the Signature wizard and Manual design plate options The Signature wizard is designed to position all pages perfectly centered on the press sheet This is how most press sheets are set up When you have applied the changes all pages and gutters are configured for you in relation to the center of the sheet At this point you can go back to the Signature List and change from Signature wizard to Manually design plate All features of the Signature Design area now become accessible for yo
93. provided with the Select Page Signature Range option For example you may receive a series of 300 PostScript language files which are rotated incorrectly for final output You may need to rotate all even pages by 90 degrees With 300 pages in the Run List the Select Page Range option allows you to select all even pages in one go rather than having to individu ally select the 150 even numbered pages With all the even pages selected you can then right click and select the required rotate option The Edit right click command allows page position adjustment and page scaling in the imposition slots To use the Select Page Signature Range option 1 Right click in either the File Run or Signature List 2 Click the Select Page Signature Range option from the pop up menu The following dialog will appear Select Page Range xi C All Pages Page list pa C Odd Pages Other I Clear old selection nl Figure 17 5 Select Page Range dialog 3 Click the required range All pages Odd pages and so on and if required enter the range of pages to be selected 4 Click OK MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 223 17 Preps 224 Note If you decide to make further selections using the Select Page Signature Range dialog you can remove previous selections by clicking the Clear old selection option If you leave the Clear old selection option unchecked your new selection range will be added to any previously selected pages or
94. save current configura tions so that they become available for use in the drop down menu It saves all the information that you have entered including group name page position rotation and so on Subsequently you can recall and con figure new impositions by choosing the different page templates you need in the setup When the dialog is completed click OK The Run List will fill up auto matically You should not be concerned if the module does not put the pages in the correct Run position as in Manual mode What appears in the Run List is a listing of placeholders not the actual PostScript pages The pages are placed in the imposition slots based on the selections made in the Edit gt Options window There is a section specifying Incom ing Page Numeration For Preps to generate the proper imposition slots for each page the Name Convention option must be selected This requires the setting of a name convention on submitted files either through the SmartScan folder filtering the file name down to a page number or by letting the Optimizer module split a multi page document and add a specific page number to the name of each page See Preps setup options on page 233 for more information MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 229 17 Preps 4 Choose a template using one of the following options e Click the Signature setup icon at the top of the Page setup dialog e Right click the Signature List and select Signature selection from t
95. separations ae mon nh M Composition Algorithm I Cut out pages Fastest Fast I Exclude pages with same numbers Best I Duplex plate pages A amp B C amp D Default Add Edit Delete Test Load from file Save to file OK Cancel Figure 14 3 Composition server setup dialog box This dialog provides access to various configuration options Module name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules Bleed amp trim boxes Selecting these boxes applies a hairline rule around the page borders to show bleed and trim areas MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 159 14 Composition Server 160 Composing method Separation of one plate reads the plate s name and puts the individual CMYK plates with the same name back together for proofing A naming convention must be used so that the plates can be identified For example plate01 c plate01 m plate01 y plate01 b Any separation reads the value in the Files in the job box and then waits for the appropriate number of jobs before recombining them into a single raster This method allows you to check multiple black plates and spot colors Composition algorithms Enables the recombining of files Best is the slowest method but pro vides the best quality output Files in job Displays the number of files in the job For example
96. smooth curve when plotted on a graph If the value for a patch is not higher than the next patch there is a bump in the curve and the measure ment data is non monotonic An error message will appear if you try to change the calibration curve so that it is non monotonic Value Enter the requested tint value as a percentage as shown on the calibration target MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 22 4 Calibration options Transfer Enter the actual tint value measured from the calibration target in rela tion to the requested tint value See Section 22 4 2 on page 330 for details on how to produce and measure a calibration target Separations Select the separation that you wish to edit by clicking the relevant radio button The calibration curve for the selected separation is displayed in the calibration graph and can be edited as discussed in the introduction to this section Default Click this button to revert the calibration curve for the currently selected separation to the default linear curve The default linear curve assumes that the printer can accurately reproduce requested tint values All Same Click this button to change the calibration curves of all the separations to match the calibration curve of the currently selected separation Add point Click this button to open the Add Point dialog in which you can specify a new point in the calibration curve The Value Transfer values that you enter in the Add Point dialog ar
97. specified range For example values of From 100 To 120 and step 5 produces a sweep with exposures of 100 105 110 115 and 120 9 6 2 Using Genlin to read a target The Harlequin RIP module is supplied with the Genlin calibration utility Genlin provides an easy way to create a linearization calibration profile for your output device by allowing you to read from a suitable densitometer con nected directly to the MWF machine Before you begin using the densitometer especially after prolonged storage check the unit is calibrated correctly by fol lowing the manufacture s instructions MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 9 6 Creating a calibration profile Launch Genlin by right clicking the Harlequin RIP module and choosing Launch Genlin from the pop up menu The Genlin program window opens as shown in Figure 9 11 allowing you to create and configure a calibration profile Genlin LELI Fie _Help Figure 9 10 Genlin program window 9 6 3 Configuring GenLin Before you can create a profile you must configure Genlin From the File menu choose Configure to open the Configuration dialog box shown in Figure 9 11 Configuration x RIP Folder EAMAXWorkFlow sunt aw Instrument xRite DTP32 zl E Measure StatusT z Media Press Paper z Pot COMI z ok Cancel Figure 9 11 Genlin Configuration dialog The dialog box contains all the options for configuring Genlin RIP Folder Choose the folder where the Har
98. tab for the Ultre SCSI Imagesetter module The options in the Device tab fall into categories output options and media tracking options as described in the following subsections 34 2 1 1 Output options Device name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 437 34 ULTRE SCSI Imagesetter 438 SCSI address Host Adapter ID A host adapter is the card that connects your computer Ultre SCSI ID Async SCSI write to the SCSI bus An example would be a PCI SCSI host adapter like the Adaptec 2940UW Adaptec set all their host adapters to ID 7 by default Enter the ID for your host adapter Several devices can be connected to the SCSI interface Enter the SCSI ID for your Ultre device Select this check box to start the next operation before the current one is completed Operations are not synchronized Auto Advance Length Enter the length of film to be advanced between jobs Choose the units of measurement from the menu alongside this text box 34 2 1 2 Media tracking options Film Counter Use Film Counter Film Left Select this check box if you wish to track the media in your device To do this you must advance the media using the Media Feed or Feed and Cut pop up menu con trols as described in Media Feed on page 439 You must not advan
99. the Preps module or a preliminary workflow before Preps in which the multi page file is processed through the Harlequin RIP Either of these options will split any multi page documents into single pages that the Preps module can understand MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 211 17 Preps 212 17 3 Preps controls Right click the Preps module to display the pop up menu showing the config uration and viewing options Setup F5 View F4 dule Change Computer FG Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 j Figure 17 2 Preps pop up The following controls are available for the Preps module e Setup see Preps setup below e View see Preps Viewer on page 246 17 4 Preps setup To setup the Preps module right click the Preps icon and select Setup from the pop up menu There are two methods of using Preps within MWF automatic and manual composition Manual setup requires that the pages for imposition are made available to the module Automatic setup allows the module to be configured before the pages are available You can change between Manual and Automatic mode by clicking the i hand icon All icons in this module will display tooltips when the cursor is upon them The current mode is displayed in the Setup window title bar Note Although you can switch between Manual and Automatic modes any files left over from the previous mode should be discarded Preps will display a prompt asking if you want to dele
100. title may be used to set the file name for use in the CIP3AdmJob Name or CIP3AdmSheet Name fields lower in this dialog box Leave this check box unselected if you wish to ignore any SiDIGTitle comment Read Surface Select this check box to read the surface given in any SSiDIGSurface comment from the incoming job This title may be used to set the file name for use in the Job Name or Sheet Name fields Leave this check box unselected if you wish to ignore any SSiDIGSurface comment MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 26 2 CIP3 controls 26 2 2 CIP3 Devices Viewer If you choose View from the CIP3 module pop up menu the CIP3 Devices Viewer opens CIP3 Module System View Help O Name Status Li Paused CIP3 module 2 CIP3 module 2 Started 4 33 27 PM CIP3 module 2 Paused 4 33 29 PM CIP3 module 2 Started 4 33 30 PM Figure 26 5 CIP3 Devices Viewer This dialog box allows you to view the status of all the CIP3 modules that are in the workspace This dialog consists of a table listing the status of each CIP3 module as well as a log monitor window in which you can view progress and error messages All messages in the log monitor window are prefixed by the name of the module to which they refer Name This column lists the name of the CIP3 module that appears in the work space The name of the CIP3 module is specified in the Device tab as described on page Output options on page 367
101. to convert TIFF file s to PostScript lan guage files in ASCII format This option is mainly used for older sys tems that cannot handle binary data Auto rotate Creo PRV raster files Select this option when it is necessary to rotate output files originally generated by Creo systems File stabilize time Allows you to set a delay before files entering the scan directory are sent for processing that is before the job is passed to the next module in the workflow This delay is necessary to ensure that all data has been written to disk before MWF attempts to read it The default delay is 3 seconds but you may wish to increase this depending on the job file size or the latency factor inherent in your system network speed disk access time and so on This feature is particularly useful when submitting files to the spool folder via an FIP process If the SmartInput module tries to pick up a file for processing before the FIP program has fully released it the file may become damaged or the workflow rendered inoperable If you are using FIP we suggest that you increase the File stabilize time to 10 or 15 seconds which will allow the FIP program ample time to fully release the job to the input folder Custom PS comments Use this scrollable window to append comments or PostScript language code to files entering the SmartScan hot folder 32 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 4 2 SmartScan controls Buffer size Reserves an area of s
102. to display the pop up menu showing all the configuration and viewing options Setup F5 Feed and Cut Ctrl F2 View F4 Lau jule Change Computer F6 Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 33 2 ECRM SCSI Imagesetter module pop up The following controls are available for the ECRM SCSI Imagesetter module e Setup all output modules share common controls These are described in Chapter 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules For details on device specific controls see Device specific controls below e Feed and Cut see Feed and Cut on page 432 e View see ECRM SCSI Imagesetter Viewer on page 432 See Module shortcut menus on page 18 for details on the other general options in the pop up 426 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 33 2 ECRM SCSI Imagesetter controls 33 2 1 Device specific controls To configure the ECRM SCSI Imagesetter module choose Setup from the ECRM SCSI Imagesetter module pop up The Setup for ECRM SCSI Imagesetter dialog box opens The options in the Device tab Alt D allow you to select device specific settings Setup for ECRM SCSI Imagesetter 3 x Page Colors Screens Calibration A Device Name fe CRM SCSI Imagesetter 3 SCSI address f Film counter E adapterID 0 fe Use Film Counter ECRM SCSIID 0 Film Left fo inch Imaging tem 0 255 150 M Overscan Negate I Debug output J Fast Print Page Layout Punch Setup
103. to remove module security we recommend that you click Yes This will facilitate remote operations and will not compro mise security on your computer or network Q Remove module security to allow remote operations This option does not compromise security of the server Figure 1 2 Click Yes to remove module security during installation 6 To finish the installation procedure click Finish to exit the installation wizard MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 1 Getting Started 1 3 Starting MWF Manager The MWF Manager is the main program window of MWF It contains tools and features which allow you to create digital prepress processing workflows and monitor the progress of jobs as they are processed with MWF For a detailed description of MWF Manager refer to Chapter 2 MaxWorkFlow Manager on page 11 To start MWF Manager click Start gt Programs gt MaxWorkFlow gt MaxWorkFlow Manager Or double click the MFW Manager icon added to your Windows desktop if you selected this option during the installation procedure 1 3 1 Starting the MWF from a command line You can also start MWF from a command line This allows you to enter addi tional parameters to control how the program starts The command line format is as follows man exe c filename cfg start min where c filename cfg loads the specified workflow start starts the workflow min starts MWF minimized 10 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 2 MaxWo
104. tracking Advanced user Selecting this option lets you automatically run a script for preview or create the signature script Automatically run script for preview This option allows you to see the instructions and comments as the job is built It displays you all the settings you have chosen Always recreate signature script Changes the VBS Visual Basic Scripting after every change in the mod ule Any changes you make to the signature layouts are reflected in a new set of instructions Folder options Click the Folder icon to display the Folder options dialog Imposition directory This is the directory where all imposition software modules are stored including Marks Plate Templates PREPS Projects and Scripts Page storage directory This is the directory where the PostScript language files PDF or EPS pages that are going to be imposed are stored while waiting for process Output directory This is the directory where a copy of the imposed plates before ripping are stored You can manually input these plates into another workflow MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 15 2 Imposition controls Plate Design options Click the Plate Design icon to display the Plate design options dialog Show grid Click this option to display the grid layout on the plate design preview Snap to grid Click this option to snap the pages and marks to the nearest grid when placing objects in the Signature design dialog Grid width height
105. 11 00 MWF Optimizer 7 24 01 10 56 16 AM tunlen_53r2_final ps len_5312_final ps 8 50 11 00 MWF Optimizer 7 24 01 10 56 18 AM tunlen_53r2_final ps len_5312_final ps 8 50x11 00 MWF Optimizer 7 24 01 10 56 20 AM 0 runlen_53r2_final ps len_5312_final ps 8 50x11 00 M WF Optimizer 7 24 01 10 56 20 AM xl V Add selected pages to run list Cancel HEHE Figure 17 3 The Available files list with pages marked To remove files from the File List highlight the files to be removed and either press the Delete key or select Delete from the right click pop up menu In the top left corner of the dialog the number of files selected appears In this example 22 files are selected from a total available of 53 files 216 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 17 4 Preps setup Files deleted from the File List remain within the Available files list Preps 3 Setup Manual mode File Edit Job we DOR File List 21 Files x Page Adjustment tunlen_53r2_final ps EEr ean ee mS R 2 tunlen_53r2_final ps 8 50x11 00 3 tunlen_5312_final ps 8 50 11 00 4 tunlen_53r2_final ps 8 50 11 00 5 tunlen_53r2_final ps 8 50 11 00 6 tunlen_53r2_final ps 8 50 11 00 7 n 8 50x11 00 peas z gt a Run List 21 Records runlen_53r2_final ps 1 o o 2o0f 21 tunlen_53r2_final ps 2 D e 3of 21 tunlen_53r2_final ps 3 D r 4of 21 runlen_53r2_final ps 4 D 0 5of21 tunlen_53r2_final ps 5 D o 6 of 21 tunlen_53r2_final ps
106. 16 2 Pairs module controls Use Project name If you have more than one project in a scan folder at a time this feature in conjunction with the Scan module Name Convention feature can keep the projects jobs separate from each other For example if you have three newspapers to produce each with 100 pages The pages may all be named the same p1 p2 p3 but have some type of code letter in front of the page numbers A1 ps B1 ps Cl ps With each letter A B and C identifying a different newspaper With the this option selected the Page Pairs module keeps the projects separate from each other and thus pairs the pages correctly The pairer looks for 100 pages with the Project letter A and create the pairs It likewise follows the same procedure for Project B and Project C This allows you to dump several hundred pages from different projects into a scan folder knowing that the pages will be paired correctly Binding style Binding style refers to the method used to fold a printed piece of paper into a finished newspaper or book Thus you choose here which method of page pairing allows the final folded newspaper to have all the pages come out in the right order Three option are available from the menu First and last The first and last pages that are available in the list of pages are paired For example if you have 100 pages the pairings are 1 amp 100 2 amp 99 3 amp 98 4 amp 97 This style is used when saddl
107. 17 4 1 2 Preview the job thumbnail proof Printing a thumbnail layout lets you proof the job to verify that the incoming PostScript language files are correct and are imaged correctly when you print the final output It does not proof the imposition it only provides confirma tion that the PostScript language files are able to be processed by the Preps module When creating a thumbnail layout you specify how many pages you want to print horizontally and vertically thus reducing scaling the pages until they fit onto the specified page size The pages print in rows from left to right in the order in which they appear in the source files To create thumbnail layouts 1 Use one of the following options e Point at the Signature List and select Thumbnail layout from the right click pop up menu e Click the Thumbnail layout icon from the top of the dialog The Thumbnail Layout dialog will appear 2 In the Horizontal text box enter the number of pages you want to print horizontally on the media sheet Similarly in the Vertical text box enter the number of pages you would like to print vertically on the sheet 3 Click OK MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 17 4 Preps setup 4 When the thumbnails have been configured highlight the thumbnail layout line in the Signature List and click the Draft button The files will be processed through the RIP and sent to the output device Thumbnail layouts are most often printed on a designated pr
108. 3 7 User Manual 31 2 Oc controls 31 2 1 Device specific controls To configure the Oc module choose Setup from the Oc module pop up The Setup for Oc dialog box opens The options in the Device tab Alt D allow you to select device specific settings Setup for Oce x Page Colors Screens Calibration Device Device Name Oce Port l LPT1 ha Figure 31 3 Device tab for the Oc module The options in the Device tab are all output options as described in the following subsection 31 2 1 1 Output options Device name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 413 31 Oc 414 Port Choose the port through which your computer is connected to the printer You can connect to the printer using a parallel port LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 Alternatively choose FILE to output to a file If you choose this option a Print File Name dialog opens when you submit a job You must enter the full path of where you wish to send the output file including the prn extension in the file name 31 2 2 Oc Devices Viewer If you choose View from the Oc module pop up menu the Oc Devices Viewer window opens a k 41 Oe Name Status Li Paused Oce Office Idle no yes Oce Finish processing BARINGTN PS at 4 6 01 9 37
109. 49 AM Oce Start printing WORLDMAP PS at 4 6 01 9 38 51 AM Oce Finish processing WWORLDMAP PS at 4 5 01 9 38 54 AM Figure 31 4 Oc Devices Viewer This dialog box allows you to view the status of all the Oc modules that are in the workspace This dialog consists of a table listing the status of each Oc module as well as a log monitor window in which you can view progress and error messages All messages in the log monitor window are prefixed by the name of the module to which they refer Name This column lists the name of the Oc module that appears in the work space The name of the Oc module is specified in the Device tab as described in Output options on page 413 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 31 2 Oc controls Status This column indicates the status of the module Log This column indicates whether or not the module is set to record all mes sages in a log file yes no See Log file directory on page 15 for details on how to specify the location and other properties of the log file Paused This column indicates whether or not the module has been paused yes no You can click the GO STOP button to start or stop the module For further details on the general controls in the dialog see Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 415 31 Oc 416 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 32 Max Imagesetter fi fi The Max Imagesetter module allows you to send
110. 5 2 Imposition controls Marks Pool Shows all the marks that can be added to the plate signature You can manually add marks to a page by dragging and dropping them into the design window Also you can add custom marks to this section by adding EPS files into the MWF Imposition Marks folder Plate Set Preview Select this to display the entire press run 15 2 1 6 Options If you select the Options tab from the Imposition bar you can display the three Options icons Main Folders and Plate design These provide access to gen eral configuration and default options MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 185 15 Imposition Main options Click the Main icon to display the Main options dialog Current project Project 0 Main Module name Imposition 2 I Show Trim and Bleed Boxs in Plate Preview I Early Print T Start new imposition if existing page arrived Default measure unit inches z Apply Default value for new plate Plate wan 8 5 inch Height 11 inch Plate Design Plate sheet Width 16 5 inch Height g inch Script z Plate start number fo I Advanced user Figure 15 12 Main options dialog Module name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules Show trim and bleed boxes in plate preview Turns trim and bleed boxes on
111. 7 SmartScan workflow 27 SmartScan controls 28 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 10 11 12 Queuer 47 Queuer workflows 47 Queuer controls 49 BarCode 67 BarCode workflow 67 BarCode controls 68 Page Splitter 73 Page Splitter workflow 73 Page Splitter controls 74 Enabler 81 Enabler module workflow 81 Enabler controls 82 Harlequin RIP 87 Harlequin RIP workflow 87 Harlequin RIP controls 88 Harlequin RIP setup 89 Fonts Setup 100 Install ICC Profile 110 Creating a calibration profile 110 Harlequin RIP Viewer 118 OPI 119 OPI workflow 120 OPI controls 120 PreCheck 129 PreCheck workflow 129 PreCheck controls 130 Load Balancer 141 Load Balancer workflow 141 Load Balancer controls 142 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Down Sample 151 Down Sample workflow 152 Down Sample controls 152 Composition Server 157 Composition server workflow 158 Composition server controls 158 Imposition 163 Imposition workflow 163 Imposition controls 164 Pairs module 193 Pairs module workflow 194 Pairs module controls 194 Preps 209 Installation 209 Preps workflow 211 Preps controls 212 Preps setup 212 Preps Viewer 246 Media Saver 249 Media Saver workflow 249 Media Saver controls 250 TrapPro 253 The need for trapping 254 The TrapPro workflow 255 TrapPro controls 255 Optimizer 265 Optimizer workflow 265 Optimizer controls 267 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 U
112. 89 MWF Optimizer 7 19 01 2 36 38 PM 11 page4 ps page4 ps 1 8 24x10 89 MWF Optimizer 7 19 01 2 36 42 PM 12 page5 ps page5 ps 1 8 24210 89 MWF Optimizer 7 19 01 2 36 46 PM 13 pageb ps page6 ps 1 8 24210 89 MWF Optimizer 7 19 01 2 36 50 PM 14 page ps page ps 1 8 24210 89 MWF Optimizer 7 19 01 2 36 54 PM 15 page8 ps page8 ps 1 8 24x10 89 MWF Optimizer 7 19 01 2 37 00 PM 16 page3 ps page9 ps 1 8 24210 89 MWF Optimizer 7 19 01 2 37 04 PM Delete Exit Figure 17 15 The Available Files List Note The total number of files is displayed in the top left corner of the dialog You are able to display the files according to their output device by selecting the output device from the drop down menu in the Device field If required available files can be removed from the list by selecting the file and clicking the Delete button MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 247 17 Preps 248 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 18 Media Saver amp The Media Saver module places raster files on the media so that the full width of the output device is utilized 18 1 Media Saver workflow The Media Saver module consumes and produces raster data and is placed between the Harlequin RIP module and the output device SmartScan Queuer Harlequin RIP Media saver ECRM SCSI Imagesetter 2 Figure 18 1 Media Saver workflow MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 249 18 Media Saver 18 2 Media Saver controls Right click the Media Saver module to display the pop up menu sho
113. Binding style on page 197 for more information Each pair 1 amp 96 2 amp 95 3 amp 94 4 amp 93 represents the front and back of the magazine With the resulting forms all together each one riding as a saddle on top of the others you finally get a book in correct page order that can be held together with a couple of staples MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 203 16 Pairs module If there are enough pages in the magazine and the paper is thick enough this binding method causes the inside forms the middle of the maga zine to be pushed outward from the staples If the inside pages are pushed out far enough when you cut the magazine down to its final trim size you may start cutting off words and pictures To prevent this a printer folds up the required number and thickness of blank pieces of paper as a mock up and staples it together Then with the magazine closed he measures the thickness of the stapled edge from the outside cover to the middle pages This defines how far the middle pages of the magazine need to be moved so that when the magazine is cut down all the pages come out looking perfect with nothing important cutting off or getting too close to the edges The settings from and to in the Gutter section take care of this Fixed This is a fixed size for the gutter From Enter a value that specifies how close the printed image needs to be to the stapled edge on the very outside of the magazine To Enter a value tha
114. F2 Media Cut Ctr F3 Feed and Cut Ctrl F4 View F4 Lau ie Change Computer F6 Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 34 2 Ultre SCSI Imagesetter module pop up The following controls are available for the Ultre SCSI Imagesetter module Setup all output modules share common controls These are described in Chapter 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules For details on device specific controls see Device specific controls on page 437 below Media Feed see Media Feed on page 439 Media Cut see Media Cut on page 439 Feed and Cut see Feed and Cut on page 439 View see Ultre SCSI Imagesetter Devices Viewer on page 440 See Module shortcut menus on page 18 for details on the other general options in the pop up 436 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 34 2 Ultre SCSI Imagesetter controls 34 2 1 Device specific controls To configure the Ultre SCSI Imagesetter module choose Setup from the Ultre SCSI Imagesetter module pop up The Setup for Ultre SCSI Imagesetter dialog box opens The options in the Device tab Alt D allow you to select device specific settings Setup for Ultre SCSI Imagesetter x Page Colors Screens Calibration A Device Name Ultre SCSI Imagesetter SCSI address p Film counter Host adapter ID 0 T Use Film Counter Ultre SCSI ID 0 Film Left fo inch IV Async SCSI write Auto advance length fi 2 inch Figure 34 3 Device
115. Help aoe Name Status Lo Paused Epson Proof Idle no yes Epson Stylus Pro 7000 Epson Stylus Pro 7000 Paused 8 52 08 AM Epson Stylus Pro 7000 Started 8 52 09 AM Epson Stylus Pro 7000 Paused 8 52 09 AM Figure 30 5 Epson Printer Viewer This dialog box allows you to view the status of all the Epson Printer modules that are in the workspace This dialog consists of a table listing the status of each Epson Printer module as well as a log monitor window in which you can view progress and error messages Messages in the log monitor window are prefixed by the name of the module to which they refer Name This column lists the name of the Epson Printer module that appears in the workspace The name of the Epson Printer module is specified in the Device tab as described on Printer options on page 404 Status This column indicates the status of the module Log This column indicates whether or not the module is set to record all mes sages in a log file yes no See Log file directory on page 15 for details on how to specify the location and other properties of the log file MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 30 2 Epson Printer controls Paused This column indicates whether or not the module has been paused yes no You can click the GO STOP button to start or stop the module For further details on the general controls in the dialog see Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17
116. IF DCS and PDF distillers From the list select the check box es that jobs will be directed to when they enter the SmartScan module Work Flow Paths After clicking this button all workflow paths connected to the SmartScan module are listed From the list select the workflow path that you want jobs to follow when being processed File mask Allows you to select which jobs will be processed according to the job file name Only jobs which match the file mask will be passed on for pro cessing The drop down menu contains several commonly used masks for filtering prepress files You can also add you own mask by typing directly into the text box You may also use the wildcards and which respectively represent zero or more characters in a string of char acters and any character at that position For example x all files matched ps only files with extension ps matched xyz files called xyz with any extension matched xyz matches files starting with xyz for example xyz123 ps z matches files whose 3rd character is z for example xyz123 ps File type 30 This option allows you to accept jobs into the workflow according to file type SmartScan is able to distinguish different file types based on infor mation contained in the job This option is useful for jobs submitted by Macintosh clients which may not carry an extension to identify the file for example tif eps pdf MaxWorkFlow 3
117. If you chose Ro11 as the Media Type you must choose the roll size from this menu When using roll media you can also choose to Cut paper after print Cut paper after print Select this check box to use the automatic cutter to cut roll media after each job You must also ensure that the cutter is enabled on your printer This option is only available if the Media Type is Ro11 Quality The options in this list allow you to select a print quality setting for the printer Choose Fast for lower print quality but faster output Choose Best for higher print quality but slower output Or choose Normal for medium quality and medium print speed If you select Printer Default the quality is controlled by the selection made on the front MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 397 29 HP Printer 398 panel of the printer Refer to your printer manual for help in choosing the most appropriate quality setting based upon the resolution and print speed of the device Compression The options that appear in this menu are methods of coding the data sent to the printer None sends the data uncompressed so the data size is always a predict able value though sometime larger than it need be Run Length performs a lossless compression that enables the exact data to be recreated For many images using Run Length will reduce the size of the data and the time taken to transmit it For some very complex pages containing large areas of fine detail it may take lon
118. MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 16 2 Pairs module controls All This places the pages from right to left on the page The lower number is always on the right side of the pair the higher number on the left 96 amp 1 95 amp 2 94 amp 3 A11 refers to all the plates that are generated All of the plates have the numbering order from right to left Even This option places the pages from right to left on even numbered plates only In other words on Plate 1 the pair would be 1 amp 96 while on Plate 2 the pair would be 95 amp 2 By reversing the order on the even plates a two sided job backs itself up correctly when printed page 2 on the back of page 1 and page 96 on the back of page 95 Odd This option places the pages from right to left on odd numbered plates only In other words on Plate 1 the pair would be 96 amp 1 while on Plate 2 the pair would be 2 amp 95 It accomplishes the same objective as explained in Even above just in a different way Save Layout As Allows you to save a commonly used set of options in a configuration file so that you do not have to create a new configuration every time you run a similar job For instance consider the printer that publishes three different newspapers each day Each one has its own intricate set of parameters different paper sizes different printing presses different binding styles By saving the layouts you can call up the appropriate layout for each newspaper and it sets
119. P setup e Fonts Setup see Fonts Setup on page 100 e Install ICC Profile see Install ICC Profile on page 110 e Print Calibration prints a calibration target for use in Genlin see Creating a calibration profile on page 110 e Launch Genlin starts Genlin see Using Genlin to read a target on page 112 e View see Harlequin RIP Viewer on page 118 See Module shortcut menus on page 18 for details on the other general options in the pop up 9 3 Harlequin RIP setup To configure the Harlequin RIP module select Setup from the pop up menu Setup for Harlequin RIP 1 xi General PDF Options Extras Passwords Module Name fHaleqinRIPT Memory for RIP fasooo Kb Disk space left for system po Mb Print buffer fiozso Kb Job timeout fecco minutes Band buffer foss Kb Custom PS setup E E El JV Publish AppleTalk Channel Harlequin RIP I Fail if no HiRes found Defaults Figure 9 3 Harlequin RIP Setup dialog box MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 89 9 Harlequin RIP Each tab at the top of the dialog provides access to various configuration options which are described in this section 9 3 1 General tab The options in the General tab allow configuration of the memory settings for the Harlequin RIP Module name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when link ing to
120. PS PDF documents and TIFF images MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 27 4 SmartScan 4 2 SmartScan controls Right click the SmartScan module to display a pop up menu showing all the configuration and viewing options Setup F5 Create rulers test Ctrl F2 Insert From Ctrl F3 View F4 Lau iue Change Computer FG Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 4 1 SmartScan pop up menu The following controls are available for the SmartScan module e Setup This provides all the options required to create and config ure the module For more information see Section 4 2 1 Smart Scan e Create rulers test Use to calibrate vertical spacing on your output device For more information see Section 4 2 2 Create rulers test e Insert from This option allows you to sweep jobs from another folder into the SmartScan module For more information see Section 4 2 3 Insert from e View Choose this option to open the SmartScan Viewer see Section 4 2 4 SmartScan Viewer for more information See Module shortcut menus on page 18 for details on the other general options in the pop up 4 2 1 SmartScan To configure the SmartScan module choose Setup from the module pop up menu or select the module and press F5 The SmartScan Setup dialog box opens The options available are described in the following subsections 28 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 4 2 SmartScan controls 4 2 1 1 General Gen
121. S files with or without pre view that are leaner and fully optimized for the intended output device In addition the Optimizer is able to embed a low resolution screen preview file into the job making it ideal for use in OPI Open Prepress Interface environ ments see Chapter 10 OPI for more information on using OPI in your digi tal prepress workflows The benefits of using the Optimizer in the digital workflow can be summa rized as follows e Job files are smaller and more compact so they are more portable e The Optimizer can add EPS preview files to the job which are necessary when dealing with OPI files e Font integrity is maintained in jobs that have fonts embedded 20 1 Optimizer workflow The Optimizer module accepts PDF EPS TIFF and PostScript language files directly from the SmartScan module and outputs the optimized file to either a PDF distiller an OPI module or directly to a Harlequin RIP module It can also MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 265 20 Optimizer be used as a stand alone destination to convert PostScript Level 3 or PDF into PostScript Level 2 for older RIP configurations Figure 20 1 shows each of these workflows tN Scan Optimizer tI N oD a Scan Optimizer Distiller t p di be Scan Optimizer OPI a Scan Optimizer Harlequin RIP t ea A Scan PreCheck Optimizer Figure 20 1 Optimizer workflows 266 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 20 2 Optimizer controls 20 2
122. SL Harpoon RipFlow ScriptWorks MicroRIP ScriptProof ProofReady SetGold Scalable Open Architecture RIP SOAR TrapMaster TrapPro PDF Creator and RIPFlow are all trademarks of Global Graph ics Software Limited MAXRIP MAXSmartScan MAXQueuer MAXOPI MAXImposition MAXPagePair MAXPreps MAXTrapping MAXColor MAXPreCheck MAXPDF Creator MAXComposite MAXEPS Optimizer MAXRasterDown MAXQUE Central MAXGIF MAXTIF CTP MAXDCS2 MAXWinPrint MAXFilmSave MAxXRemoteClient MAX LE MAXimum Output Options MAXSplitter and MAXProofer are all trademarks of Global Graphics Software Limited Portions licensed under U S Patents Nos 4 500 919 4 941 038 and 5 212 546 EasyTrap is licensed under one or more of the following U S Patents Nos 5 113 249 5 323 248 5 420 702 5 481 379 Adobe Adobe Photoshop Adobe Type Manager Acrobat Display PostScript Adobe Illustrator PostScript Distiller and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries which may be registered in certain jurisdictions ScenicSoft the ScenicSoft logo Preps the Preps logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of ScenicSoft Incorporated Global Graphics Software Limited is a licensee of Pantone Inc PANTONE Colors generated by ScriptWorks are four color process simulations and may not match PANTONE identified solid color standards Consult current PANTONE Color Publicat
123. Setup on page 153 Status This column indicates the status of the module MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 13 2 Down Sample controls Log This column indicates whether or not the module is set to record all mes sages in a log file yes no See Log file directory on page 15 for details on how to specify the location and other properties of the log file Paused This column indicates whether or not the module has been paused yes no You can click the GO STOP button to start or stop the module For further details on the general controls in the dialog see Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 155 13 Down Sample 156 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 14 Composition Server The Composition server module accepts pre separated raster files from a RIP The files are then recombined for proofing Bleed and trim boxes can be applied to the pages With this module you are able to check the overall position of the pages within the plate flat using the dots generated from the high resolution RIPs meaning no re ripping of files is necessary This provides you with accurate proofing of the high resolution plates that are going to press including accurate rosette patterns no color shifting accurate traps and verification of any overprint set tings or black generation formulas This module can also cut pages apart in 4 8 or 16 up flats from single page proofing single or duplex
124. This option allows you to save a previously saved job template pjt file under a new name Exit Setup Select this option to quit the Preps setup 17 4 3 2 Edit menu Undo Use Undo to undo any delete option This option will only undo the last command performed it does not allow you to undo more than a single command Delete Use this option to remove pages from the File or Run List or signatures from the Signature List Select All Use this option to select all pages in the File or Run List or all signatures in the Signature List Select Page Range This option provides access to various page and signa ture selection features See Selecting pages and signa tures on page 223 Options Provides access to various user preferences See Preps setup options on page 233 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 231 17 Preps 17 4 3 3 Job menu B Add pages This option is the same as clicking the Add file to files list icon see Add source files to the File List and create the Run list on page 214 for more information Job information This option displays the Job information dialog for more information see Job Information on page 244 Thumbnail layout This is the same as clicking the Thumbnail layout icon or selecting Thumbnail layout from the right click pop up menu See Preview the job thumbnail proof on page 218 for more information Signature selection D This option is the same as clicking the Signat
125. WF may be networked to other MWF servers to share job processing Modules on the workspace can then be configured to run on these remote installations freeing the resources of the central server to pro cess other jobs Completed jobs are returned to the central server where pro cessing continues To link two or more installations of MWF the following conditions must be met 1 MWF must be installed on all machines with a dongle and a license file See Section 1 2 on page 8 for information on installing MWF 2 Each installation of MWF must be visible in the Window s Network Neighborhood 3 COM security must be disabled on each installation Select this option during the MWF installation process 4 Choose a MWF installation to act as the central master server This machine runs the processing workflows and distributes jobs to your other secondary MWF machines Install MWF on your secondary machines but do not have the MWF Manager running as this will cause problems when you try to connect Once these conditions have been satisfied select the module that you want to configure and press F6 on your keyboard In the Select computer window choose the remote MWF installation and click OK When you have done this the workspace module appears with the amp icon and on the remote MWF machine an icon for the running module appears in the status area of the taskbar MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 19 2 MaxWorkFlow Manager
126. a colorant and use the menus to change the options for Read and Measure as Click OK to read the target and produce the calibration profile After producing the profile you may import it into your output device module by choosing Import in the Linearization tab of the output device s setup window MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 9 6 Creating a calibration profile 9 6 5 Troubleshooting Genlin Below is a list of possible error messages and symptoms that you may see when using Genlin together with suggestions for resolving them Error messages All error messages are preceded by the details of the measuring instrument For example you might see this full message when there is a problem with an X Rite 938 instrument X Rite 938 Error No responding device attached to selected serial line Error Returned data not recognized There is a mismatch between the Instrument setting in the Configuration dialog box and the measuring instrument that you are using Check that you are using the correct Instrument setting for your instrument Error Unknown response error codes expected X RITE X There is a mismatch between the Instrument setting in the Configuration dialog box and the measuring instrument that you are using X is replaced by the details of the measuring instrument that Genlin tried to connect to Check that you are using the correct Instrument setting for your instrument Error Open interface details error 0 There
127. a normal constant color trap Any greater value turns the hard edge of the trap into a gradiation Note that feathering is achieved at the expense of con siderable extra computation so increase this value with caution Black trap widths The number of color gradiation steps to use in the trap Enter a percent age value of the normal trap width to use when trapping against black objects For example a value of 200 creates black traps which are twice the width of normal traps Small object protection factor Unit A ratio of the object width to the normal trap width The protection factor ensures the trap is never greater than a ratio of the average width of the object to the normal trap width For example the default value of 0 6 ensures the trap is never greater than 60 of the object it is trapping against The unit of measurement for trap width and height settings Choose from points inches feet millimeters and metres Relative color step limit Determines how traps are generated according to the relative color change between the two objects under consideration For example when a small value is set the relative color step between the objects need only be small before a trap is considered necessary However using too small a value could cause too many traps to be generated The default setting of 10 is a good starting point when working out the opti mum setting for Relative color step limit MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manua
128. a typical color sepa ration file contains four files in the job Cyan Magenta Yellow and Black Strip area This option allows you to crop the rastered plate or file to exclude area on all sides of the overall image as it is recombined An example of this is removing the gripper space on plate flats Cut out pages This option takes an already imposed raster file for example 4up 8up and 16up and breaks it down into its individual pages 1 2 3 4 and so on Therefore if you have a proofing device which is only capable of imaging pages that are smaller that the full size imposed files this option can be used to cut the imposed pages into a size that the proofer can handle Exclude pages with same numbers This option does not allow pages that have the same distinct number MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 14 2 Composition server controls Duplex plate pages A amp B C amp D This option is primarily used for book proofing Pages on plates are cut out and page separations are recombined and printed on both sides of the paper on a duplex capable color printer This option is only available when the Cut out pages option is checked Page label This option provides the ability for you to label your pages simply key in the required text Add This option allows you to specify all the separation colors that the Composition module is expected to process and recombine Select Add and enter the required value for each plate T
129. aced in the workflow before the Harlequin RIP module Scan 6 Queuer 7 Imposition 3 Harlequin RIP 6 ECRM SCSI Imagesetter 4 Figure 15 1 Imposition module workflow MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 163 15 Imposition 164 15 2 Imposition controls Right click the Imposition module to display the pop up menu showing the configuration and viewing options Setup F5 View F4 Lau jule Change Computer F6 Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 15 2 Imposition pop up The following controls are available for the Imposition module e Setup see Imposition setup below e View see Imposition Viewer on page 189 To use the Imposition module the following tasks must be completed in order e Create one or more new projects e Create a page sequence for the project e Create one or more plate signatures manually or using the Signature wizard See Module shortcut menus on page 18 for details on the other general options in the pop up 15 2 1 Imposition setup To configure the Imposition module select Setup from the pop up menu to dis play the Imposition setup dialog box 15 2 1 1 Create new projects New projects can be created when the Project tab is selected in the left hand window of the Imposition setup dialog box MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 15 2 Imposition controls Click the New project button to create a new project Enter a folder and project name followed by clicking OK Names can b
130. age size in the printer are shrunk to fit For example you can use this feature to output pages that have been processed for broadsheet output on a printer con taining A4 paper MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 153 13 Down Sample 154 Rotate for best fit When selected the page is rotated so that the best fit is obtained accord ing to the paper size you are printing on 13 2 2 Down Sample Viewer If you choose View from the Down Sample module pop up menu the Down Sample Devices Viewer window opens Down Sample Devices System View Help Down sample Started 10 02 44 AM Down sample Down sample pass Everglades c ps 300x300 to HP Plotter at 4 9101 10 02 59 AM Down sample Finish down sample Everglades c ps at 4 9 01 10 03 00 AM Down sample Down sample pass Everglades c ps 300x300 to HP Plotter at Figure 13 4 Down Sample Devices Viewer This dialog box allows you to view the status of all the Down Sample modules that are in the workspace This dialog consists of a table listing the status of each Down Sample module as well as a log monitor window in which you can view progress and error messages All messages in the log monitor window are prefixed by the name of the module to which they refer Name This column lists the name of the Down Sample module that appears in the workspace The name of the Down Sample module is specified in the Down Sample Module Setup dialog box as described in Down Sample
131. agenta and Black screens it determines the frequency of the Yellow screen using the value specified in this text box A number of printers have discovered that increasing the frequency of the Yellow screen can reduce the residual moir that is inevitable when using four process plates with half toning systems Values typically used are 5 to 11 greater than the fre quency of the other screens MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 22 3 Halftone screening options We have found that the effect is very similar if the frequency of the Yellow screen is reduced rather than increased and that this allows the more noticeable Cyan Magenta and Black screens to be imaged at a higher frequency when the capability of the platemaker paper ink press combination is the limiting factor on half tones The default value of 7 means that the frequency of the Yellow screen is 93 100 7 of the deviated frequency used for Cyan Magenta and Black screens Maximum Frequency deviation The RIP selects the individual frequencies for the Cyan Magenta and Black screens such that they differ from the requested frequency by no more than the percentage value specified in this text box Then it deter mines the frequency of the Yellow screen using the value in the Zero degrees frequency adjustment text box Increasing this value gives the RIP more freedom in finding an optimal screen set and can reduce patterning or moir at the expense of possibly giving fin
132. al 20 2 2 Optimizer fonts 20 2 Optimizer controls To add remove or substitute fonts choose Fonts from the Optimizer module pop up The Fonts dialog opens Fonts x FontName Fonte Add New A Aavasaksa Book Sr Aavasaksa BookOblique Cr Aavasaksa Demi Pr Aavasaksa Demi0blique i AvantGarde Book 2 AvantGarde Book Oblique z AvantGarde Demi z AvantGarde DemiOblique z Bookman Demi 2 Bookman Demiltalic 2 Bookman Light amo te tau e fa fonts ha ayskb ps ayskbo ps avskd ps avskdo ps Aavasaksa Book Substitution Se Remove Aavasaksa BookOblique Aavasaksa Demi Aavasaksa Demi0blique Puumala Demi Puumala Demiltalic Puumala Light Fonts caes Figure 20 6 Fonts dialog You can use the Fonts dialog to create an available fonts list which should match the list of fonts available in the Harlequin RIP module Each kind of font in the Fonts dialog is distinguished by an icon in the margin Use the menu in the lower left corner of the dialog to select the type of fonts to be viewed The A11 fonts option displays all the available fonts MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 275 20 Optimizer Add New Click the Add New button to display the Add Fonts dialog box allowing you to select the folder where the Optimizer module can find the fonts you wish to add List of fonts Folder C MWF_Data Config Drive ec Jaco z MwF_Data Figure 20 7 Add Fonts dia
133. al output at a screen frequency further from that originally requested A value of between 5 and 10 is normally acceptable Enable HPS 2 0 Select this box to use features added to HPS These features can improve the quality of output when using the Generate extra gray levels option Flat tints and vignettes are smoother particularly in highlights and shadows because the mottling effects which can be caused by generat ing the extra gray levels are reduced Even without HPS 2 0 these effects are unlikely to be significant until the ratio of resolution to screen frequency is less than 12 for example you might see mottling with a res olution of 1270 dpi and a screen frequency of 150 lpi lines per inch where the ratio is about 8 5 Abort job if accuracy not achieved If this check box is selected and it is not possible to determine a screen set within the requested Angle Accuracy or Frequency Accuracy MWF cancels the job currently being output MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 325 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules 326 Limit screen levels to This menu allows you to separate pattern reduction adjustments from extra gray level generation calculations Choose a high value from this menu and choose the number of gray levels that you actually require from the Limit number of distinct gray levels to menu If you see patterning on individual films try choosing a higher value from this menu if you believe that there is a shorta
134. all the required parameters You only have to create the configuration once and you can be assured that the paper will come out exactly the same each time every day of the week week after week The Save Layout As option only saves the settings under the General tab Load Layout This option loads a previously saved layout MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 199 16 Pairs module 16 2 1 2 Page Layout tab The Page Layout tab provides the options you need to configure the size of the pages to be consumed by the module Note Negative values are not allowed in the text fields of this dialog E Pairs module setup Jof x General gw Width 17 000 Height fizo Crop page from left o Crop page from top M Trim Offsets Top fo 1 25 Left 10 125 Bottom for 25 Right fo 25 M Bleed Offsets Top fo 125 Left 10 125 Bottom fo 125 Right fo 125 Save page parameters Plate layout Figure 16 4 Page Layout tab Page This option provides you with the option of selecting previously config ured pages The pages are stored by default in a xPairs pgp file in MWF_Data Pairs You can open this file using a simple text editor and view all the parameters that have been entered for each choice listed in the Page pull down menu The pages can be deleted by deleting the xPairs pgp file from the directory See Save page parameters o
135. anage the fonts used in PDF files created by PDF Creator See Section 21 4 Fonts in PDF Creator for more informa tion on using and managing fonts in PDF Creator View Opens the PDF Creator Viewer where job processing and log messages can be observed See Section 21 5 PDF Creator Viewer for more information on the Viewer Other options in the menu are described in Module shortcut menus on page 18 21 3 PDF Creator options PDF Creator options are configured in the setup dialog box through the mod ule s pop up menu or by selecting the module and pressing F5 on the key board As with other modules the various options are arranged into tabbed dialogs described in the following subsections 284 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 21 3 PDF Creator options 21 3 1 General General Compression Font Embedding Security Module Name POF Creator 1 m File Options POFFieFomat POFVI3 OO Thumbnail generation None O Resolution 600 dpi IT ASCII format IV Auto rotate Pages M Output Options Output Folder CAMWF_Data Output PDF Al Backup Folder El I Execute on job completion E KTITLE gt PDF IV Append User Directory to Path IV Use Title as Output file Name I Overwrite an existing PDF File Advanced Figure 21 5 PDF module general settings Module name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced
136. and ensure that all the parameter fields are complete These fields do not usually appear when creating a plate signature using the Signature wizard Previewing plates and projects When the plate signature is completed you can use the Plate Set Preview option under the Signatures tab to view the completed signature To preview the complete project perhaps including multiple signatures use the Project Preview option under the Project tab MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 15 2 Imposition controls Shown below is an example of the imposition scheme for a perfect bound 64 page A4 size book viewed as a Plate Set Preview E Imposition setup of xj Current project Project 0 Plate Set Preview a Q Script Perfect_Bound amp Sheetwise vbs Signature Design Signature_0 Figure 15 9 Plate set preview dialog 15 2 1 5 Manual plate signature design An alternative to using the Signature wizard to create your plate signatures would be for you to manually create the signatures Use the following procedure to manually create plate signatures 1 In the Signature list add a signature as previously described See Add Signature on page 168 2 Click the Manually design plate option 3 Complete the Plate parameters as previously described see Page design style on page 169 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 181 15 Imposition 182 4 Use the drop down menu in the Script fie
137. and from other modules Memory for RIP This option allows you to specify the memory allocation for the Harlequin RIP The default value is set at 10 000 Kb and for most cases this setting works well However you may want to adjust this figure in line with the amount of on board RAM the typical job size any job trapping requirements and processing involved in recombining preseparated jobs From the total memory allocated to it at startup the Harlequin RIP allocates the printer and network buffers All memory not used for these buffers is used by the RIP for processing jobs The final allocations used are reported in the RIP Monitor window when the RIP starts up The memory information appears in the following form Total Memory Available 126324Kb Memory Left For System Requested 20439Kb Actual 20439Kb Network Buffer Requested 64Kb Actual 64Kb Printer Buffer Requested 4096Kb Actual 4096Kb Band Size Requested 2048Kb Actual 2048Kb Memory available for RIP 101725Kb 90 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 9 3 Harlequin RIP setup If there is insufficient memory to allocate the buffers requested the Harlequin RIP tries the following methods of automatic recovery in the order shown e Reducing the network buffer to a minimum of 64 KB e Reducing the printer buffer to a minimum of 512 KB e Reducing the Minimum memory left for system to a minimum of 512 KB If there is still not enough memory to give the Harlequin
138. annot easily correct in the job For example you may have to process a particular set of images where the correct calibration does not produce an acceptable printed result or you may wish to emphasize a color or tonal range in response to artistic direction such as a request to boost the mid tone magenta component by 10 Enter higher values where you wish to see more output For example assuming a positive reading system where 0 is no output and 100 is full density or coverage enter values higher than the nominal values of the patches to produce more output for a given input 22 4 2 Calibration procedure To create a calibration profile you need a reliable and accurate densitometer that is reflective for paper and transmissive for film The densitometer that you select should ideally display dot coverage in percentage terms rather than density readings since calculating coverage by hand is time consuming and prone to errors The overall calibration procedure is 1 Where appropriate establish the correct exposure for the device MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 22 4 Calibration options Note Attempting to calibrate an imagesetter with badly adjusted exposure settings will waste a lot of time and film and may lead to undesirable effects at plate making time such as variable dot gain Run a series of test pages at varying exposures to determine the setting required to give a solid black and a clear white 2 Print and measure al
139. any Type 1 fonts actually install Type 1 fonts as Type 4 fonts e Type 3 fonts e Character identifier CID composite fonts together with associated character map CMAP files used to produce CID keyed fonts which exist only in the memory of the Harlequin RIP or other RIPs CID keyed fonts fulfil the same purposes as Type 0 fonts but can be defined more flexibly using CID fonts and CMAP files and so form the preferred format for new fonts e Single byte PC format TrueType fonts or OpenType fonts with TT outlines Note The Harlequin RIP supports the use of a variety of other fonts for example when they are embedded in PostScript language or PDF jobs The embedded fonts can include Compact Font Format CFF Type 2 Type 42 and Type 32 fonts 9 4 3 The DLD1 format The Harlequin RIP converts Type 1 fonts and Type 1 fonts contained within composite fonts into Harlequin s own DLD1 font format The DLD1 format stores font data far more efficiently than do standard storage formats Access to font data and operations upon fonts are made much faster while the amount of PostScript language virtual memory consumed by the font is reduced dramatically MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 9 4 Fonts Setup The benefits of using the DLD1 format include a DLD1 format font occupies less disk space and this format can require under 10 of the memory space of other formats This table shows some typical figures for the disk and memory re
140. aper When using a sheetwise layout you need two separate plates for each color one for each side of the press sheet The work and turn layout uses a single plate for each color to print both sides of the paper When the first side of the press sheet is printed the paper is flipped over side to side and fed through the press again using the same gripper edge When flipping the top and bottom are not inverted The top of the first side is the top on the second side For example if the press sheet supports 8 pages and your job contains 8 pages you could either print the front 4 flip the page and print the back 4 pages sheetwise printing or you could set up a work and turn layout In this layout you would arrange all 8 pages on the plate The pages would be carefully arranged so that when the press sheet is flipped page 2 prints on the back of page 1 and page 1 prints on the back of page 2 You end up with two complete front and back pages of each page on the press sheet For a print run requiring 10 000 copies of each page you only need to run 5 000 press sheets not counting set up and overrun prints Work and tumble The work and tumble layout is similar to work and turn except that when a sheet is printed on one side it is turned over tumbled on its shorter length and printed on the reverse by gripping the other long edge The left side of the press sheet for the first side is the same as the left side of the press sheet
141. ar benefits in eliminating stepping in vignettes and avoiding posterization Generate extra gray levels Select this check box to use HPS to generate extra gray levels You can choose the number of gray levels from the Limit number of gray levels menu Limit number of distinct gray levels to Choose the exact number of gray levels that you wish to use from this menu This menu is disabled when Generate extra gray levels is not selected 22 3 3 2 Angle and frequency options When using HPS for each screen in a job the RIP process calculates the best set of screen angles and frequencies to use for the set requested The settings you choose in this section determine how the screen angles and frequencies are calculated Use Harlequin Precision Screening Select this check box to use Harlequin Precision Screening All the options in this section of the dialog box are disabled until you select this check box Optimize for angle set It is possible to reduce the amount of memory required by HPS if you can give some guidance to the software about which screen angle sets are to be used in PostScript language jobs by choosing a screen angle set from this menu The default set 15 0 75 0 0 0 45 0 is used for most offset litho work while settings are also provided for other screening systems To decide which angle set to use MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 323 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules 324 Convert all the s
142. arcode For instance you could type in the date job or customer ID number MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 69 6 BarCode 70 printing press number or color information Most of the encoding languages allow only numbers whereas languages such as code39 allow letters and symbols When you select an Encoding from the drop down menu the required format of the Encoded string appears below the text box When creating a new string you must closely follow the displayed format For example in code39 strings you must only use capital letters because lower case characters will cause the barcoding to fail You should also be aware of the length of the string Many of the available options in the module specify how long the string must be Note that spaces are counted as a character If an encoding language such as UPC A specifies a certain number of digits you must make sure you have exactly that number of digits An encoding any shorter or longer will not produce a bar code Code39 allows you to have a variable length bar code however there is a limitation on the length Although it is not practical to make the barcode in code39 too long barcode readers may error when trying to read it Placement The options in this section define the size rotation and position of the barcode Rotation Select from the drop down menu the rotation value required for the barcode X Y These fields define the position of the barcode with regard to
143. ariables refer to Chapter 20 of the ScenicSoft Preps PRO PLUS User Guide for more information 3 In the Content field enter text for the job information This is a limited text field and will not scroll if too much text is used In addition you must ensure the signature template has enough space to accommodate your text and variables otherwise the labeling may run over the top of other labeling on the final film plate output 4 Now click the Add Modify Note button This will add the text in the Type and Content fields to the main window of the dialog 5 To edit an existing note select the note to be changed edit the Type and Content fields and then click Add Modify Note At present this option does not allow proper editing of Job information MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 245 17 Preps 6 Click OK to close the dialog The job information remains associated with the job It is important you understand the following two points about Job information e If the Job information is important to keep for future use you should save the job as a Job template for later recall Otherwise when you choose to create a New job by selecting New Job from the File menu the job information will be automatically purged e Always choose the New Job option from the File menu when creat ing anew imposition design If you try and create a new imposition by just deleting the current pages in the File List Run List and Sig nature List the job i
144. as of the media Some devices are unable to print right up to the edge of media therefore is important that you take this into account when defining the margins Gap This option defines the gap between individual pages that are placed inside the printable area Output width The value in this field is the width of the film or paper in the output device The jobs are collected on a flat until the size s of the job s are bigger then the programmed output width size Early printing This option keeps track of the average job width coming into the module and assumes that the next file to arrive is the same size If the size extends beyond the Output width value the system prints the flat feeds and cuts the media then after that prints the file that was too large 18 2 2 Media Saver Viewer Select the View option from the pop up menu or double click the Media saver module icon to display the Media Saver Viewer window The status of the Media saver module is displayed along with information about the individual files being processed by the module The only options documented here are those that are different to the standard controls which are described in Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 251 18 Media Saver When a raster file is consumed by the Media saver module it appears in the Media Saver View dialog list 2 35 55 PM Figure 18 4 Media Saver Viewer Select this icon t
145. ase the size of the press sheet to fill a single sheet of media Auto rotate to best fit If you check this option the press sheet is auto rotated so that it best fits the media sheet This option is only available for devices that do not have punches Center image on media Click this option to automatically center the press sheet on the sheet of media This option is only available for media sizes not using punch coordinates Border If a press sheet is enlarged or reduced you can specify a border around the press sheet If the press sheet is the same size or larger than the media the border value is ignored Use this option when printing to a laser printer because these printers cannot print right to the edge Thus specifying a border ensures that the whole image is printed and not cut off Tiling options Least media waste Click this option to automatically tile the press sheet so that the least amount of media is wasted Least manual stripping Click this option to automatically tile the press sheet in the direction requiring the least amount of manual stripping Vertical tiling Click this option to tile the output media vertically Horizontal tiling Click this option to tile the output media horizontally MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 17 4 Preps setup Back mirrors front Clicking this option will tile the back of the press sheet with a mirror image of the front Allow split pages Click this option so that tiles can
146. at currently appears in the lower portion of the dialog In other words values entered into the Layout Details dialog have a global effect on every sig nature listed MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 17 4 Preps setup 1 Display the Signature selection dialog by right clicking the Setup dialog and clicking Signature selection in the pop up menu 2 Now either select a template in the upper window or a page signature in the lower window followed by clicking the Layout Details button The Layout Details dialog will appear Layout details x M Page Position Adjustment Odd page Horizontal ff inch Vertical fo inch c ancel Even page Horizontal 0 inch Vertical fo inch M Shingling Creep Inner fo inch Outer fo inch Press Sheet Scaling Percentage Horizontal 1100 Vertical 1100 Bleed Margin Default fo 25 inch Figure 17 8 Layout Details dialog 3 Enter horizontal and vertical offset amounts as required for both odd and even pages 4 Inthe Shingling Creep section enter in the Inner text box the amount you want to move the image area of the inside pages of the signature on a 16 page signature the inside pages would be pages 8 and 9 A posi tive amount in this box moves the pages toward the binding In the Outer text box enter the amount you want to move the image area of the out side pages of the signature pages 1 and 16 A positive amount in this box moves the page
147. ate with its particular color name only when a preseparated file is submitted to the module Submitting a composite PostScript language file for imposition necessitates selecting the Print Separation Names check box in the MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 177 15 Imposition Colors tab of the output module in order to get the final plates labeled with the respective color name See Print Separation Names on page 316 for further details Registration mark When printing color jobs containing two or more colors the press sheet must have registration marks These marks appear at the same location on each plate for the page and allow the press operator to determine if the plates are printing in proper register When in reg ister the cyan magenta yellow and black marks print on top of each other and should show as a single black mark If one of the plates is out of register the registra tion mark shows the problem Typically you use four registration marks one on each edge of the paper When plate marks are applied they automatically appear on the plate If plate marks need to be removed manual mode must be used see Manual plate signature design on page 181 178 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 15 2 Imposition controls Apply Clicking Apply creates the plate signature design The Signature design dialog opens E Imposition setup olx Current project Project 0 Signature Design 14 50 T Unit finc
148. ation file However you can type just the file name if the com mand file has extension EXE and is in one of the folders specified by the PATH variable File names passed to the application as data are assumed to be in the folder receiving the TIFF files unless you type a different path name Post processing substitution codes The TIFF module recognizes the substitution codes shown in Table 23 1 You can also use the file name template tags described on page 342 Code Meaning f The output TIFF file name not including the full path For example based on the job name and not suppressing the page number 01jobnname psC05 TIF 0 The full output directory path For example c S TIFF Table 23 1 Post processing substitution codes Create window Select this check box to display a Windows command prompt window for example to display any messages produced by the post processing command The command window closes at the end of the command so to read any messages you may need a timed delay before the command finishes A wait for a key press command may be useful for testing but becomes unworkable with many output files MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 345 23 TIFF 23 2 2 TIFF Devices Viewer If you choose View from the TIFF module pop up menu the TIFF Devices Viewer window opens Tiff Devices System View Help E Name Status L Paused Tiff Started 10 43 45 AM Tiff Paused 10 45 13 AM T
149. axWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 123 10 OPI Strip out preview from EPS This options removes the low resolution screen image from the EPS file 10 2 1 2 Additional tab The controls in the Additional tab allow you to share the OPI folder with other users on the network system and to specify a backup folder for your OPI images OPI setu xi i Replication M Share low resolution directory NT Share name fort 2 I Mac Share Mac Share name M NT Share High resolution backup directory C MWF_Data OPI Backup Hi ial Low resolution backup directory C AMWF_Data OPI Backup Lo i Figure 10 5 Additional tab NT Share NT Share name Select the check box and enter a name in NT Share name to publish the OPI low resolution images folder on your NT network Other network users can then access the OPI folder and use the images in their page layouts Mac Share Mac Share name Select the check box and enter a name in Mac Share name to publish the OPI low resolution images folder on your Apple network Other network users can then access the OPI folder and use the images in their page layouts 124 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 10 2 OPI controls High resolution backup directory Enter a directory location to store backup copies of your high resolution images You may want to create backups to safeguard the original images in case they become corrupted or deleted Low resolution backup
150. ay need recalibration Failure to transfer correct data to the RIP Ensure that the RIP Folder specified in the Configuration dialog box is the path to the sw folder of the RIP installation into which you are importing data If the RIP Folder is correct this problem may be due to a problem with the content of the caldata folder where target and import data is stored This is very unlikely event but if it happens delete the caldata folder which is a subfolder of the Harlequin RIP sw folder and print the target again Note After deleting the caldata folder you cannot use Genlin to read tar gets created before you deleted the folder you must reprint the targets The reference number printed on the target does not appear in the list when you click File gt Read Target This can happen if the target was printed using a different Harlequin RIP installation Ensure that the RIP Folder setting in the Configuration dialog box is the correct path to the sw folder of the RIP installation used to print the target This can also happen because the caldata folder was deleted between printing the file and trying to read it with Genlin reprint the target and measure the new print MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 117 9 Harlequin RIP 9 7 Harlequin RIP Viewer Select the View option from the pop up menu or double click the Harlequin RIP module to display the Viewer window The status of the RIP module is displayed along with information about
151. be selected when printing color separations If this option is not selected the output prints as monochrome or composite In most situations this option would be left off In most workflows the output module would produce the color separations especially when a trapping module is used You can use the Preps module to produce the separa tions if the output files are going to be stored for later use and the preferred file for that use is a preseparated file type Prints Page and Sheet bounding boxes This option prints the bounding box as a visible image This can be used to check positioning and backing up or for monitoring the creep of a magazine imposition Once the positioning has been checked you should remember to turn this option off Clip pages on bounding box This option will clip pages to the size of the bounding box provided in the PostScript language file All bleeds that extend over the document edge will be clipped off Ignore bounding as default With this option selected the Preps module will as a default ignore the bounding box information supplied in PostScript language files 238 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 17 4 Preps setup Force to punch This option will position the imposition s punch edge to be in register with the imagesetter s punch that is matching the punch block on the imagesetter to the punch pin boards in a vacuum frame This may use more media but removes the time and inconsistency of regist
152. can control compression for color grayscale and monochrome images independently of each other The compression options are as fol lows ZIP The ZIP filter uses a lossless compression technique and normally produces good compression ratios MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 21 3 PDF Creator options JPEG The JPEG filter uses a lossy algorithm which irretriev ably discards data but it produces excellent compres sion ratios on photographic images When JPEG compression is selected you have the option to select one of the options from the Quality menu CCITT G4 The CCITT G4 filter uses standard fax compression and is only applicable to bitmap images Resolution If you have enabled downsampling this option lets you specify the target resolution of the reduced images embedded in the PDF file Typi cal resolution settings that you might employ for three types of PDF doc uments are 72 dpi for screen and web friendly PDFs 600 dpi for printable documents for example on an office laser printer 2400 dpi for commercial quality press ready printing Compress text Select this check box to compress text MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 295 21 PDF Creator 296 21 3 4 Font Embedding This dialog box provides options for embedding text character sets fonts font substitution and using TrueType fonts in the PDF documents generated by PDF Creator Setup for JAWS PDF Creator 16 x General Compression Font Embedding Security
153. ce the media using the imagesetter controls You must set the Film Left counter whenever you change a film roll Enter the length of the film roll when the film is changed Choose the units of measurement from the menu alongside this text box Once you have initially set the Film Left counter it changes to reflect the amount of film left in the imagesetter MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 34 2 Ultre SCSI Imagesetter controls 34 2 2 Media Feed If you choose Media Feed in the Ultre SCSI Imagesetter module pop up menu the media is advanced by the amount specified in the control panel of the imagesetter If you wish to track the media in your imagesetter you must always advance the media using this menu option or the Feed and Cut option described below rather than advancing the media using the imagesetter controls 34 2 3 Media Cut If you choose Media Cut in the Ultre SCSI Imagesetter module pop up menu the imagesetter is instructed to cut the media If you wish to advance the media before cutting it use the Feed and Cut menu option described below 34 2 4 Feed and Cut If you choose Feed and Cut in the Ultre SCSI Imagesetter module pop up menu the media is advanced by the amount specified in the control panel of the imagesetter and then cut If you wish to track the media in your imagesetter you must always advance the media using this menu option or the Media Feed option described above rather than advancing the media usin
154. ch takes a fair share of the output workload 5 1 Queuer workflows The Queuer accepts all types of job files as it is simply a place to hold jobs and store them for future processing Figure 5 1 illustrates two workflows involv ing the Queuer In the uppermost example the Queuer is used to manage output for two imagesetters ensuring that jobs are shared equally between the MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 47 5 Queuer two devices In the second example the Queuer is used to hold jobs before they are sent to an imagesetter for final output The operator is able to view the image file before it is printed to ensure the image is satisfactory S 4 w 1 E G mM Job input folder Harlequin RIP Trapping Queuer aa 3 Max Imagesetter 2 J Sa t G 4 Job input folder Harlequin RIP Trapping Queuer Max Imagesetter T Itt Tiff Figure 5 1 Queuer workflows 48 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 5 2 Queuer controls 5 2 Queuer controls Right click the Queuer module to display a pop up menu showing all the con figuration and viewing options Figure 5 2 Setup FS View F4 Clear Error Launch module Change Computer F6 Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 5 2 Queuer module pop up The following controls are available for the Queuer module e Setup This selection provides all the options required to create and configure the Queuer as described in Section 5 2 1 Queuer setup e View
155. ches the paper base color of the input If you do not check this box colors will be adjusted so that the white base is mapped to the final output device s paper color If you have selected Icc colorimetric as your rendering intent and this check box is selected then MWF will use the absolute colorimetric rendering intent 334 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 22 5 Color profile tab MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 335 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules 336 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 23 TIFF TF The TIFF Tagged Image File Format module allows you to convert files that have been processed by the Harlequin RIP to TIFF files compatible with the TIFF 5 0 file specification 23 1 TIFF workflow The TIFF module is a file format module that is commonly used in MWF con figurations as an output module accepting raster image data from the Harle quin RIP TIFF files created by the TIFF module are typically sent to an output folder which is scanned by a SmartScan module The SmartScan module is then connected directly to an output device module such as the HP Plotter The figure below illustrates such a workflow t o Ik Input folder Harlequin RIP Tiff T Scan for TIFF files HP Plotter Figure 23 1 TIFF workflow MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 337 23 TIFF 338 23 2 TIFF controls Right click the TIFF module to display the pop up menu showing all the con figuration and viewing options Setup FS Vie
156. circumstances especially when multi page files are being split using the Optimizer or Page Splitter mod ules This option also allows the Preps module to recog nize a name convention generated by the SmartScan MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 17 4 Preps setup folder provided that the name convention filters the file name down to just a page number If other characters are generated Preps may get confused 17 4 4 1 Punch location On selection of the Punch button the Punch locations dialog will appear Punch location x M Punch orientation Anis 2 inch ce Cancel Y Axis fo inch Punch location T Use default Figure 17 11 Punch location dialog This dialog is used in conjunction with the option called Places the actual punch mark described on page 240 If you print the punch mark on the media you can see how your template lines up with the automatic punch within the imagesetter If the punch mark is off center or is punching along the wrong edge of the imposed flat you can use the options in the punch location dialog to make adjustments Before making adjustments you should uncheck the Use defaults option This activates the x y location and orientation options When you select the A B C D orientation options and either of the x or y location options a red arrow appears showing how positive and negative x y values affect the loca tion of the punch MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 235
157. ck IV Override color management in job Figure 22 9 Color profile tab MWF supports the use of ICC profiles for ICC compliant output devices ICC profiles define the characteristics of printers presses scanners and other output devices so that they can be easily ported and used in prepress applica tions such as MWF ICC profiles are available for use when the Harlequin ICC Profile Processor HIPP is enabled in the Harlequin RIP module as described in Section 9 5 on page 110 Note HIPP is a purchasable option in MWF Your dealer will be able to supply you with a password The options in the Color profile tab fall into categories Color profile options and Color management options as described in the following subsections 332 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 22 5 Color profile tab 22 5 1 Color profile options Use profile Select this check box to enable the rest of the options in the Color profile tab You cannot select this check box unless you have entered a valid password to enable the use of ICC profiles as described in Section 9 3 3 on page 100 Output profile Select an ICC profile for your output device from this list If such a pro file does not appear you must install it into the Harlequin RIP as described in Section 9 5 on page 110 Choose Linear if you wish to assume that the device has been linearized Note that the output profile that you choose is only used if you also select an input profile in th
158. ck this button to save the current Load Balancer setup asa stp file You can click the Load from file to open this file at a later date which will restore the settings from the Load Balancer setup MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 147 12 Load Balancer 148 12 2 2 Load Balancer Viewer If you choose View from the Load Balancer module pop up menu the Load Balancer Viewer opens LoadBalancer 1 System Help On D DE Name Path Message A RIP 1 C MWF_Data Input Scan 1 D2 RIP2 C MWF_Data Input Scan 2 D3 RIP3 C MWF_Data Input Scan 3 Document 1929_WC_4C c ps placed into C MV F_Data Input Scan 2 CDBooklet c ps 3 Document SPPLE PS placed into C MVVF_Dataiinput Scan 3 Document BARINGTN PS placed into C MVVF_Datailnput Scan 1 Document Everglades c ps placed into C MVVF_DataInput Scan 2 Document BARINGTN PS placed into C MVVF_Datailnput Scan 3 Document VWWORLDMAP PS placed into C MV F_DataiinputiScan 1 Document Everglades c ps placed into COMAF_DatanputiScan 2 Document CDBooklet c ps placed into C MVVF_DatailnputiScan 3 Document BARINGTN PS placed into C MVVF_Data lnput Scan 1 Document APPLE PS placed into C MVVF_DataiInput Scan 2 i Document APPLE PS placed into C WivVF_Data Input Scan 3 APPLE PS 2 Document 1929_VC_4C c ps placed into C MV F_Data Input Scan 1 APPLE PS 3 1929_WC_4C c ps Figure 12 5 Load Balancer Viewer This dialog box consi
159. components of black objects and no trace of the objects appears in those separations If this check box is not selected the other process color components are taken into account 22 2 3 Output controls for RGB The options here are used when generating color separations Color separa tion is based on the principle of translating the three additive colors red green and blue into their subtractive counterparts cyan magenta and yellow In theory equal parts of cyan magenta and yellow combine to subtract all light and create black Due to impurities present in all printing inks however a mix of these colors instead yields a muddy brown To compensate for this deficiency in the color separation process printers remove some cyan magenta and yellow in areas where the three colors overlap and add black ink MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 22 2 Color management options Prepress operators typically use one of two styles of color translation under color removal UCR or gray component replacement GCR In UCR the black plate is used to add depth to shadow areas and to neutral colors In GCR more black ink is used over a wider range of colors GCR separations tend to reproduce dark saturated colors somewhat better than UCR separa tions and maintain gray balance better on press The type of separation you should use is determined by the paper stock you are using and the require ments of the press Black generation type Selec
160. creen angles your job uses to numbers in the range 0 through 90 Do this by repeatedly adding 90 to any values less than 0 or subtracting 90 from any values of 90 or greater Compare the converted numbers with angles in the menu entries There are three possibilities e Ifyou reach a set of values where all of the numbers are in a single entry in the menu then use that entry e Ifthe values do not match an entry exactly then select the closest match e If there is no close match then select the default 15 0 75 0 0 0 45 0 Snap angles to nearest 7 5 degrees Select this check box to change requested job angles to match the opti mum angles chosen in the Optimize for angle set menu if requested angles are within 7 5 degrees of the optimum angles Angle Accuracy Frequency Accuracy Increasing these values that is increasing allowable variations from the angle and frequency requested in the job gives the RIP more freedom in selecting a screen and may reduce patterning on individual films but this may also increase the likelihood of moir effects between plates If you are using HPS to produce extra grays on monochrome or non overlapping spot color work you can safely increase these values and may obtain slightly better output If you are producing process sepa rated work you should probably not change the default number Zero degrees frequency adjustment Once the RIP has calculated a screen set for the Cyan M
161. cting Work and turn option if the output device is a Perfecting printer able to print both sides at the same time otherwise choose Work and turn Work and tumble and Perfecting Work and tumble The work and tumble layout is similar to work and turn except that when a sheet is printed on one side it is turned over tumbled on its shorter length and printed on the reverse by gripping the other long edge The left side of the press sheet for the first side is the same as the 372 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 26 2 CIP3 controls left side of the press sheet on the second side Again you end up with two complete pages front and back on each press sheet Choose the Perfecting Work and tumble option if the output device is a perfecting press able to print both sides at the same time otherwise choose Work and tum ble Double sided web Prints jobs on both sides of the media for a web offset printer Sheet Lay Provides instructions as to which edge is the guide edge for 2 sided jobs Width and as Job Select the as Job check box to use the width set in the job Alternatively to set a fixed value deselect the check box and enter a value in the Width text field The value set here is ignored if you select the as Job check box Height and as Job Select the as Job check box to use the height set in the job Alternatively to set a fixed value deselect the check box and enter a value in the Height text field The value set here
162. cuments Composition 3 Doc 2 100 Composition 3 No cut Composition 3 All pages ready Composition 3 OutPut Document 4 color BLACK for Tiff 7 started with 1 next documents Composition 3 Doc 3 100 Composition 3 No cut Composition 3 All pages ready Composition 3 Job finished with 4 OutPut documents Composition 3 Accepted page3 ps Cyan Composition 3 Accepted page3 ps Magenta Composition 3 Accepted page3 ps Yellow Figure 14 4 Composition Viewer For more information on the standard controls displayed in the View dialog see Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 As each page is run through the Composition module it appears in the upper list along with all the messages relating to the module in the lower window Click this icon to abort selected jobs MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 15 Imposition ha The Imposition module imposes PostScript language files EPS and PDF files into signature ready plates for output You are able to create as many custom signatures you require manually or with the use of a Signature wizard Once you have created a signature it remains available for future use Note Scripting must be installed on your PC for the Imposition module to function properly 15 1 Imposition workflow The Imposition module produces its signatures from EPS PDF and PostScript language files and produces EPS and PostScript language files The module is typically pl
163. d jobs list and deletes them from the storage folder Hold jobs Di Holds jobs in the Queuer Jobs may be subsequently released t using the Release jobs tool A hand symbol appears next to any held job Release jobs g Releases held jobs from the Queuer According to the delete policy in force see page 52 when a job is released it is either placed in the passed jobs list or it is removed from the Queuer and deleted from disk Change job name u a Changes the name of the selected job listed in the Queuer Click the tool and enter the new job name in the dialog box that appears Change job priority m Changes the priority of the selected job In MWF jobs are released from the Queuer according to priority so that a job with priority 10 is released before a job with priority 0 Jobs are ini tially assigned a priority as they enter the SmartScan module configured in the Additional tab as described on page page 31 Compose files EA Combines only selected CMYK separations into a composite image then shows the resulting image in the Preview window as shown in Figure 5 11 page 60 You can also use this tool to soft proof individual separations See also Composed job pre view below MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 5 2 Queuer controls Note This tool can only combine separations that have subsequently passed through the Harlequin RIP module Compose job ye E Combines all CMYK separations for a job int
164. ded Preview Dpi a Log file directory C AMWEF_Data Log jal Maximum log file size 10240 Kb Default measure unit inches x Apply Figure 2 2 The MWF Manager options screen The options are arranged into tabbed areas each of which are described next 2 2 1 Manager options System tab The System tab contains the following options Auto load last configuration The last saved configuration is automatically loaded on the workspace when selected 14 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 2 2 Manager options Stop system if illegal link added When selected the system stops all job processing if a link is added to the workflow that causes an illegal link to be made This option has little effect since the Link tool itself will not allow an illegal connection to be made Preview dpi Allows you to specify the screen preview dpi dots per inch for image files held by the Queuer The default is set to 36 dpi which is usually adequate for most purposes Should you require a higher resolution first try 72 dpi or 96 dpi since high resolutions take longer to process and consume more disk memory The maximum allowed is 300 dpi Log file directory Allows you to specify a location for the message log file mwF Loc Enter the folder location directly into the text box or click the El button and navigate to the folder Maximum log file size Allows you to specify a maximum file size for the log file mwF Loc When the maximum fi
165. e SmartScan module as described in ICC Input Profiles on page 42 22 5 2 Color management options Rendering Intents The rendering intents are described in Table 22 1 below Intent Description None Applies no rendering intents ICC Auto Applies different rendering intents to different objects on Switching the same page This is a fixed mapping perceptual for images colorimetric for all other objects gt ICC Maps the entire device independent color space onto the perceptual gamut of the printer by compressing the range of in gamut colors to make room for out of gamut colors It is appropriate for rendering photographs and similar repro ductions of natural scenes gt ICC Specifies that the saturation of the colors in the image is saturation preserved perhaps at the expense of accuracy in hue and lightness Suitable for charts presentations and business graphics Table 22 1 Rendering intents MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 333 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules Intent Description gt ICC Applies absolute or relative colorimetric rendering based colorimetric on the setting of the Fill background with paper color of input job check box Select the check box to use absolute colorimetric Absolute colorimetric Any color the device can reproduce with the intended setup and viewing conditions is repro duced exactly Colors outside the device gamut are mapped onto a n
166. e 5 13 Spot Color Editor dialog box You can also add spot colors by right clicking the print job in the Queuer Viewer window and choosing Add spot color from the pop up menu The spot color name is taken directly from the name of the color plate Delete color This button deletes a selected spot color from the list Find Allows you to search the list for a spot color Enter the name of the spot color to dynamically search the list and highlight the spot color OK Saves changes that you may have made and closes the dialog box Cancel Click this button to dismiss the window without saving any changes that you may have made MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 63 5 Queuer 64 5 2 2 4 View menu The View menu allows you to show and hide areas of the Queuer Viewer Figure 5 14 shows the various parts of the window that can be toggled from the View menu Preview window Toolbar System View Jobs Help 4002 6894 59 2 0 800 8 5411 Job ID Pr ingJob_ Page Color Date Time T Size Destination B httpwww globa 4 Gray 19 03 02 11 21 50 RST 356 54Kb Tiff1 httpwww globa 3 Gray 19 03 02 11 21 49 RST 37277Kb Tiff1 httpwww globa 2 Gray 19 03 02 11 21 47 RST 348 76Kb Tiff1 Passed jobs httpwww globa 1 Gray 19 03 02 11 21 46 RST 356 07Kb Tiff 1 i max_rip pdf 1 Gray 19 03 02 11 19 27 RST 128 64Kb Tiff1 window globe tif 1 Gray 19 03 02 11 17 18 RST 45 89Kb Tiff 1 Queuer workfl 1 Gray 19 03 02
167. e SCSI Imagesetter 1 Ultre SCSI Imagesetter 2 6 To tidy up your workflow click the Auto Arrange tool s drop down menu and select one of these options Horizontal Tree Vertical Tree or Line Tree depending on your particular preference Auto Arrange tool Figure 3 4 The Auto Arrange tool MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 23 3 Example Workflow 7 Lastly enable module message logging in the Harlequin RIP module Although this has no effect on job processing it is sometimes worth while capturing messages to monitor job processing especially if jobs are failing to be processed correctly To enable message logging select the Harlequin RIP module and click the Message Log tool When you have done this a small Glicon will appear beneath the module to indicate that message logging is enabled for that module Message Log tool gt Y Xag DAV hk Figure 3 5 The Message Log tool Step 2 Configure the modules To produce the correct output it is necessary to configure each modules in the example workflow To access a module s options screen right click the module and choose Setup from the shortcut menu The instructions that follow tell you how to configure the example workflow Only those options which need changing from their default setting have been specified for the purpose of this tutorial most of the settings have been left at the defaults but you may wish to enter your own settings depending on your require
168. e a maximum of 20 characters No spaces are allowed The project name and folder is an integral part of the Imposition module configuration file and is stored at MWF_Data Config in a file called xImpos set A number of projects can exist in the Imposition module Use the New project button to create as many projects as you need Click on the plus sign to the left of the folder you named and then select your project Once you have selected your project the remaining three buttons on the right side of the Imposition Setup dialog box become available To use the Imposition module at least one project must be configured Click the Set as current button The Imposition bar at the left side of the Setup dialog box becomes available Current project Project 1 Project list start Ony Projects x New Project Rename Project Delete Project Set as current Figure 15 3 Project list dialog box The Imposition bar contains three tabs Projects The name of the job to be completed Signatures The configuration of plates and pages inside the projects For more information see Creating the plate signature on page 168 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 165 15 Imposition Options Input output directories and advanced options For more information see Options on page 185 15 2 1 2 Projects The Projects tab on the Imposition bar contains three icons which are used to display the project l
169. e a remote installation has been added its modules appear in MWF Manager and they may be used in your workflows Jobs entering a such a workflow is processed on the remote server then returned to the workflow See also Section 2 5 on page 19 for more information on networking MWF Remove Click this button to remove a remote MWF installation Once a remote module has been removed its modules no longer appear in the module toolbar however any module in a workflow that has been added from a remote MWF installation will still run on that server MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 2 3 Monitoring job processing in MWF 2 3 Monitoring job processing in MWF When you have set up and started a workflow it is often necessary to monitor the processing of jobs to ensure everything is running smoothly and no errors are occurring MWF allows you to do this by providing each module with a monitor window like the one shown in Figure 2 3 below for the SmartScan module To open the monitor window select the module and choose View from the Modules menu or press F4 on your keyboard The monitor window can also be used to start and stop modules and depending on the module that you are monitoring can be used to release jobs or reprocess them The module chap ters contain details about the controls available in the monitor SmartScan modules ae View Module Help cal I Name Status Log Pause il a Prepress Idle Poin ai Idle
170. e dialog see Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 399 29 HP Printer 400 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 30 Epson Printer we The Epson Printer module allows you to send files that have been processed by the Harlequin RIP to a supported Epson printer to create an automatically color managed proof using pre installed calibration and color profiles You can output to the following printers if you have the relevant password e Epson Stylus Pro 5000 e Epson Stylus Pro 5500 e Epson Stylus Pro 7000 e Epson Stylus Pro 9000 e Epson Stylus Pro 10000 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 401 30 Epson Printer 30 1 Epson Printer workflow The Epson Printer module is an output device module that accepts raster image data from the Harlequin RIP The Epson Printer module color manages the raster image data which is then passed to the printer driver for your chosen printer to create a proof The figure below illustrates such a workflow Scan folder Harlequin RIP Epson Proof Figure 30 1 Epson Printer workflow Note that the Epson Printer module can only be used in conjunction with the Harlequin RIP module For example it cannot be used with the Film Saver or Composition Server module 30 1 1 Configure Harlequin RIP memory When working with the Epson Printer module it is important that you cor rectly configure the Harlequin RIP module s memory settings otherwise the printer module may stop workin
171. e has a bounding box that provides the Preps module with trim MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 17 4 Preps setup information relative to the position of the image on the page Ignoring the bounding box information allows Preps to measure from a fixed point the 0 0 position as defined in the PostScript language This together with any applicable offset allows for correct positioning of pages 4 Click OK Applying offsets and rotation to Run List pages You are able to apply offsets and rotation to Run List pages You can select single or multiple pages up to the entire Run List You should apply offsets in the Run List when you want to apply an offset to selected pages within a job In addition to this you are able to apply rotation in increments of 90 degrees to one or more pages within the Run List Preps applies all page settings based on the PostScript language origin point of the file 0 0 which is always in the lower left corner of a page when the page is right reading in normal orientation To apply Run List offsets 1 In the Run List window select one or more pages using click shift click control click or the Page Range option 2 Double click or right click and select Edit from the pop up menu The following Modify Run List Page dialog will appear M Page Position Adjustment Horizontal fi inch Vertical inch M Page Scaling Adjustment No Change 7 Horizontal fio Vertical fi
172. e number in PostScript file A page number is placed inside the PostScript language file as a comment The Imposition module reads the files as they enter the system and then places them on the signature Page number in file name start from The number you enter into this field refers to the posi tion of the page number in the file name that the module is reading For example for the file name MWF83TIFF you would enter in the Start from field the MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 167 15 Imposition 168 number 4 indicating that the page number in this example 83 starts at the 4th slot character from the left Project Preview This option previews the entire project however at least one plate signa ture must be created before this feature works When selected the entire project including all plate signatures are displayed in a scrollable window Project Script This option displays the entire Visual Basic Script The Project script icon is displayed only when the Advanced user check box is selected in the Options dialog See Advanced user on page 188 for further details 15 2 1 3 Creating the plate signature When the project has been created and the page sequence determined the next step is to set up the plate signatures A plate signature is a template spec ifying the arrangement of individual pages to make up a complete sequence of flats ready for output on an imagesetter Select the Signatures tab from the Impos
173. e stitching Successive This pairs pages in numerical order 1 amp 2 3 amp 4 5 amp 6 7 amp 8 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 197 16 Pairs module 198 Set This option allows you to choose whatever combination of pairs you want 1 amp 47 or 1 amp 92 and in what slot 1 amp 47 or 47 amp 1 Early printing Select this check box if you would like to print each pair of pages as soon as they are complete Leaving this check box unselected makes the system wait until the full press run is completed before printing Hold project as default If you select this check box the entire project is held in a queue until you enter the Viewer and manually release the project for printing See Pairs Module viewer on page 205 for more information Start page number In this field enter the number of the page at which you wish to start cre ating page pairs Last page number You should enter the number of the last page to be included in page pairing Measure unit You can select from various working units for configuring the Pairs module Flop plate This option switches the positions of the pages in a pair automatically based on what you have chosen in this field There are various options available None This is the default setting It places the pages from left to right on the page as they come in The lower number is always on the left side of the pair the higher number on the right 1 amp 96 2 amp 95 3 amp 94
174. e the naming convention feature in the SmartScan module to create other tags with different field names for example name1 you can also use these tags To use tags created by the naming convention feature you must precede them with pg_ for example lt pg_name1 gt The prefix pg_ and the field names are not case sensitive and can be in any order If an Imposition module is part of your workflow then the following standard tags are also available for use in a file name template e lt TIME gt the time at which the file was processed e g 153936 approxi mately 3 39 pm e lt DATE gt the date on which the file was processed e g 20000412 for a file processed on the 4th of April 2000 e lt PLATE gt the plate number e g 01 e lt PROJECT gt the project name as specified in the Imposition module e g Project_0 These tags do not require a prefix and are not case sensitive Append User Directory to Path For Windows clients selecting this option directs the processed PDF documents into client folders within the designated PDF output folder thus making it easy to locate the finished PDFs Note This option is only available to Windows clients who submit jobs with a virtual printer This feature is not implemented for Macintosh cli ents Use Title as Output file Name When this check box is selected PDFs are created using the same name as the submitted job name When not selected a PDF is created with an arbitrar
175. e then listed below the calibration graph where they can be further edited Save as Click this button to save the calibration profile that you have created A standard Save As dialog opens You should save the file as a Color Transfer file with the extension sct A warning dialog will appear if you attempt to overwrite an existing color transfer file Load Click this button to load a previously created calibration profile A stan dard Open dialog opens The calibration profile should be a Color Transfer file with the extension sct MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 329 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules 330 Import Click this button to import calibration data created using the Genlin util ity Section 9 6 on page 110describes how to create a calibration profile for your output device Linearization Linearization is a special case of calibration commonly used when pro ducing output on an imagesetter Enter calibration data in this tab that has been gained from measuring a calibration target printed on an imagesetter Press Calibration Press Calibration or non linear calibration is typically used when cali brating a printing press Enter calibration data in this tab that has been gained from measuring a calibration target printed on a press Tonal Curve Tonal curves offer a quick and effective way of working around short term difficulties such as lack of calibration facilities or badly formed jobs that you c
176. e to a mismatch between configuration settings and the actual instrument or interface port used A break in cabling or a failure in software between the computer and the measuring instrument may also be the cause of a communication failure Check the connections and settings in the Configuration dialog box If these appear to be correct try switching off or disconnecting the measuring instrument for 30 seconds and then reconnecting it Alternatively Genlin may not be able to communicate with the measur ing instrument due to the re configuration of the interface port by another application If you think this is the case close the application that you suspect is causing the conflict If necessary shut down and restart your computer 116 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 9 6 Creating a calibration profile Failure to read the correct data from the target A problem in this area is most likely to be a mismatch between the Target file selected in Genlin and the type of target you are physically measuring First make sure that the number you select in the target list after clicking File gt Read Target matches the reference number printed on the target itself If recalibrating you may have printed the target on the wrong paper type Otherwise you may have read the wrong patches when using a manual instrument or incorrectly aligned the target when using a strip reader Finally the target may be incorrectly printed or the measuring instrument m
177. e to those obtained when using traditional lower quality rational tangent screening HPS has been designed for automatic operation and it overrides any bad set tings in the job automatically This is especially useful for print bureaus who often receive PostScript language code that is not set up for high quality screening To use HPS click Advanced in the Screens tab The Advanced Options dialog box opens MV Generate extra gray levels OK Limit number of distinct gray levels to 256 x ok Cancel Optimize for angle set fis0 750 00450 5 I Snap angles to nearest 7 5 degrees Angle accuracy pos Frequency accuracy 0 02 Ipi Zero degrees frequency adjustment H me Maximum frequency deviation H I Enable HPS 2 0 I Abort job if accuracy not achieved Limit screen levels to 65536 bd Generate clear centered rosettes I Rotate screens according to page rotation Figure 22 6 Harlequin Precision Screening options The options in the Advanced options dialog fall into categories extra gray levels options and angle and frequency options as described in the follow ing subsections 322 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 22 3 Halftone screening options 22 3 3 1 Extra gray levels options The ability to generate extra gray levels is a very powerful feature of HPS It allows you to use more gray levels in your job than are normally available with regular or HDS screening This has particul
178. earby point in the gamut There are vari ous ways in which a color might be out of gamut For example it could be too saturated lighter than the paper color or darker than the darkest imageable patch Colorimetric reproduction is appropriate where an exact color match is required For example you may choose a colorimetric strategy when you are reproducing a logo in corporate colors Relative colorimetric This style aims to reproduce colors exactly except that the luminance how light or dark a color is is scaled so that the darkest possible color is mapped to the darkest imageable color and the lightest possible color to the paper white This style may change the hue degree of redness blueness and so on of any color and Is almost certain to affect the luminance of most colors Some scanners and applications produce data that has been adjusted so that the lightest and darkest point are encoded as maximum and minimum lightness For inter preting this kind of image the relative colorimetric style is appropriate Table 22 1 Rendering intents Color adjustment Type Aand Type B are different modes of interpretation Typically Type B produces better results but is slower than Type A However the output time and quality are device dependent so you must experiment with these options Fill background with paper color of input job Select this check box if you want the output device to lay down a back ground which mat
179. eature in the SmartScan module to create other tags with different field names for example name1 you can also use these tags To use tags created by the naming convention fea ture you must precede them with pg_ for example lt pg_name1 gt The prefix pg_and the field names are not case sensitive and can be in any order See Name Convention on page 37 for further details If an Imposition module is part of your workflow the following stan dard tags are also available for use in a file name template e lt TIME gt the job at which the file was processed e g 153936 approxi mately 3 39 pm e lt DATE gt the data at which the file was processed e g 20000412 fora file processed on the 4th of April 2000 e lt PLATE gt the plate number e g 01 e lt PROJECT gt the project name as specified in the Imposition module e g Project_0 These tags do not require a prefix and are not case sensitive Strip Page No Select this check box to strip all page numbers from files being processed Use 8 3 file names Select this check box to name output files using the DOS naming convention Maximum allowed characters are eight with a three character extension Suffix Enter the suffix to use for output files in this text box The default value is PPF By convention many applications expect the suffix of a PPF file to be ppf or PPF MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 369 26 CIP3 370 Must be unique Select
180. ed preview images for jobs that are listed in the Queuer module You can also preview a composite image by selecting the sep arated plates then clicking Composed preview If there is a Harlequin RIP module in the workflow previews can only be generated in a pre RIP Queuer Viewer window if a post RIP Queuer is also present in the workflow Jo x Preview File View Figure 5 11 Preview window 60 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 5 2 Queuer controls The following controls are used in the previewer Saves the preview image to disk Click the tool then specify a file name and choose to save the image in either BMP or TIFF format You can also use the mouse to make a selection in the preview window and save the selection by using the Copy item in the File menu Resizes the preview image to fit within the preview window It is also accessible by choosing Fit to best from the View menu Increases magnification of the image by zooming in with every click You can also zoom using the drop down zoom menu which is located to the right of the tools Decreases magnification of the image by zooming out with every click You can also zoom using the drop down zoom menu which is located to 8 P the right of the tools 5 2 2 3 System menu Start This menu item starts the Queuer module allowing it to process jobs Options Opens the Queuer Setup dialog box used to configure Queuer options
181. ed proofs If necessary speak to your vendor to obtain a password 30 2 1 3 Output options Windows Printer This menu lists all the Windows printers available on your system To output to an Epson device you must add the printer to the system by supplying the relevant printer driver For example the Epson 7000 requires the Epson printer driver from the CD supplied with the printer or from the Epson website Media Type Choose the type of media that you are using from this menu The options are Sheet and Ro11 Paper Size Roll Size If you chose sheet as the Media Type you must choose the exact paper size that is loaded in the printer from this menu If you chose Ro11 as the Media Type you must choose the roll size from this menu When using roll media you can also choose to Cut paper after print Cut paper after print Select this check box to use the automatic cutter to cut roll media after each job You must also ensure that the cutter is enabled on your printer This option is only available if the Media Type is Ro11 Center Page on Media Select this check box to center the page on the selected media Margins You can specify a Left and Top margin by entering values in these text boxes Choose the units of measurement from the menus alongside these text boxes MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 30 2 Epson Printer controls Quality The options that appear in this menu are methods of driving the printer which offer combinati
182. edict Job time out 92 This is the amount of time the Harlequin RIP waits for a job to process through the system The job timeout allows you to control when the Harlequin RIP stops trying to process a job This is useful because it can protect against infinite loops in PostScript language code If there is an infinite loop in a job it never finishes processing Using a timeout ensures that after a set period of time the RIP stops processing such jobs MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 9 3 Harlequin RIP setup OPI The OPI Open Pre press Interface option provides you with the option of using the in built comment parsing facility in the Harlequin RIP module e Click the Enabled check box to use OPI comment parsing in the RIP The RIP looks for the low resolution FPO For Position Only files in the incoming file This means that the MWF system does not have to transmit files to a separate OPI server e Click the Fail if no HiRes found check box to prevent the file being output if an OPI reference is found and the corresponding high resolution file cannot be found you do not really want the low resolution version of the file appearing in the job Defaults Click this button to return the settings in the Harlequin RIP module to their defaults The Defaults button has a limited effect it cannot for example restore any fonts that the user has removed from the RIP using the Fonts setup window MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 93
183. er Log This column indicates whether or not the module is set to record all mes sages in a log file yes no See Log file directory on page 15 for details on how to specify the location and other properties of the log file Paused This column indicates whether or not the module has been paused yes no You can click the GO STOP button to start or stop the module For further details on the general controls in the dialog see Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 392 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 29 HP Printer My The HP Printer module allows you to send files that have been processed by the Harlequin RIP to a supported HP printer to create an automatically color managed proof using pre installed calibration and color profiles You can output to the following printer if you have the relevant password e HP DesignJet 5000 29 1 HP Printer workflow The HP Printer module is an output device module that accepts raster image data from the Harlequin RIP The HP Printer module color manages the raster image data which is then passed to the printer driver for the HP DesignJet 5000 to create a proof The figure below illustrates such a workflow t o D SmartScan Harlequin RIP HP printer Figure 29 1 HP Printer workflow MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 393 29 HP Printer 29 2 HP Printer controls Right click the HP Printer module to display the pop up menu showing all the configuration and viewi
184. er is always 1 unless the job contains SSiDIGSignature comments oe q Inserts the job name This name is usually set by a Post Script language or PDF job If a job does not set the name this sequence inserts the input filename instead oe Zz Inserts the file name of the job being processed If Read Title comments has been checked in the DIG comments section and the job contains a siDIGTitle comment then this sequence inserts the value of that comment of td Inserts the plate surface number starting at 1 for the first plate in the job of Nn Inserts the sheet number within the signature starting at 1 for the first sheet in the job oe oe Inserts a single percent character If you give the sequences as shown the text inserted is the full length of a string or the required variable number of digits for an integer If you include an integer in the control sequence for example 3s it is used to specify the length or precision of the value entered into the final string If the result of the control sequence is a string and that string is longer than the precision then it is truncated after the specified number of 376 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 26 2 CIP3 controls characters If the result of the control sequence is an integer that has fewer digits than the precision then it will be left padded with zeros to equal the precision Examples The exact strings to enter in these fields may var
185. erable to use the exact font that was used in the design of the document However there are times when this is not possi ble a font may be corrupt or the original font may not have been sent with the original file In such cases the only solution is to substitute with a font that is very similar in design to the original specified font The customer may ask you to do this to get the job done on time If substitution were not available the Page Splitter would do one of two things error and refuse to produce the job or substitute a default font that is not even close to the way it should look Either result is unacceptable One solution is to open up all the pages in the original application pro gram and search and replace every occurrence of the problem font This is not ideal as it is time consuming you may not have the original appli cation and if you miss one or two occurrences where the font was used the processing time would be wasted Having the Page Splitter offer to do the substitution for you on the fly is the solution because all occurrences are guaranteed to be substituted 7 2 3 Page Splitter Viewer Select the View option from the pop up menu or double click the Page Splitter module to display the Viewer window MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 79 7 Page Splitter The status of the individual Page Splitter modules is displayed when the Devices tab is selected Information about individual jobs is displayed when the J
186. eral Additional Virtual Printers Name Convention Module name Smarts can Scan directory CAMWF_D ata Input SmartScan PrintReady Backup directory Destination modules Work Flow Paths M PDF Creator PrintReady ps eps pdf branch File mask fe x File type fal types x Cancel Figure 4 2 General tab Module name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The name is used wher ever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when link ing to and from other modules Scan directory Enter the location of a folder to accept incoming jobs referred to as the Scan directory MWF is able to process PostScript language files PDF EPS and TIFF images Files that are not of these types are dealt with accord ing to the error policy in force which is defined in the Additional tab of the Setup dialog described in Error policy on page 31 Backup directory After processing jobs in the Scan directory files are automatically deleted to save disk space If you want to keep copies of the jobs then you can specify the location of a backup folder in the Backup directory text box MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 29 4 SmartScan Destination modules After clicking this button all destination devices connected to the SmartScan module are listed in the window Destinations include physi cal devices such as printers imagesetters and plotters as well as file format devices such as TIFF G
187. ere you may use up to 50 characters with spaces PS Printer drivers This area lists the PostScript language printer drivers PPDs currently installed You must select one of these to use with your virtual printer or add another PPD to the list by clicking Create PS Printer Driver and use that instead When selecting a printer driver use the most appropriate PPD for the workflow you are configuring Contact your supplier if you are unsure which PPD to use MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 4 2 SmartScan controls Create PS Printer Driver This button allows you to add a new PostScript language printer driver and assign a name to it The driver then appears in the list of PS Printer drivers for you to choose Remove PS Printer driver This button allows you to remove a printer from the list of PostScript language printers installed This operation does not remove the printer from Windows the printer is still available to choose 4 2 1 4 Name Convention General Additional Virtual Printers Name Convention ICC Input Profiles M Use name convention Fieldname Description Color Cyan 4Frombegin 4 String Delete Insert Field I Use default Harlequin RIP name convention for TIFF files Save convention Load from file Clear Test Figure 4 5 Name Convention tab The Name Convention tab lets you choose how to define your job naming conventions There are two basic options to choose fro
188. ering the films by hand on a light table It will position the flat centered on and parallel to the punch block of the imagesetter Layering Preps allows you to design signature templates so that you can double burn pages together in the imposi tion In other words you may have a set of master items found on every page of a job for example lottery tick ets but you may also wish to double burn onto each ticket variable information such as you are a winner sorry try again next time To do this design your template in the stand alone Preps application with independent pages on top of each other For example if have an 8 page imposition 8 slots You place 8 pages all labeled 1 onto your tem plate Then you place 8 more pages directly on top of the original 8 This second layer of 8 pages would be labeled 2 9 respectively In the Preferences Options dialog you would turn on Layering In your setup for Automatic mode you would enter a run count of 9 pages Assign the proper template the one you designed with the overlay of pages Submit your 9 pages into the Preps module and the module will take page 1 the one with your master items and put it in all the original 8 slots it will then take the remaining pages and double burn them over the page 1 items in their proper slots of course The only thing that must be kept in mind is that the pages you submit must be generated from a program that recogni
189. es you need to use a different method or else have a lot of wasted paper When using a sheetwise layout you need two separate plates for each color one for each side of the press sheet MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 371 26 CIP3 Choose the Perfecting Sheetwise option if the output device is a Perfecting printer able to print both sides at the same time otherwise choose Sheetwise Work and turn and Perfecting Work and turn The work and turn layout uses a single plate for each color to print both sides of the paper When the first side of the press sheet is printed the paper is flipped over side to side and fed through the press again using the same gripper edge When flipping the top and bottom are not inverted The top of the first side is the top on the second side For example if the press sheet supports 8 pages and your job contains 8 pages you could either print the front 4 flip the page and print the back 4 pages sheetwise printing or you could set up a work and turn layout In this layout you would arrange all 8 pages on the plate The pages would be carefully arranged so that when the press sheet is flipped page 2 prints on the back of page 1 and page 1 prints on the back of page 2 You end up with two complete front and back pages of each page on the press sheet For a print run requiring 10 000 copies of each page you only need to run 5 000 press sheets not counting set up and overrun prints Choose the Perfe
190. es of the output PDF since it occurs simultaneously as the file is processed The use of a backup folder is especially useful when there is a need to preserve the output PDF prior to it being sent for further processing For example you may have set up your workflows so that the output from one PDF Creator module becomes the input for another module thereby destroying the original file The backup folder preserves the original PDF file so that it may be used later Execute on job completion You can use this section of the dialog box to define extra actions after the module has created each PDF file To do this you type text specifying a command and its options in a way similar to typing in a Windows com mand prompt window The command can be a simple batch file or a complex application provided that you can give the command all neces sary options and information on the command line a command needing operator interaction is likely to cause problems and the application is available on the computer running MWF For example you can use such post processing commands to e mail the generated PDF to the user who submitted the job Select the Post Processing check box to enable a post processing com mand and enter the command details in the adjacent text box Option ally you can supply substitution codes as specified in Table 21 1 as well as options understood by the application MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 287 21 PDF Creator 288
191. es text Table 19 1 Trapping options for object to image text traps MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 259 19 TrapPro Highlight traps Select this check box to generate a separation for each trapping zone that shows where traps are being placed Choose red or green from the color menu to display the highlighted traps 19 3 3 Managing Ink sets Ink sets are created and managed in the Ink Set Manager shown in Figure 19 5 To open it click Edit in Setup TrapPro Ink sets allow you to associate an ink type with a color separation TrapPro uses the ink type information to determine how the ink should be trapped Default CMYK Ink Set OK Cancel Edit JJC Cop Figure 19 5 Ink Set Manager TrapPro recognizes the following ink types Normal Inks of this type are trapped normally That is inks of this type are trapped against each other using a normal trap width Opaque Inks of this type are not trapped except to another opaque ink Metallic is an example of an opaque ink Opaque ignore Inks of this type are never trapped Transparent Inks of this type are not trapped except to another transparent Varnish is an example of a transparent ink 260 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 19 3 TrapPro controls By default the Ink Set Manager contains one ink set called Default CMYK Ink Set which contains the standard inks for cyan magenta yellow and black separations typ ically used in a job You cannot edit or delete this i
192. es to your web server allowing customers to soft proof jobs 24 1 GIF workflow The GIF module is a file format module that is commonly used in MWF con figurations as an output module accepting raster image data from the Harle quin RIP GIF files created by the GIF module are typically sent to a web server using FIP The figure below illustrates such a workflow t oa Input folder Harlequin RIP Gif Figure 24 1 GIF workflow MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 349 24 GIF 350 24 2 GIF controls Right click the GIF module to display the pop up menu showing all the con figuration and viewing options Setup ES View F4 Lau jule Change Computer F6 Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 24 2 GIF module pop up The following controls are available for the GIF module e Setup all output modules share common controls These are described in Chapter 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules For details on device specific controls see Device specific controls below e View see GIF Devices Viewer on page 355 See Module shortcut menus on page 18 for details on the other general options in the pop up MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 24 2 GIF controls 24 2 1 Device specific controls To configure the GIF module choose Setup from the GIF module pop up The Setup for GIF dialog box opens The options in the Device tab Alt D allow you to select device specific settings Setup f
193. ete set of characters select the Long Proof check box 108 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 9 4 Fonts Setup 9 4 6 Removing Fonts You can remove most font types by clicking the Delete Fonts button in the Fonts dialog box The two exceptions to this are composite and CID fonts Composite fonts We recommend that you remove a composite Type 0 font using the font downloader supplied with it This ensures that the leaf fonts are removed In many cases this is also the only way to recover a font license if the license restricts you to a fixed number of installs CID fonts If your CID font is supplied with a downloader remove the font using that downloader Otherwise delete the CID font from the CIDFont folder in the sw folder Note If there is a CID font and for example a Type 1 font with the same name the name is listed twice If you delete such a font the RIP deletes the Type 1 font first and then the CID font if you choose to delete again Delete Fonts To remove fonts from the Harlequin RIP highlight the fonts to be removed and click the Delete Fonts button The RIP immediately removes the fonts that are selected in the window Warning Do not delete Courier as this font is essential to the correct operation of the Harlequin RIP module If removed the RIP module will not be able to load and will appear disabled on the workspace If you remove a font and then need to process a job that uses it you first have to reinsta
194. ewing options Setup F5 View F4 A Lau dule Change Computer F6 Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 13 2 Down sample module pop up The following controls are available for the Down Sample module e Setup see Down Sample Setup below e View see Down Sample Viewer on page 154 See Module shortcut menus on page 18 for details on the other general options in the pop up MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 13 2 Down Sample controls 13 2 1 Down Sample Setup To configure the Down Sample module choose Setup from the Down Sample module pop up The Down Sample Module Setup dialog box opens Module name Down sampe Destination modules M V Shrink to page Figure 13 3 Down Sample Module Setup dialog box Because the Down Sample module automatically detects the resolution of the selected output device there are minimal controls in this dialog Module name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules Destination modules All output device modules linked to the Down Sample module automat ically appear in this list Select the check box of the output device to which you wish to send downsampled files The Down Sample module can then detect the resolution of the output device Shrink to page Select this check box to ensure that pages bigger than the p
195. file and click Open Use the Save option to save the settings to disk first Save Click Save to save the current configuration settings to disk Use the Load option to load the options from disk 19 3 2 TrapPro options The following options are available when TrapPro is enabled in the TrapPro module and TrapPro is selected as the trapping method Ink set The ink set contains ink details for each separation used in a job TrapPro uses the ink type to determine if an ink should be trapped From the menu select an ink set to use or click Edit to create a new ink set See Section 19 3 3 on page 260 for information about creating ink sets Trap width A measurement for the width size of normal traps generated Normal traps consist of all traps except those created against black or narrow objects such as small text or thin lines The value you enter relates to the amount of possible horizontal misalignment occurring in the output device Trap height A measurement for the height of normal traps generated by TrapPro The value you enter relates to the amount of possible vertical misalign ment occurring in the output device MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 257 19 TrapPro 258 Jaws PDF Server creates anamorphic traps when different values are entered for trap width and trap height Feather steps The number of color gradiation steps to use in the trap The default value for this setting is 1 meaning traps are produced with
196. file dialog will appear This dialog has two tabs Preferences and Tiling and Fitting Preferences The Preferences tab provides input handling color punch and print options You can select as many of these options as required x fences Tiling amp Fitting T Use index files psi files I Prints Page and Sheet bounding boxes I Double sided T Clip pages on bounding box T Color separations IV Force to punch T Ignore bounding as default T Layering IV Places the actual punchmark Image overlap CENTER I Convert all spot colors to CMYK BUERE pa 47 I Do index files for single page files Figure 17 12 The Preferences dialog The following options are provided in this dialog Use index files psi files With this option selected the amount of time required to reload large PostScript language source files can be reduced Index psi files contain all the information required to load a file into Preps Index files are gener ated when Preps reads the PostScript language source file When you open the job with the same unaltered MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 237 17 Preps PostScript language file the index psi file will be opened instead If the PostScript language file has been changed the source file will be opened Double sided This is a print option and should be selected when using a double sided printer and you are printing on both sides of the paper Color separations This is a print option and should
197. files that have been pro cessed by the Harlequin RIP to any imagesetter connected by a HighWater card to the computer running MWF You can use this module to track the media used by the imagesetter and to specify other output options such as the amount of space to leave between pages of a job 32 1 Max Imagesetter workflow The Max Imagesetter module is an output device module that accepts raster image data from the Harlequin RIP The raster image data is then passed to an imagesetter The figure below illustrates such a workflow t o hi ah ak Scan folder Harlequin RIP Max Imagesetter Figure 32 1 Max Imagesetter workflow MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 417 32 Max Imagesetter 32 2 Max Imagesetter controls Right click the Max Imagesetter module to display the pop up menu showing all the configuration and viewing options Setup F5 Media Feed Ctrl F2 Media Cut Ctrl F3 View F4 Lau UNE Change Computer FG Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 32 2 Max Imagesetter module pop up The following controls are available for the Max Imagesetter module e Setup all output modules share common controls These are described in Chapter 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules For details on device specific controls see Device specific controls below e Media Feed see Media Feed on page 423 e Media Cut see Media Cut on page 423 e View see Max Imagesetter Devices Viewer on
198. flow MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 233 17 Preps 234 Profile Overwrite files A number of profiles can be created saved and selected For more information on profiles see Pro files on page 236 Check this option to automatically overwrite files of the same name If this option is not checked all files of the same name will be displayed You are able to tell the difference between the files because the time displayed in the Received column of the Available File List will be different If for example a number of files are submitted to the Preps module and then later resubmitted because they have been changed you can check the Overwrite files option to ensure that all files of the same name are over written by the new correct files Note The Overwrite files option in the Optimizer module should be turned off when generating single files from a multi page document See Chapter 20 Optimizer for more information Incoming page numeration Automatic composition only You can use the Page order option to decide how you want the pages to be recognized The following options are available Incoming order This option controls how pages are placed into the imposition templates Each page is dropped into an imposition template slot in the order that they are sub mitted by the Queuer Name convention This option allows the Preps module to recognize page numbers in incoming files It should be checked in most
199. following parameters oe f Job file name Path to the job file X e 8 2 2 Application Setup This option accessible from the Enabler pop up menu provides a convenient way to launch an application so that it may be configured The application is specified with Setup cmd in the Enabler setup dialog controls see page 84 for details 8 2 3 Enabler Viewer Select the View option from the pop up menu or double click the Enabler module to display the Viewer window The status of the individual Enabler modules is displayed in the Devices tab For more information on the controls displayed in the Viewer see Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 85 8 Enabler 86 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 9 Harlequin RIP The Harlequin RIP has proven itself to be a fast versatile and powerful PostScript language compatible interpreter The latest version features Global Graphics Eclipse Release technology with support for e PDF X 1a 2001 and PDF X 3 2002 e PDF 1 4 including transparency JBIG2 128 bit encryption output intents and referenced PDF e Palette color Index color TIFF files 9 1 Harlequin RIP workflow The Harlequin RIP module is likely to be at the heart of most of your digital prepress workflows The module would usually be placed after the SmartScan or Queuer modules in the workflow and is often followed by the TrapPro module for an in RIP trapping solutio
200. for the Output Modules Each option is described in the following subsections 22 2 1 Color Separation options Generate Separations Select this check box to produce color separations The Color Format value in the Device tab must be set to MonoChrome to use this option When selected process color separations will be created by default as listed in the separations list You can select or deselect the check box next to listed separations to determine whether they are generated You must select at least one process separation A warning dialog box appears if you try to deselect all the process color separations Recombine preseparated jobs Add Del Select this check box to recombine preseparated jobs Recombining may be useful or necessary in a variety of cases for example when proofing on a full color device or retargeting from one kind of final output device to another kind Click this button to add a spot color separation A New Color dialog opens in which you must enter the name of the spot color The name you enter for the spot color must match the one used in the job in every respect upper and lower case use of embedded space characters and any trailing cv or cu suffixes For example a typical Pantone specifica tion is PANTONE 386 Cv but applications may report this in different ways A warning dialog appears if you attempt to create separations with the same name Click this button to delete the selected spot color se
201. for the plate preview mode Early print Many print runs contain a number of signatures This option allows completed signatures to be released for printing before the whole print run is complete With this option unchecked the whole print run must be complete before printing starts 186 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 15 2 Imposition controls This is a useful option for production On jobs that are complicated or contain numerous signatures the time savings of being able produce a set of plates for the printing press could be significant Start new imposition if existing page arrived This option allows the Imposition module to compose plate signatures out of order Instead of waiting for all of signature 1 to fill the page slots other signatures can be started In other words if your scan module is picking up groups of pages out of order the module puts them in place as they arrive in the system Again this speeds up production by letting you get on with proofing or creating plates and not having to wait for pages to arrive in a certain order Default value for new plate The values in this section are the values that appear whenever a new plate signature is created the default values Therefore you should use the values which most closely represent the most common sizes for your layouts Plate width height Enter the width and height for the default plate Plate width and height are the measurements of the piece of aluminum
202. g or produce errors such as Print buffer is too small To configure RIP memory access the Harlequin RIP s set up dialog box and locate the memory settings panel in the General tab as shown in Figure 30 2 Adjust the settings for Print buffer and Band buffer so that the Print buffer has 18000 Kb more memory that is Print buffer Band Buffer 18000 Kb 402 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 30 2 Epson Printer controls For example if the Band Buffer is using 2048 Kb allocate 20000 Kb to the Print buffer Module Name Harlequin RIP 1 Memory for RIP 1200000 Kb Disk space left for system 5 Mb Print buffer 20000 Kb Job timeout e000 minutes Band buffer 2048 Kb Figure 30 2 Memory settings in the Harlequin RIP 30 2 Epson Printer controls Right click the Epson Printer module to display the pop up menu showing all the configuration and viewing options Setup F5 View F4 Clear E Lau dule Change Computer F6 Delete Del Ctrl F1 About Module Figure 30 3 Epson Printer module pop up The following controls are available for the Epson Printer module e Setup all output modules share common controls These are described in Chapter 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules For details on device specific controls see Device specific controls below e View see Epson Printer Viewer on page 408 See Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 for details on the other
203. g the imagesetter controls MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 439 34 ULTRE SCSI Imagesetter 440 34 2 5 Ultre SCSI Imagesetter Devices Viewer If you choose View from the Ultre SCSI Imagesetter module pop up menu the Ultre SCSI Imagesetter Devices dialog box opens Ultre SCSI Imagesetter Devices System View Help oe Name Status L Paused Ultre SCSI Imagesetter Idle Ultre SCSI Imagesetter Ultre SCSI Imagesetter Ultre imagesetter found on SCSI ID 0 Host ID 0 a Ready Figure 34 4 Ultre SCSI Imagesetter Devices Viewer This dialog box allows you to view the status of all the Ultre SCSI Imagesetter modules that are in the workspace This dialog consists of a table listing the status of each Ultre SCSI Imagesetter module as well as a log monitor window in which you can view progress and error messages All messages in the log monitor window are prefixed by the name of the module to which they refer Name This column lists the name of the Ultre SCSI Imagesetter module that appears in the workspace The name of the Ultre SCSI Imagesetter module is specified in the Device tab as described in Output options on page 437 Status This column indicates the status of the module Log This column indicates whether or not the module is set to record all mes sages in a log file yes no See Log file directory on page 15 for details on how to specify the location and other properties of the
204. ge Jobs often contain embedded information regarding dot shape To force MWF to use your chosen dot shape instead select the Override Dot Shape check box Frequency Another way to improve the quality of halftoning is to increase the halftone frequency the density with which the image is covered by halftone cells Frequency is usually referred to as Ipi lines per inch and has reference to the number of halftone dots that can be counted in an inch of space The higher the lpi value the smoother the resulting pic ture looks Increasing the frequency is rather like increasing the resolu tion of an image more dots are produced and each dot is smaller However the more you increase the frequency the fewer gray levels you can print Conversely the higher the frequency the smoother the step between each gray level You can override this effect by using Harlequin Precision Screening HPS to manually set the number of grays in the job as described in Section 22 3 3 on page 321 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 22 3 Halftone screening options Jobs often contain embedded information regarding halftone frequency To force MWF to use your screen frequency instead select the Override Frequency check box Override Angle Select this check box to use the screen angles specified in the Screens tab instead of any angles specified in the job Override Dot Shape Select this check box to use the dot shape specified in the Screens tab instead
205. ge of memory reduce this value Generate clear centered rosettes Figure 22 7 Clear centered and spot centered roses When color separations are combined the dots form one of two rosette patterns as shown in Figure 22 7 Clear centered rosettes are less likely than spot centered rosettes to show a significant color shift if separations are printed slightly out of register but the output produced is normally less saturated lighter and has a more noticeable rosette structure In general we recommend that output at high frequencies or where the output may be run on presses with poor registration should use clear centered rosettes while output at low screen frequencies or on well reg istered devices including most color printers should use spot centered rosettes If you find that you are not getting consistent spot or clear centered rosettes across the full width of a page try varying the requested frequency slightly or increase Maximum frequency deviation to allow MWF to find a screen set with a better angle and frequency accuracy Rotate screens according to page rotation For all screening apart from HDS you can select this check box to main tain screen angles relative to the page axes This may help you diagnose the cause of problems with patterning in the output If you still see stripes or bands parallel to the output engine s scan lines across the film MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 22 4 Calibration options on a capstan
206. ger to send a page coded with Run Length than to send the same page coded with None 29 2 2 HP Printer Viewer If you choose View from the HP Printer module pop up menu the HP Printer Viewer window opens System View Help 4 OS Name Status Li Paused HP printer Started 11 32 38 AM a Figure 29 4 HP Printer Viewer MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 29 2 HP Printer controls This dialog box allows you to view the status of all the HP Printer modules that are in the workspace This dialog consists of a table listing the status of each HP Printer module as well as a log monitor window in which you can view progress and error messages All messages in the log monitor window are prefixed by the name of the module to which they refer Name This column lists the name of the HP Printer module that appears in the workspace The name of the HP Printer module is specified in the Device tab as described in Printer options on page 395 Status This column indicates the status of the module Log This column indicates whether or not the module is set to record all mes sages in a log file yes no See Log file directory on page 15 for details on how to specify the location and other properties of the log file Paused This column indicates whether or not the module has been paused yes no You can click the GO STOP button to start or stop the module For further details on the general controls in th
207. gned to automate the prepress production process With the MaxWorkFlow Manager referred to as MWF Manager in this manual you use a simple to operate graphical workspace to create complex prepress workflows from over 20 pro cessing modules which provide everything you need to create job processing workflows for example MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual a Raster Image Processor RIP that uses the latest Harlequin RIP technology the acknowledged industry leader an incredibly fast and powerful in RIP object based trapping solution output to high resolution proofing devices and image setters workflow management tools that provide device load balancing multiplexing and reprocessing capabilities the ability to create PDF files which are fast becoming the industry standard for storing and distributing documents page splitting imposition source file optimization downsampling composite proofing OPI and more 1 Getting Started 1 2 Installing MaxWorkFlow MaxWorkFlow MWF is a Windows based application Before attempting to install MWF make sure your system meets the requirements listed in Table 1 1 then proceed with the installation instructions that follow Component Requirement Processor Pentium 600MHz or faster recommended Operating System Intel Windows NT 4 0 Workstation or Server with SP6a Windows 2000 Professional or Server with SP2 Terminal Server 2000 Server required to run se
208. gside these text boxes Page must not be larger x Select this check box and enter values in the accompanying check boxes to specify dimensions for the maximum page size allowed in the file You must choose the units of measurement from the menus alongside these text boxes MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 133 11 PreCheck 11 2 1 3 Fonts tab You can use the Fonts tab to check for missing fonts Module Name PreCheck General Document Fonts Images I Fonts must not be substituted Figure 11 5 Fonts tab In order to check to see if the fonts are correct they must be loaded in the PreCheck module as described in Fonts on page 136 Fonts must not be substituted Some graphics applications such as Illustrator check for font availability and replace any unavailable fonts with a default font such as Courier If you select this check box the PreCheck module ignores the font substitution and sends the file to the Invalid jobs folder even if the substitution fonts are available in the RIP If you leave this check box unselected you can specify substitution fonts in the Fonts dialog box as described in Fonts dialog on page 136 134 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 11 2 PreCheck controls 11 2 1 4 Images tab You can use the Images tab to check images in a file for color content and resolution dpi settings Module Name PreCheckl General Document Fonts Images Image Color Space Monochrome hd
209. gt does not extract the actual page number of the file for example a catalog section comprising pages 33 48 in a Quark document It sees the page numbers as they are written in the PostScript language instructions for the file In other words although pages 33 48 may have been used in the Quark document when the PostScript lan guage is printed from Quark they will be referred to as pages 1 16 Thus the lt PAGE gt tag will apply the numbers 1 16 sequentially to the resulting files not the numbers 33 48 Preserve Font embedding Check this option to maintain embedded fonts in the individual files created by the Page Splitter Produce TrueType fonts Select this check box if you want to maintain the embedded TrueType fonts present in the PostScript file When this box is not selected TrueType fonts are substi tuted with Typelfonts Preserve Font embedding must also be selected for this option to be effective MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 7 2 Page Splitter controls Default page size In the width and height fields enter the most common page size used If a job is processed that does not contain a page size as do some EPS and PostScript files the page size configured in this field is used If however a page size is defined in the job as is the case with most Post Script files the values in this field are ignored Preserve Halftone Select this check box to retain halftone screening information set in QuarkXPress The halftone
210. h x eigau A B Zoom nit 5 i kaiaa 1 44 Page 8 27x11 69 Page 8 27x11 69 43 page 11 69x16 54 Black Box ColorB ar 1 22 41 415 79 View Only Signature_0 Figure 15 8 Signature design dialog Signature wizard If you used the Signature wizard to help you create your plate signature all options in the Signature design dialog area are inactive However options in the Signature Design area can become active if you go back to the Signatures tab and select the Manually design plate radio button See Page design style on page 169 for more information If more than one signature has been defined a number of tabs appear at the lower edge of the Signature design dialog Select each tab to view the various designs You can view all the plate signatures you have created by selecting the Plate Set Preview icon in the Imposition bar MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 179 15 Imposition 180 If an error message appears it is generally because you have chosen incorrect values somewhere The system does not allow you to create an illegal signature or a signature with missing parameters Error messages can be avoided if you go back to the Signature List before choosing Plate Set Preview The Parameters field in the Signature List becomes active immediately after applying a binding style in the Plate Wizard Look at the Signature List dialog
211. h you must specify the scan folder to which you wish to transfer files Choose one of the available folders and click OK For further details on the general controls in the dialog see Module shortcut menus on page 18 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 149 12 Load Balancer 150 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 13 Down Sample The Down Sample module takes in high resolution raster files that have been processed by the Harlequin RIP and down samples their resolution dpi for proofing on lower resolution printers This module automatically down samples the files according to the resolution of the selected output device This module also allows you to proof a broadsheet page on any size printer automatically fitting to the page size of the printer This allows RIP Once proofing MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 151 13 Down Sample 152 13 1 Down Sample workflow The Down Sample module accepts high resolution raster image data from the Harlequin RIP which it downsamples before passing it onto a low resolution output device to produce a proof This module is therefore typically placed between a Harlequin RIP module and an output device module such as HP Plotter The figure below illustrates such a workflow t o e F Scan folder Harlequin RIP Down sample HP Plotter Figure 13 1 Down Sample workflow 13 2 Down Sample controls Right click the Down Sample module to display the pop up menu showing all the configuration and vi
212. hanism Choose Disabled to disable the use of the internal punching mechanism Choose Head only to punch before the page Choose Head and tail to punch before and after the page Head punches at Enter a value specifying exactly where the punch hole at the head of the page should be made Choose the units of measurement from the menu alongside this text box You must also choose where the punch holes are made in relation to the page inside image or outside image For example you may choose to make punch holes 2 cm outside image which would place the holes 2 cm above the leading edge of the page Tail punches at Enter a value specifying exactly where the punch hole at the tail of the page should be made Choose the units of measurement from the menu alongside this text box You must also choose where the punch holes are made in relation to the page from end of image or from head punch For example you may choose to make punch holes 2 cm from end of image which would place the holes 2 cm from the bottom of the page MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 431 33 ECRM SCSI 432 33 2 2 Feed and Cut If you choose Feed and Cut in the ECRM SCSI Imagesetter module pop up menu the media is advanced by the amount specified in the control panel of the imagesetter and then cut If you wish to track the media in your imagesetter you must always advance the media using this menu option rather than advancing the media using the imagesetter c
213. hat can e Install fonts in the Harlequin RIP e Tell you which fonts are currently installed e Produce a proof of any font currently installed e Remove fonts from the Harlequin RIP 9 4 1 Supplied fonts The Harlequin RIP comes with the 35 standard fonts found in most versions of the Apple LaserWriter and many other PostScript language printers The Har lequin RIP font folder also includes several special purpose fonts e The Harlequin font is used only for the Harlequin logo e The HP Times Roman and HP Courier fonts are used for PCL emulation PCL is the Printer Control Language used in Hewlett Packard laser printers e The NotDefFont font is used by composite fonts e The stick font is used for HPGL emulation HPGL is a plotter language used by some Hewlett Packard laser printers Harlequin supports HPGL2 with this font MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 101 9 Harlequin RIP 102 9 4 2 Types of font There are several different types of fonts that can be installed and used with the Harlequin RIP as described in Installing fonts on page 103 e Type 1 fonts these are the most commonly used fonts Type 1 fonts can contain hints metrics that vary with the size of the characters Hinted fonts can improve the appearance of text rendered at low resolution or at small sizes on higher resolution devices for example hints can affect 11 point text at resolutions up to 2000 dpi Note The font downloaders supplied with m
214. he page which allows you to cut the film to size If you select this radio button the following options appear Top Trim Margin Bottom Trim Margin Enter a value for the top and bottom trim margins in these text boxes Choose the units of measurement from the menus alongside the text boxes Select this radio button to configure the amount of space between pages If you select this radio button the following options appear Image spacing Enter a value for the amount of space that you want between pages Choose the units of measurement from the menu alongside this text box Auto Feed Cut After jobs Select this check box to automatically feed and cut the media after the number of jobs specified in the accom panying text box Select this check box to center the page on the overall printable area 430 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 33 2 ECRM SCSI Imagesetter controls 33 2 1 4 Punch setup options Punch Setup Click this button to open the Punch Setup dialog box Punch configuration Disabled z Head punches at 10 inch outside image 7 Tail punches at 0 inch from end of image z Cancel Figure 33 5 Punch Setup dialog box The options in the Punch Setup dialog box allow you to control the imagesetter s punch mechanism Punch holes are used for the easy alignment of color separation media for proofing and platemaking Punch Configuration The options in this menu determine the use of the punching mec
215. he Gray value is used to represent the color on a monochrome printer Edit Allows you to change the name of the color and density of the color channels in each separation Delete Allows you to delete any of the spot colors that you may have added Default colors cannot be deleted Test This option displays a preview of the selected color Set default Converts all the colors back to their default values that is the colors are reset to the values created at installation time and any new colors are removed Load from file Allows you to load and use previously created color profiles Save to file If you have added separation colors to the Colors dialog you can save the configuration setup as a stp file This is useful if you need to re build MWF configurations or load this information on a different or new server MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 161 14 Composition Server 162 14 2 2 Composition Viewer Select the View option from the pop up menu or double click the Composition module to display the Composition Viewer window Composition 3 System Help r r ADA Job ID Doc ID Passe Page Color Date Time Type Size Desti dev C256 30 page Cyan 4 25 3 37 RST 1056 1 256 92 page 1 Mage 4 25 3 37 RST 1056 256 93 page 1 Yellow 4 257 3 37 RST 1056 Composition 3 OutPut Document 3 color YELLOW for Tiff 7 started with 1 next do
216. he pop up menu The Signature selection dialog will appear 5 Select the drop down menu in the Binding style option and choose the required binding style For more information see Binding styles on page 221 A Template folder will appear in the window below 6 Select the icon until you can view the various options 7 Click on the required template for the job 8 Click Auto Select to impose the entire job This will automatically select the required signatures within the template Note Auto Select will only be available for use if it has been designed into the signature template It is a special feature that you must activate when designing a new template in Preps Alternatively you can choose to add signatures one at a time 9 Now start submitting files via a Scan module and the imposition should start automatically Options to adjust page and signature positions are exactly the same for the manual mode of operation See Adjusting page positions on page 222 17 4 3 Preps menus 17 4 3 1 File menu The options in the File menu allow you to save a Preps job as a template pjt file New Job Select this option to start a new job 230 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 17 4 Preps setup Open Job Template This option allows you to open a previously saved job template pjt file Save Job as Job Template This option allows you to save the current job as a job template pjt file Save Job Template As
217. heck box to connect to an Autologic III 3850 imagesetter The imagesetter must be connected to the computer running MWF When you click the Advanced button some extra options specific to the Auto logic III 3850 device will appear in the Advanced dialog box allowing you to use a device configuration stored in the imagesetter Advanced Click this button to display the Advanced dialog box allowing you to specify further configuration options for your imagesetter Use Serial Commands Select this check box to enable the use of serial com mands when sending data to the interface card Use Custom Exposure amp Density Select this check box to set the imagesetter to use the values in the Exposure and Density text boxes when printing Exposure Enter the exposure that you wish to use when printing If you select the Use Custom Exposure amp Density check box this value overrides any values specified in the control panel of the imagesetter Density Enter the density that you wish to use when printing If you select the Use Custom Exposure amp Density check box this value overrides any values specified in the control panel of the imagesetter MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 421 32 Max Imagesetter The following controls appear in this dialog if you have selected the Autologic Ill 3850 check box and this imagesetter is connected to the computer running MWF Com Port Enter the number of the communications port to which the Autolog
218. high resolution images reside locally on each machine MWF does not have to go out on the network to another server to find the images If several machines are trying to talk across the same network to a central server at the same time information transmission slows down considerably and can even cause system crashes e To add a remote OPI replication folder click the Add Remote OPI button and use the dialog box to navigate to the OPI folder e To remove a remote OPI folder select the OPI folder from the list and click the Delete Remote OPI button Synchronization checking This setting determines when OPI replication occurs During synchroni zation the OPI module checks for changes between the two OPI folders and will replicate changes if there is a need that is when folder contents have changed There are two options available On startup Synchronizes when the OPI module is started Every nn hours Synchronizes every mn hours 126 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 10 2 OPI controls 10 2 2 OPI Viewer The View option in the OPI module pop up menu opens the OPI window showing the list of jobs which have been consumed by the module as well as a log monitor window in which you can view progress and error messages OPI 2 System File View Help EU et So Y File Name Size Last access time Type Collage eps 624 19 03 04 01 14 42 12 eps Collage tif 934 35 03 04 01 15 03 28 tiff GOLFER PS 31 21 04 04 01 11 30 10 eps
219. hrough which your computer is connected to the printer You can connect to the printer using a parallel port LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 or a JetDirect printer server JetDirect Alternatively choose FILE to output to a file If you choose this option a Print File Name dialog opens when you submit a job You must enter the full path of where you wish to send the output file including the prn extension in the file name JetDirect The options in the JetDirect section are disabled unless you choose JetDirect from the Port menu IP Enter the numeric IP address of the JetDirect printer server to which you wish to send output Port Enter the port number that you wish to use If you are using an external JetDirect print server you must set the Port Number to 9100 or a similar number Some external print servers can drive several printers simultaneously In this case the different physical con nections or ports have their own numbers which may vary with the type of server For example on an exter nal JetDirect unit with three output ports the physical ports named 1 2 and 3 have port numbers 9100 9101 and 9102 28 2 1 2 Output options Quality Choose either Draft or Final as the quality mode Color Mode Choose either Monochrome or Color as the color mode 390 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 28 2 HP Plotter controls High Speed Option You can choose to print at a higher speed by choosing an option from this menu The default i
220. iaBox The options in this list are fully defined in the Portable Document Format Reference Manual Version 1 4 The default is MediaBox MediaBox The size of the media which may be larger than the page imaged upon it MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 95 9 Harlequin RIP 96 BleedBox TrimBox ArtBox CropBox PDF type selection The size of the page whose edges must be reached by bleed objects though the trimmed size of the page may be smaller There may be printer s marks and parts of the bleed objects outside this area The size of the page as intended for delivery to the reader after trimming any printer s marks and excess bleed areas The size of the rectangle to be used when placing a PDF graphic Typically this is the bounding box of the graphics plus a possible allowance for captions or blank margins Rectangle specifying the default clipping region for the page when displayed or printed Acrobat Exchange sets this when cropping a page These options allow you to decide on the type of PDF file you want to process Accept type s This menu allows you to define how strictly the PDF file must conform to various standards and specifications for PDF jobs You can use the On error menu to define what the RIP should do if the job does not meet the requested specification The options in this menu are as follows Auto detect types This is the default option The RIP makes the best possible attempt to pr
221. ialog box The Field attributes dialog box contains the following fields Field Choose a tag name for the naming convention There are a number of predefined tags listed in the menu for you to choose from that are subsequently used in other modules You can also create your own tags by typing directly into the text box Description Enter a brief description for your rule to help identify its purpose Type Select the tag s field type from the drop down menu Position Select where extraction begins in the job name For example From beginning begins extracting characters at the start of the job name You can also specify an MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 39 4 SmartScan 40 Size offset character position to use in conjunction with Posi tion in which case extraction starts at the offset charac ter position Determine the overall length of the name convention field by choosing from the following options Fixed Choose this option when your name convention needs to be of a certain fixed length Field complete when start next field The size of the field is determined by the position at which another rule starts For example if another rule is setup to extract characters starting at position 10 then the last character used for this rule would be character 9 Field complete when start substring Characters are extracted until the defined substring entered in the text box is found A common use of this rule is to specif
222. ic III 3850 imagesetter is connected Use 3850 Config Select this check box to use a device configuration stored in the imagesetter You must enter the number of the configuration that you wish to use in the accompa nying text box 32 2 1 2 Media tracking options Film Counter Use Film Counter Film Left 422 Select this check box if you wish to track the media in your device To do this you must advance the media using the Media Feed pop up menu control as described in Media Feed on page 423 You must not advance media using the imagesetter controls You must set the Film Left counter whenever you change a film roll Enter the length of the film roll when the film is changed Choose the units of measurement from the menu alongside this text box Once you have initially set the Film Left counter it changes to reflect the amount of film left in the imagesetter MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 32 2 Max Imagesetter controls 32 2 2 Media Feed If you choose Media Feed in the Max Imagesetter module pop up menu the media is advanced by the amount specified in the control panel of the imagesetter If you wish to track the media in your imagesetter you must always advance the media using this menu option rather than advancing the media using the imagesetter controls 32 2 3 Media Cut If you choose Media Cut in the Max Imagesetter module pop up menu the imagesetter is instructed to cut the media If you wish to
223. ided into fewer pieces MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 91 9 Harlequin RIP Large pages either in area or bits per pixel mean that many fewer scan lines can be accommodated in each band and this can slow down the system On the other hand too many scan lines in a band means that each band takes longer to process The Band buffer should be set to half or less of the Print buffer size Custom PostScript setup PostScript language hooks allows PostScript language procedures to be called at various key stages of interpretation to affect the way in which the job is interpreted For example Page Features such as those found in swnt sw Page Features Publish AppleTalk Channel Allows a virtual printer to be set up in the Macintosh Chooser and with a program like Global Graphics Fireworks the user can install Macintosh fonts into the Harlequin RIP from the Mac Disk space left for system MB This is the amount of disk space left to the Windows NT operating system The Harlequin RIP allows you to define a minimum amount of free disk space which is good practice and allows for use by other applications The default value of the Disk space left for system option is 5 MB You may want to increase it to reserve disk space for the other modules run ning on the same machine A reasonable value should be near the size of the largest files regularly created or copied on the relevant disk Try using 50 MB if this size is difficult to pr
224. iff Started 10 45 16 AM Tiff Start writing to C MV VF_Data Output Tift01 ADOBE PSGOO TIF at 3 21 01 Figure 23 5 TIFF Devices Viewer This dialog box allows you to view the status of all the TIFF modules that are in the workspace This dialog consists of a table listing the status of each TIFF module as well as a log monitor window in which you can view progress and error messages All messages in the log monitor window are prefixed by the name of the module to which they refer Name This column lists the name of the TIFF module that appears in the work space The name of the TIFF module is specified in the Device tab as described on page 339 Status This column indicates the status of the module which can be Idle or Busy Log This column indicates whether or not the module is set to record all mes sages in a log file yes no Paused This column indicates whether or not the module has been paused yes no You can click the GO STOP button to start or stop the module 346 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 23 2 TIFF controls For further details on the general controls in the dialog see Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 347 23 TIFF 348 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 24 GIF K The GIF Graphics Interchange Format module allows you to convert files that have been processed by the Harlequin RIP to GIF files You can then use this module to send the GIF fil
225. ight fo inch k Binding Style x Signature Wizard Plate Layou Methods of printing the second 0 y i z aie Layon side of the press sheet Plate marks LI Cross marks Block cross marks Trim Box Bleed Box Color bar Plate text Registration Mark Signature Design Signature_0 Figure 15 7 Plate layout dialog Block rows columns If required the page layout scheme defined in the Page and Block Layout dialog can be stepped and repeated to create a larger plate signa ture Enter a value in the Block Rows and Block Columns boxes to define the number times you wish to repeat the rows and columns respectively Block gutter width height If you are creating your plate signature by stepping and repeating rows and columns enter values in the Block gutter width and Block gutter height boxes to define the amount of space you want to be placed between the blocks of columns and rows respectively 174 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual Bindings Style 15 2 Imposition controls The Bindings style option allows you to decide how you would like to bind your pages The following options are available Perfect binding Perfect binding is a relatively simple process that col lates the various signatures that make up the pages of the book then clamps them just above the spine The collated pages pass over a saw which re
226. image data is then passed to a selected network printer The figure below illustrates such a workflow t 9 Scan folder Harlequin RIP Windows Printer uy N Figure 27 1 Windows Printer workflow MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 381 27 Windows Printer 27 2 Windows Printer controls Right click the Windows Printer module to display the pop up menu showing all the configuration and viewing options Setup F5 View F4 Lau jule Change Computer F6 Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 27 2 Windows Printer module pop up The following controls are available for the Windows Printer module e Setup all output modules share common controls These are described in Chapter 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules For details on device specific controls see Device specific controls below e View see Windows Printers Viewer on page 385 See Module shortcut menus on page 18 for details on the other general options in the pop up 382 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 27 2 Windows Printer controls 27 2 1 Device specific controls To configure the Windows Printer module choose Setup from the Windows Printer module pop up The Setup for Windows Printer dialog box opens The options in the Device tab Alt D allow you to select device specific settings Page Colors Screens Calibration Device Device Name Windows Printer Prints On MDC2 HALL hp document v Custom Bottom Margin
227. ine how you handle color within PDF files Honor PDF color management Select this check box when you wish to treat any calibrated or device independent color definitions in the PDF jobs as the PDF job declares them Leave this box unchecked if you wish to treat these color defini tions as device dependent color By default this option is not selected PDF jobs can use a variety of color spaces including device dependent spaces such as DeviceCMYK 98 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 9 3 Harlequin RIP setup Typically when using device independent color spaces PDF version 1 2 files use the CalGray and Calres color spaces and PDF version 1 3 and 1 4 files use the IccBased color space but these usages are under the con trol of the creating applications see the Job Options dialog box for the Advanced tab in Distiller 3 0 and for the Color tab in Distiller 4 0 When Honor PDF color management is not selected the Harlequin RIP converts CalGray to DeviceGray and CalRGB to DevicerGB the RIP converts IccBased color spaces to DeviceGray DeviceRGB or DeviceCMYK according to the alternative color spaces When Honor PDF color management is selected the RIP treats calGray CalRGB and IccBased color spaces as device independent color process ing them through the installed CRD according to the standard PostScript language color model The only exception is when an IccBased color space contains an ICC device link profile i
228. ing controls are available for the Enabler module e Setup see Section 8 2 1 Enabler setup e Application setup see Section 8 2 2 Application Setup e View see Section 8 2 3 Enabler Viewer See Module shortcut menus on page 18 for details on the other general options in the pop up 8 2 1 Enabler setup Enabler module options are specified in the Setup Enabler Module dialog box which is shown in Figure 8 2 To access this dialog right click the module and choose Setup from the menu or use the shortcut key F5 Setup Enabler Module 1 x Device Name Enabler Module 1 Config File El Setup cmd Change Icon oe Enabler Module 1 Output Folder Input Folder Run application Cancel Figure 8 3 Enabler dialog box The configuration options for Enabler are as follows Device Name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 83 8 Enabler Config File The name of an XML file that contains device information such as printer name and directory paths The Enabler module exports this information where it can be read by an external application and used accordingly An example XML file is shown below lt xml gt lt MWF_FILE SETP gt lt Device gt lt In gt c printer input lt In gt lt Ou
229. int the file according to the type labeling within the job If the job claims to be PDF X 1 but does not meet that standard then the RIP treats that as an error but may still be able to print the file MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 9 3 Harlequin RIP setup Any PDF lt 1 4 as basic PDF Print any job with a recognized PDF version that is version 1 4 or less including non compliant jobs labeled as PDF X 1 but not actually complying with the standard This is the most relaxed setting Only PDF X 1a 2001 Raise an error for any jobs that do not meet the PDF X 1a 2001 standard The setting in the On error menu determines the consequence of the error Only PDF X 3 2002 or X 1a 2001 Raise an error for any jobs that do not meet the PDF X 3 2002 or PDF X 1a 2001 standard The setting in the On error menu determines the consequence of the error On error The options in this menu define the action you wish to occur if there is an error for example if the PDF file is an unrecognized type or if it fails to meet the condition set in the Accept type s menu The actions are as follows Report errors and accept as PDF 1 4 Report errors and print the job as if it is PDF version 1 4 The errors reported are for the type as explicitly set in the Accept type s field or as detected when the setting is Auto detect types There is one exception in a PDF X 1 job if the opm overprint mode flag is set then its presence and value are ignored w
230. ions for accurate color PANTONE Hexachrome and PANTONE CALIBRATED are trademarks of Pantone Inc Pantone Inc 1991 Other brand or product names are the registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective holders US Government Use The ScriptWorks software is a computer software program developed at private expense and is subject to the following Restricted Rights Legend Use duplication or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in i FAR 52 227 14 Alt III or ii FAR 52 227 19 as applicable Use by agencies of the Department of Defense DOD is subject to Global Graphics Software s customary commercial license as contained in the accompanying license agreement in accordance with DFAR 227 7202 1 a For purposes of the FAR the Software shall be deemed to be unpublished and licensed with disclosure prohibitions rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Global Graphics Software Incorporated 95 Sawyer Road Waltham Massachusetts 02453 Contents 1 Getting Started 7 Introducing MaxWorkFlow 7 Installing MaxWorkFlow 8 Starting MWF Manager 10 2 MaxWorkFlow Manager 11 MWF Manager tools 12 Manager options 14 Monitoring job processing in MWF 17 Module shortcut menus 18 Networking MaxWorkFlow 19 Saving and opening workflows 20 Importing and exporting workflows 20 Submitting jobs for processing 20 3 Example Workflow 21 4 SmartScan 2
231. iously ripped and trapped TIFF files using a Scan folder to feed the TIFF files into the module for imposition 16 2 Pairs module controls Right click the Pairs module to display the pop up menu showing the config uration and viewing options Setup Fa View F4 Geane Launch module Change Computer F6 Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 16 2 Pairs module pop up 194 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 16 2 Pairs module controls The following controls are available for the Pairs module e Setup see Pairs module setup below e View see Pairs Module viewer on page 205 See Module shortcut menus on page 18 for details on the other general options in the pop up 16 2 1 Pairs module setup To configure the Pairs module select Setup from the pop up menu The Pairs module setup dialog opens E Pairs module setup Joj x General Module name GET Store directory EAMWF_D ata Pairs l Page Order Incoming order Name convention J Use Piojectilame Binding Style Fist and Last x I Early printing I Hold project as default Start page number fi Last page number fe Measure unit finches z J Prepare for duplex Flop plate None z Save layouts Load layout Page layout Plate layout Figure 16 3 Setup dialog box with General tab selected There are three tabs to this dialog each p
232. is the location of the folder to which files that are not successfully transferred to the scan folder will be sent By default the module creates an Error folder in the scan folder You may either click within the text box and type in the path of your choice or click amp along side the text box 146 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 12 2 Load Balancer controls Log File This is the location of the folder in which a log file con taining error messages will be created By default the module creates a LogFile folder in the scan folder You may either click within the text box and type in the path of your choice or click alongside the text box Mask Enter a file mask to specify which type of files can be sent to the scan folder For example if you want only PostScript language files to be sent to the scan folder use the file mask ps The default file mask is which accepts all types of files Hold on Start Select this check box to place all jobs on hold when they are sent to the scan folder You can release the jobs for processing in the Load Balancer dialog box as described in Hold and Release Directory on page 149 Delete Highlight a scan folder in the Scan folder table and click this button to delete the selected scan folder Load from file Click this button to open a file browser which you can use to open a stp file containing the settings for a previously created Load Balancer setup Save to file Cli
233. ist page sequence and preview Project List 166 With the Project List icon selected a drop down box at the upper right corner allows you to display the project contents by Table This view displays each project with the list of plate sig natures relating to each project Project and Plate This view displays each project with its associated plate signatures as a collapsible list Only Projects This view only displays the project names Use the New project Rename project and Delete project buttons to create a new project change the name of an existing project or to permanently remove a project from the list The Set as current option makes the currently selected project the active project so that it can be configured MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 15 2 Imposition controls Page Sequence Now that the project has been created the next step is to configure the page sequence Select the Page Sequence icon in the Imposition bar to display the Page sequence dialog E Imposition setup Ol xj Current project Project_3 Page sequence Page Sequence Incoming order C Page number in postscript file Page number in file name start from fo Figure 15 4 Page sequence dialog box Choose a page sequence to determine the order the pages are loaded into the system Three options are available Incoming order Pages are placed in the signature in the order the page files enter the system Pag
234. ithout producing an error There may be problems with the printed results if the job is newer than version 1 4 or is badly constructed Reject if invalid PDF type Report errors and reject abort the job MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 97 9 Harlequin RIP Passwords These options define how you use passwords Use password to print protected documents Select this option when you wish to print a document that has been protected by a password and enter that password in the text field Enter one password only For maximum security remove the password after use This removal is optional if your other PDF jobs do not have password protection Note The PDF specification allows for files to have Owner and User reader passwords The Harlequin RIP checks the password that you enter against both of these passwords and allows printing if either password produces a match Passwords can be any length but only the first 32 characters are signifi cant If you have any way to influence the choice of password used in jobs supplied to you suggest that it uses only ASCII characters the letters A z and A z the numerals 0 9 and punctuation marks such as and For example there may be problems in entering the password if the password uses characters that are not in the English alphabet Avoid multiple white space characters accented characters and characters that require a double byte representation Color handling These options def
235. ition bar to display the Signature list dialog box see Figure 15 5 page 169 Add Signature For the options in the Signature list to become active a signature must first be created Click the Add Signature button In the Enter signature name dialog key in a name for the plate and click OK The plate name must begin with a letter or underscore and cannot con tain spaces Letters digits and underscores are allowed after the first character Visual Basic script reserved words cannot be used as signa ture names MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 15 2 Imposition controls Multiple signatures can exist in the projects simultaneously Use the Add Signature button to create as many signatures as needed E Imposition setup Current project Project 0 Signature Name Script File Pages in plate Signatures Add Signature P Rename Signature S Tee list Delete Signature z Duplicate Signature Wizard Load From Template Save s Template EN Fn Signature Design m Plate Width fez inch Height aa inch m Plate sheet Use signature wizard Width 131 6 inch Height ase inch Manually design plate Plate design style Page image offset Offset x 0 inch Offset Y 0 inch Script z f Figure 15 5 Signature list dialog By using the buttons at the right of the Signature list plate signatures can be renamed deleted or duplicated In addition
236. k module e Setup see PreCheck Setup on page 131 e Fonts see Fonts on page 136 e View see PreCheck Viewer on page 139 See Module shortcut menus on page 18 for details on the other general options in the pop up 130 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 11 2 PreCheck controls 11 2 1 PreCheck Setup To configure the PreCheck module choose Setup from the PreCheck module pop up The PreCheck Setup dialog box opens PreCheck Setup x Module Name PreCheck General Document Fonts Images Invalid jobs folder EAMWF_D ata Output Precheck_fail Valid jobs folder cAMWF_D ata Output Precheck_pass amp IV Remove jobs from the list after fea hours Figure 11 3 PreCheck Setup dialog box General tab The PreCheck Setup dialog box contains four tabs which are described in the following subsections Module name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules 11 2 1 1 General tab You can use the General tab shown in Figure 11 3 to specify the folders to which files should be sent if they pass or fail the pre flight check You can also choose to delete these files after a specified amount of time Invalid jobs folder This is the location of the folder to which files that have failed the pre flight check will be sent You may either click within the tex
237. kspace in log files when linking to and from other modules MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 25 2 DCS controls Output type You can choose to output a single DCS 2 0 file containing information necessary to produce separations and a composite image Single file or multiple DCS 1 0 files defining each separation and a composite image Multiple file Compression Choose the compression method used for all files from this menu The default setting is None which leaves all files uncompressed Composite DPI If you select the Composite check box to produce a composite image as part of the DCS file s you must choose the resolution dpi from this menu Because the composite image is typically used to produce a com posite proof you should enter the resolution supported by your intended proofing device If a suitable resolution is not available in the menu enter an alternative value Composite Select this check box to include a composite image in DCS files which you can use to create a printed proof of the original input file before pro ducing separations on an imagesetter Preview Select this check box to produce a preview image of the original input file which can be used in some prepress applications to allow soft proofing Output Folder This is the location of the output folder to which DCS files will be sent You may either click within the text box and type in the path of your choice or click alongside the text
238. l 17 4 Preps setup Mark if allows a text variable to be used to mark files On selec tion a Mark condition dialog appears allowing a condi tion to be configured The options are begins with will mark all files that begin with the selected condition ends with will mark all files that end with the selected condition contains will mark all files that contain the selected condition For example to mark all files that contain the word page select the contains condition and enter the word page in the text box When OK is clicked all files in the list containing the word page will be marked Click the Add selected pages to the run list option to automatically add all selected pages to the Run List as well as the File List Uncheck this option if you want to manually add pages to the Run List If pages have been submitted to the Preps module out of order for instance one at a time as they are finished by the design department you may want to manually add pages to the Run List In this case the Add selected pages to the run list option should be unchecked Otherwise Preps will flow the pages into the Run List in the order they are received and the imposition will be wrong For instance if you have a 16 page template and you submit 16 pages to the module but not in the order of 1 through 16 Preps is not aware of the page number in Manual mode It will place the first page received in the 1 slot regardless
239. l 19 3 TrapPro controls Sliding traps color limit A threshold value which determines when a trap should begin to strad dle the boundary between two colors Sliding traps are used to prevent a sudden and noticeable step in the trap where the trap crosses the spread choke threshold When the limit is set to 0 the trap always slides when set to 100 the trap never slides Trap color density reduction A value which scales the trap color towards the neutral density of the darker of the two colors involved in the trap When the value is set to 100 0 the trap is as light as it will go This setting applies to all traps except where objects use black or opaque colors This control is ignored when Feather steps is set to any value greater than 1 Object to image trap placement Specifies how objects should trap against images From the menu select from Spread Choke Centerline or None as described in Table 19 1 Automatic Jaws PDF Server automatically decides the trapping method to use based on the object colors involved Spread image Traps are generated by spreading the image area into the object Choke image Traps are generated by spreading the object into the image area Center Half spread choke where the trap is centered around the original boundary of the two objects This is the default setting for objects in Jaws PDF Server and is considered the most useful setting None Objects remain untrapped against imag
240. l necessary calibration targets Calibration targets for all process colorants are supplied in the Samples folder which is located in the MWF folder For example when calibrat ing a film imagesetter you need to print only the file calB eps because the imagesetter prints only in black For color printers you need to print all four calibration targets calc eps Cyan calM eps Magenta caly eps Yellow and calB eps Black To print the targets drop them into the Scan folder Enter the data from your densitometer readings into the Calibration tab or click the Import button and select the file to import the calibration data Check that the calibration profile produces good output and adjust values if necessary Tip You should calibrate your device regularly to ensure consistent and accu rate color reproduction In particular you should calibrate your output device whenever you use a new batch of inks or media as they affect color reproduction MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 331 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules 22 5 Color profile tab You can use the Color profile tab Alt R to use International Color Consortium ICC profiles that have been imported into the Harlequin RIP Setup for Gif x Page Colors Calibration Color profile Device Harlequin RIP Output Profile a Rendering Intents None Color Adjustments CO I Fill background with paper color of input job I Preserve 100 process bla
241. l plate signatures see Manual plate signature design on page 181 15 2 1 4 Signature wizard To create plate signatures using the Signature wizard click the Signature wizard icon from the Imposition bar This displays the Signature wizard dialog The Signature wizard provides three icons for the creation of the plate signature e Page and page block layout e Plate layout e Apply MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 171 15 Imposition Page and Page Block Layout The Page and Page Block Layout dialog allows you to define the size of the pages and format of the rows and columns for the plate signature You are also provided options that allow you to rotate some or all of the pages on the plate signature You do not have to define a complete plate signature here You can define a block of pages and then step and repeat that block of pages to create a com plete plate signature For more information see Plate Layout on page 174 The Page and page block dialog is displayed when the Page and page block layout icon is selected in the Imposition bar a Imposition setup of x Current project Project 0 Signature Wizard Page amp Page Block Layout Width fo inch Height fo inch Save page into pool Page Rows fo gt Gutter Width 0 inch Page Columns fo gt Gutter Height fo inch Pages Rotate z row rotate on x z column rotate on z
242. lating to graphics in the original PostScript language file are passed through to the PDF file Preserve Under Color Removal and Black Generation information Select this option if you want to preserve under color removal from the PostScript language file This is normally only used in pre press environ ments MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 291 21 PDF Creator Document Structuring Conventions DSC Use Bounding Box for As well as the conventional page size request embedded in the Post Script language file many files also contain comments describing the actual extent of marks on the page The options are as follows Nothing Lets you ignore comments Page Size Use the bounding box for the PDF page size Crop box Use the bounding box for the optional page cropping box Acrobat Reader always displays pages as if they were the size specified for the page cropping box Some applications may generate their own cropping box information using pdfmark which overrides any crop ping box set in this way Preserve OPI comments OPI Open Prepress Interface is used to reduce network traffic by sub stituting high resolution images with low resolution screen images for the purpose of screen display and page make up often called FPO For Position Only Select the check box to apply the OPI comments stored within the PostScript language file OPI comments in the PostScript lan guage input file are reproduced as OPI dictionaries in the PDF o
243. ld to select a Binding Style and method of printing the second sheet The options available directly relate to the options previously described under Bindings Style on page 175 and Methods of printing the second side of the press sheet on page 175 5 When step 4 above is completed a Parameters section appears below the Signature list Complete the values for Start and End page numbers the start and end page numbers of the book And if required complete the Row count the number of rows in the signature and Column count the number of columns in the signature E Imposition setup olx Current project Project 0 Signature list popes Signature Name Script File Pages in plate 0 Signature_0 Perfect_Bound amp Sheetwise vbs 0 Add Signature 1 Signature_1 Successive vbs 2 Signature_2 Perfect_Bound amp Sheetwise vbs 0 Rename Signature Delete Signature Duplicate Parameters Value eRe ER Start page number 0 End page number 32 Save As Template Row count 2 Column count 2 m Plate Width f2 inch Height faz inch M Plate sheet Width fao inch Height fao inch m Page image offset Offset X fo inch Offset Y fo inch Script Pertect_Bound amp Sheetwise vbs z k Plate design style C Use signature wizard Manually design plate Figure 15 10 Signature list dialog showi
244. le The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules Output options Format This is the PostScript language file type to use when optimizing jobs The options to choose from the drop down list are as follows PS Produces an optimized PostScript language file If you choose this option no preview image can be created and consequently the preview options are disabled EPS The module produces an optimized Encapsulated Post Script file A preview image will only be available when it is already present in the job 268 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 20 2 Optimizer controls EPS preview The module produces an optimized Encapsulated Post Script file with a preview image This is the setting usu ally chosen when OPI is employed in the system see Chapter 10 OPI for details on employing OPI in your workflow The preview image allows the page layout operator to see a low resolution copy of the image on the proofing page and so helps when making page adjustments cropping rotation scaling and so on Use preview if available Select this check box if you want to keep any preview file already embedded in the PostScript language job and not create a new one This option is only available when EPs Preview is selected as the output format Preview DPI This is used to set the output resolution of the preview image The default setting is 72 dpi which
245. le size is reached the log file is discarded and a new one is made Default measure unit Allows you to choose the unit of measurement that you want MWF to use 2 2 2 Manager options Desktop tab The Desktop tab contains the following options Colors The color options allow you to choose the colors used by MWF to dis play links selected objects progress bars and the desktop background The available colors are determined from your system settings if you wish to adjust these enter the Display Control Panel in Windows and change the Color Palette to suite MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 15 2 MaxWorkFlow Manager 16 Show module name When selected module names are shown for modules on the workspace This enables module to be readily identified Show status icons in modules Select this check box to enable status icon on the workspace Status icons are used to indicate when message logging is enabled or to indicate when a module is configured for remote processing Icon size Allows you to choose the default icon size for modules on the Design palette Snap to grid Enables the layout grid on the workspace to which modules are aligned as they are placed on the palette You can adjust the grid spacing by entering values in the two boxes labelled Horizontal and Vertical 2 2 3 Manager options Network tab The Network tab contains the following options Add Click this button to add a remote MWF installation Onc
246. lequin RIP files are stored the default location is C MaxWorkFlow swnt sw Only one Genlin profile can be kept in the RIP folder at any one time If you change output devices be sure to re run Genlin and create a new profile for the output device Instrument Allows you to choose the densitometer model that you are using Measure Allows you to choose the measurement type supported by your instrument MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 113 9 Harlequin RIP 114 Media Allows you to select the paper or other media type that will be used by the output device For example choose Press Paper when using a proofing printer Port Allows you to choose the port that your densitometer is connected to Refer to your computer s documentation for help in identifying the port 9 6 4 Reading a calibration target In genlin choose Read Target from the File menu The Choose Reference Number window opens allowing you to select the target reference that you are using for your information the reference number is printed on the target itself After choosing the target click OK to open the Read Target dialog box as shown in Figure 9 12 Read Target xi Magenta Yes Magenta Status T X Rite Yellow Yes Yellow Status T lt Rite Black Yes Visual Status T Rite Cyan Yes Cyan Status T Rite Figure 9 12 Read Target dialog box The Read Target dialog box allows you to choose the colorants that you want to measure in the target Select
247. les when linking to and from other modules Output folder This option is the designated file system folder to which the Page Splitter module directs its output You may either click within the text box and type in the path of your choice or select the Directory Tree FTP button to the right of the text box and use the browser to select the location MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 75 7 Page Splitter By default the folder chosen for the output folder is MWF_Data EPS Specifying an output folder is not necessary in most cases where the Page Splitter module is not the last module in the workflow If the module is directly connected to a Harlequin RIP module specifying an output folder will create a redundant set of files that will consume extra disk space File name Fonts 76 This option allows you to define the name of the individual page files created by the Page Splitter module The default option of lt NAME gt lt PAGE gt Ps will create individual pages with names constructed from the original file name appended with the page number and ps For example a single 10 page PostScript file named book ps will create 10 individual files called book ps 1 PS book ps 2 PS book ps 3 Ps and so on The lt PAGE gt tag is very important in cases where the resulting files will be sent to an imposition module or program that extracts the page number to determine proper placement in an imposition However it should noted that lt PacE
248. ll it There is no confirmation dialog box Before clicking Delete Fonts be sure that you have the original file from which you can reinstall the font 9 4 7 Font Substitution This option allows you to substitute one font for another The dialog that appears when this option is selected has two areas the upper text box labeled Name of the substitution is where you key in the name of the font to be substituted and the lower menu labeled Font to Substitute is where you Select the font to be used as the substitution MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 109 9 Harlequin RIP 110 Generally it is preferable to use the exact font that was used in the design of the document However there are times when this is not possible a font may be corrupt or the original font may not have been sent with the original file In such cases the only solution is to substitute with a font that is very similar in design to the original specified font The customer may ask you to do this to get the job done on time If substitution were not available the RIP module would do one of two things error and refuse to produce the job or substitute a default font that is not even close to the way it should look Either result is unacceptable One solution is to open up all the pages in the original application program and search and replace every occurrence of the problem font This is not ideal as it is time consuming you may not have the original application and if
249. log box You can select as many fonts as you like EI To select a block of several fonts select the first font in the block and then hold down the Shift key and select the last font in the block Ciri To select several unconnected fonts hold down the Control key while making your selection To select all the fonts displayed in the list click the Select All button When you have selected the required fonts to be loaded click OK You will be prompted to restart the module for your changes to take effect Remove To remove fonts from the system highlight the fonts in the list and click this button You must click Yes in the Confirmation dialog box Substitution This option allows you to substitute one font for another 276 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 20 2 Optimizer controls The dialog that appears when this option is selected has two areas the upper text box labeled Name of the substitution is where you key in the name of the font to be substituted and the lower menu labeled Font to Substitute is where you select the font to be used as the substitution Generally it is preferable to use the exact font that was used in the design of the document However there are times when this is not possi ble a font may be corrupt or the original font may not have been sent with the original file In such cases the only solution is to substitute with a font that is very similar in design to the original specified font The customer
250. low 3 7 User Manual 299 21 PDF Creator 300 This dialog lets you manage both Type 1 fonts also known as ATM fonts or PFB format fonts and TrueType fonts The core fonts that are installed with PDF Creator are listed in red and may not be removed The core font set includes clones of the 35 standard PostScript language compatible printer fonts as well as stub files which refer to them For example Helvetica is one of the standard fonts but the font file for Helvetica is just a stub that substitutes the clone font Helsinki instead Use the pull down menu in the lower left corner of the dialog to select the type of fonts to be viewed The All fonts option displays all the installed fonts Add New To add fonts to the list click Add New The Add Fonts window opens Figure 21 11 from where you can browse to the font folder and choose which fonts to install After restarting the PDF Creator module the fonts will be available in the master fonts list and can be used in your documents Add Fonts x List of fonts 7 Figure 21 11 Add fonts window Remove Use the Remove button to delete selected fonts from the master fonts list Fonts which have been removed cannot be embedded or substituted in the document To remove fonts from the list select the items first and then click Remove MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 21 4 Fonts in PDF Creator Substitution This option allows you to select which fonts will be substituted
251. lt screening which is HDS Super Fine because the calibration and color profiles were made using this type of screening You must enter a valid password in this text box to enable the use of color profiles Color profiles are supplied with the module to ensure the production of color managed proofs If necessary speak to your vendor to obtain a password MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 29 2 HP Printer controls 29 2 1 2 Output options Color Model You can output to the HP DesignJet 5000 in one of two modes PhotoInk Composite allows you to output with 6 inks CMYK Cyan Light Magenta Light using Harlequin Dispersed Screening HDS To use HDS screening you must also enter a valid password in the Passwords for section of the Device tab CMYK Composite sends CMYK data to the printer and uses the default screening for the device to calculate the Cyan Light and Magenta Light components Windows Printer This menu lists all the Windows printers available on your system To output to the HP DesignJet 5000 you must add the printer to the system by supplying the relevant printer driver For example you can use the HP printer driver from the CD supplied with the printer or from the HP website Media Type Choose the type of media that you are using from this menu The options are Sheet and Ro11 Paper Size Roll Size If you chose Sheet as the Media Type you must choose the exact paper size that is loaded in the printer from this menu
252. lt Arrow Up Down Left Right buttons The pages and marks can be made to snap to the underlying grid by configuring a set ting in the Options dialog see Plate Design options on page 189 Right clicking the pages or marks displays a pop up menu providing the following options Delete Rotate Change index Move to Change size Options Use this option to remove the selected object from the layout It does not remove the page or mark from the Page pool or Marks pool Select this option followed by the amount you would like the object to be rotated With this option you can change the page number of a page on the signature This option provides a further dialog allowing you to specify the precise location to which you would like the item to be moved This provides you with the option of entering precise width and height values for the selected object You can define bleed and trim marks with this option The bleed area is added to the page size that is it sits outside the page area The trim area sits inside the page 9 When all the pages and marks are added to the plate signature you can view all the plate signatures you have created by selecting the Plate Set Preview icon in the Imposition bar Pages Pool Shows the pages available for layout You can drag and drop pages into the plate signature Pages can be added to the pool manually or by using the Signature wizard 184 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 1
253. m set up your own naming conventions or for TIFF files use the Harlequin naming conventions MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 37 4 SmartScan 38 Using the Harlequin naming conventions To use Harlequin naming conventions select the check box Use default Harle quin RIP name convention for TIFF files In general the RIP names each file within a folder uniquely by combining characters from some of the following character strings The page number of the job A stem fixed or variable The name of the separation A sequentially increasing number A suffix If the combined length of these character strings is sufficiently long the RIP truncates the stem to stay within the maximum length of a file name on the computer running the RIP or an optional tighter limit providing greater porta bility between different types of computers MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 4 2 SmartScan controls Creating your own naming conventions To set up your own naming convention rules select the check box Use name convention then click Insert field to access the Field Attributes dialog box shown in Figure 4 6 Use the options in the dialog to set up naming con vention rules Field Ector 7 Description Eyan a Position From begin x fa Type String x Size Fixed fa Field complete when start next field Field complete when start substring C Set I Field value translation Figure 4 6 Field Attributes d
254. me at which the Optimizer module finished pro cessing the job file MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 279 20 Optimizer 280 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 21 PDF Creator The PDF Creator module converts PostScript language files PS and EPS PDF and TIFF images into Portable Document Format PDF files that are fully compliant with PDF 1 3 and 1 2 specifications published by Adobe Systems Incorporated 21 1 PDF Creator example workflows The example workflows in this section illustrate how and where PDF Creator modules may be implemented in your digital prepress workflows In Figure 21 1 PDF Creator is used simply to convert PostScript language files into PDFs Such a workflow might be employed in a document publishing environment and might be used to produce PDFs suitable for printing or on screen viewing MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 281 21 PDF Creator lt s 9 SmartScan 1 Queuer 1 PDF Creator 1 PDF Creator 2 t SmartScan 2 Queuer TNA PDF Creator 3 Figure 21 1 Example 1 PDF Creator produces PDF suitable for printing In Figure 21 2 the PDF Creator module is used to produce an optimized PDF suitable for ripping In this workflow the PDF Creator module is employed simply to produce a smaller file much reduced in size to the original Post Script language file and ultimately results in the job ripping faster especially for example when trapping is employed in the Harlequin RIP module SmartScan
255. ments 1 Configure the SmartScan module as follows General tab e Select all destination module check boxes 24 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual Virtual printers tab e Select the Windows printer check box e In Printer name type MWF Ultra94 e Click the Explorer button that is adjacent to PS Printer drivers to open the PS Printer Drivers List screen Click New to open the New Printer Driver dialog box then click the Explorer button to open the Select file for new printer drivers dialog box Select Ultre_9 ppd from the list and click Open Enter ultra_94 in the Driver Name text box Click OK to close the New Printer Driver dialog box and then click Close to close the PS Printer Drivers List PPD File C MAXWorkFlow PPD Ultre_94 ppd l Driver Name Ultre_94 Create driver for TVE O Windows 4 0 Figure 3 6 New Printer Driver dialog box with correct settings e From the PS printer drivers list choose the newly created Ultra_94 driver e Click OK to close the SmartScan Setup dialog box 2 Configure the Optimizer module as follows General tab e Select EPS Preview from the Format options e Click OK to close the Setup for Optimizer dialog box 3 Configure the TrapPro module as follows e Select TrapPro from the Trapping method option Note that you may need to enter a password to enable this feature e Click OK to close the Setup TrapPro dialog box MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 25 3 Example Workflow
256. mething in error you may select Cancel or go back and highlight the erroneous information and replace it with correct information 9 4 Fonts Setup To setup the fonts in the Harlequin RIP module select Fonts Setup from the pop up menu F AvantGarde Book F Harlequin F AvantGarde BookOblique F Helvetica 100 F AvantGarde Demi F AvantGarde D emiO blique F Bookman Demi F Bookman Demiltalic F Bookman Light F Bookman Lightltalic F Courier BoldO blique F Courier Oblique F Helvetica Bold F Helvetica BoldO blique F Helvetica Narrow F Helvetica Narrow Bolc F Helvetica Narrow Bolc F Helvetica Narrow Oblit F Helvetica Oblique F HP Courier F HP Times Roman F NewCenturySchibk Bc Al Fies 7 Delete Fonts Substitution Proof Fonts T Long Proof 40 Fonts Close Figure 9 5 Fonts dialog box MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 9 4 Fonts Setup Whenever the Harlequin RIP processes a job that uses fonts they must be available in memory Fonts are loaded into the RIP from the disk automati cally whenever they are required However the fonts must have been installed first or they must be embedded in the job that uses them Installation is a once only process where the RIP configures the font for its use and puts it in the appropriate place A suite of facilities is provided that let you manage fonts easily and efficiently This suite includes commands t
257. moves about 1 8 from the spine of each page This ensures that each page makes contact with the hot viscous glue which is applied next Saddle stitching Successive Saddle stitching is used for binding a magazine or a catalog The pages are stapled along the centerfold If you took apart a magazine removed the center staples and looked at the piece of paper containing the front cover the first page you would notice that the sheet also contains the back cover When you prepare an imposition for a saddle stitched job you must take into consideration that the pages on a single sheet of paper are not consecutive This places pages into the imposition in numerical order 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Methods of printing the second side of the press sheet Select the required method for printing the second side of the press sheet Sheetwise If the press uses a press sheet that can print 8 pages ona single side and your job contains 16 individual pages you can set up a sheetwise imposition You print the fronts of 8 pages flip the paper and then print the backs of those 8 pages In other words if your jobs contain enough pages to fill up both sides of the press sheet you can use a sheetwise printing scheme However if MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 175 15 Imposition 176 Work and turn your job contains 4 distinct pages and the press sheet can contain 8 pages you need to use a different method or else have a lot of wasted p
258. n page 201 for more information 200 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 16 2 Pairs module controls Width height This is where you enter the width and height of the pages to be paired Crop page from left top This option provides you with the option of cropping the incoming pages onto the specified plate layouts Trim offsets This option allows you to specify exactly where the pages are to be cropped Positive trim offset values are always within the page width and height values specified earlier Bleed offsets This option lets you specify the imageable area of the page Bleed offsets determine how far outside of the page width and height that the ink is allowed to go past the edge Some printing processes require more or less ink bleed It depends on factors such as the selected binding method and the thickness of the paper Save page parameters You can create a file containing values specific to a project by selecting the Save page parameters option and giving it aname The named file is then available for selection in the Page pull down menu option at the top of this tab Take for example the production of a high quality catalog with several distinct sections to it clothing home hardware auto accessories recre ational activities While you may want to keep the general configuration for the job the same plate size press sheet size it is possible that each section has other special requirements that are noted on this tab
259. n Figure 9 9 Print Calibration x Print For Process Colors only x m Print M Device Uncalibrated target Uncalibrated press target Exposure sweep gt Exposure sweep data From fo To 255 Step fi Cancel Figure 9 9 Print Calibration dialog MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 111 9 Harlequin RIP 112 The Print Calibration dialog box contains all the options required for printing your calibration target including Device list The Device window lists all the output devices connected to the RIP module From the list choose the device that you are creating the profile for Print for From the menu select the appropriate color process that you will be using on the output device Choose from Process Colors only Spot Colors only Process amp Spot Colors Or Monochrome only The Monochrome only option supports calibration of a monochrome device such as an imagesetter Select this to print a single calibration strip for a page setup that normally generates separations Print Uncalibrated target Click this button to create a target for a device that is not a press for example an inkjet proofer Print Uncalibrated press target Click this button to create a target that will be output on a press Print Exposure sweep Click this button to create a series of targets using the values specified in the Exposure sweep data boxes The target creates test strips at each exposure in the
260. n The RIP module accepts a range of input formats including PostScript language and Encapsulated PostScript EPS files Portable Document Format PDF files TIFF IT P1 files TIFF 6 0 baseline files and JPEG and JFIF files The Harlequin RIP supports modern versions of these files including PostScript LanguageLevel 3 PDF version 1 4 and derived standards such as PDF X The RIP also has controls for special handling of older versions of these files if necessary MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 87 9 Harlequin RIP The Harlequin RIP produces raster data and should direct its output to the file format modules such as TIFF and GIF or the output device modules such as Max Imagesetter ECRM SCSI and Ultre SCSI ata aa Jo Imagesetter 2 5 lt ee al SmartScan Queuer Harlequin RIP TrapvYorks over Ng aa aa Max Imagesetter 1 Figure 9 1 Typical Harlequin RIP workflow 9 2 Harlequin RIP controls Right click the Harlequin RIP module to display the pop up menu showing all the configuration and viewing options Setup F5 Fonts Setup Ctrl F2 Install ICC Profile Ctrl F3 Print Calibration Ctrl F4 Launch Genlin Ctrl F5 View F4 Gear Error Launch module Change Computer F6 Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 9 2 Harlequin RIP pop up menu 88 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 9 3 Harlequin RIP setup The following controls are available for the Harlequin RIP module e Setup see Harlequin RI
261. n does not clearly define what is the bottom left of a plate what is the image able area of a press and so on You may encounter some conventions that are specific to the way in which various vendors have interpreted the specification Include all Extents and Transforms Select this check box to include values in the PPF file for all settings in the Extents and Transforms section even if they are at their default values The default values have no effect but the software reading the PPF files may require the settings to be present in the PPF file If you leave this box unselected the PPF file includes only the values for controls that you have set explicitly For example if you have set values only for the Film and Plate tabs then only those values appear in the PPF file Work style Select the imposition workstyle used for printing jobs The menu pro vides the following options Single Sided Jobs are printed on a single side of media Sheetwise and Perfecting Sheetwise If the press uses a press sheet that can print 8 pages ona single side and your job contains 16 individual pages you can set up a sheetwise imposition You print the fronts of 8 pages flip the paper and then print the backs of those 8 pages In other words if your jobs contain enough pages to fill up both sides of the press sheet you can use a sheetwise printing scheme However if your job contains 4 distinct pages and the press sheet can contain 8 pag
262. n which case the device link is used Honor PDF color management has no effect on the Lab color space 9 3 2 Extras tab The Extras tab provides access to the ICC Color profile support password Abort job if any fonts are missing Select this option to ensure that a job is aborted if any font it uses is not available If you leave this option unselected the RIP attempts to use a suitable replacement for any missing font By default this option is not selected Print EPS files add showpage if necessary With this option checked the Harlequin RIP has the capability of pro cessing native EPS files If the EPS files does not contain a showpage com mand one will be added An example of EPS file that usually do not contain a showpage command are many Freehand files MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 99 9 Harlequin RIP Restart RIP every nn hours Enter the numbers of hours for the RIP to process jobs before it restarts We recommend a setting of 12 hours when there is a constant flow of processing In Start time specify the time that you want the restart to commence and it will occur every nn hours after this 9 3 3 Passwords tab ICC color profiles support password Enter the ICC color profiles support password in this text box For more information on ICC color profiles see Install ICC Profile on page 110 On completion Once you have entered the correct setup information for the RIP click OK If you have entered so
263. nd processing job Microsoft Word Reports Spring doc at 12 08 16 Start processing job Microsoft Word Reports Spring doc at 12 20 47 Message log Figure 21 13 PDF Creator Viewer MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 21 5 PDF Creator Viewer The features of the Viewer are described next 21 5 1 Menus The Menu items are used to access the various options in the Viewer Module gt Start Stop Stops and starts the module In MWF a module must be started before it can process jobs Stopping a module ceases all job processing furthermore no jobs may be sent to the module whilst the module is stopped You can also start stop a module using the Start Stop button on the toolbar Module gt Abort job Module gt Setup This command immediately stops a module from any further processing on the current job The job is aban doned and processing continues with the next job Choosing this option opens the PDF Creator Setup dialog box where module options are configured The options in this dialog box control all configurable aspects associated with the PDF document such as reso lution font embedding and security as well as output and backup folder locations The PDF Creator Setup dialog box is described in PDF Creator options on page 284 You can also access the setup command by pressing F5 Module gt Shutdown This command shuts down the PDF Creator module on the workspace When a module has been shut down the
264. nd together with a common edge that will subsequently be cut With this binding style Preps takes an equal number of pages from the start and end of the Run List to fill the largest signature in the template If required you may apply the signatures manually using the Add option Note The Come and go binding style cannot be used with a multiple selection template Cut and Stack The Cut and stack binding style is used when different parts of a job are printed at the same time An example of this would be when the first half of the Run List is imposed on one side of a press sheet and the second half on the other After this the sheet is cut and one side is stacked against the other to form a complete book 17 4 1 4 Adjusting page positions Because the applications creating source files do so in many and various ways pages may be inconsistently or incorrectly positioned within your Preps job Therefore within Preps you are able to fine tune the position of pages in the following ways Selecting pages or signatures Applying offsets to source files Run List pages templates or signatures Rotating Run List pages Working with bounding boxes Scaling pages templates or signatures Adding creep to templates or signatures MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 17 4 Preps setup Selecting pages and signatures When applying offsets rotation or other configurations to pages or signatures a simple method of selecting the various types of page is
265. nformation from the previous job will still be active and therefore applied to the new job 17 5 Preps Viewer The Preps Viewer window displays the status of the Preps module along with information about the individual files being processed by the module The only options documented here are those that are different to the standard con trols which are described in Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 1 Right click the Preps module and select View from the pop up menu The list of Preps modules will appear in a list 246 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 17 5 Preps Viewer 2 Click the File List icon to view a list of files available to the module The following dialog will appear Available files Manual mode of x Files 16 Device rite 7 File Name Title Page Sizes Creator Color Received pagel ps pagel ps 1 f AWF Optimizer hi Md 2 pagel0 ps page10 ps 1 8 24x10 89 MWF Optimizer 7 19 01 2 36 02 3 pagel1 ps pagel1 ps 1 8 24x10 89 MWF Optimizer 7 19 01 2 36 08 PM 4 pagel2 ps pagel2 ps 1 8 24x10 89 MWF Optimizer 7 19 01 2 36 12 PM 5 pagel3 ps pagel 3 ps 1 8 24x10 89 MWF Optimizer 7 19 01 2 36 16 PM 6 pagel4 ps pagel 4 ps 1 8 24x10 89 MWF Optimizer 7 19 01 2 36 20 PM 7 pagel 5 ps page15 ps 1 8 24 10 89 MWF Optimizer 7 19 01 2 36 24 PM 8 page16 ps page16 ps 1 8 24 10 89 MWF Optimizer 7 19 01 2 36 30 PM 9 page2 ps page2 ps 1 8 24x10 89 MWF Optimizer 7 19 01 2 36 34 PM 10 page3 ps page3 ps 1 8 24x10
266. ng Parameters MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 15 2 Imposition controls 6 Click the Signature Design icon in the Imposition bar to display the Signature design dialog In this case the dialog opens with the signature containing no pages However unlike when this option is selected from the Signature wizard you are now able to access all the controls Current project Project 0 Signature Design Ou Zoom faze x Unit inches z 5 10 15 pie eraai A al 20 mri Marks pool 21 31 7 64 gnature_4 Figure 15 11 Signature design dialog manual Clicking the yellow box icon at the top of the dialog scales the plate signature to a fit into the available space for the screen preview The white mouse icon locks or unlocks the pages and marks on the plate The Zoom drop down menu zooms in and out on the plate layout screen Units can be changed to different measurements 7 Toadd pages to the signature drag and drop pages from the Pages pool situated at the right side of the dialog If no pages exist in the pool or you would like to create some more right click Pages Pool to display a pop up menu The menu provides New page Edit page Duplicate page and Delete page options MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 183 15 Imposition 8 Click and drag marks from the Marks pool onto the plate and place them at any position Objects on the plate marks and pages can be moved by selecting them and then using the A
267. ng options Setup F5 View F4 Lau jule Change Computer F6 Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 29 2 HP Printer module pop up The following controls are available for the HP Printer module e Setup all output modules share common controls These are described in Chapter 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules For details on device specific controls see Device specific controls below e View see HP Printer Viewer on page 398 See Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 for details on the other general options in the pop up 394 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 29 2 HP Printer controls 29 2 1 Device specific controls To configure the HP Printer module choose Setup from the HP Printer module pop up The Setup for HP Printer dialog box opens The options in the Device tab Alt D allow you to select device specific settings Setup for HP printer 1 x Page Colors Calibration Color profile Device Device Name HP printer Device Type DesignJet 5000 x Calibration HP Photo Gloss 600 Passwords for SPARKEY x one fo HDS fo ICC fo Color Model Media type Rol z CMYK Composite he Roll size Windows Printer 36 Roll z n Print 7 eal IV Cut paper after print Quality Best 7 Compression None z Figure 29 3 Device tab for the HP Printer module The options in the Device tab fall into categories printer options and output options as
268. ngs Sheet 1 Sheet 2 and so on See Coding text entries for Job Name and Sheet Name on page 375 for details of the possible codes and their meanings See also the note for CIP3AdmJob Name Anti Alias Select this box to antialias the preview image Coding text entries for Job Name and Sheet Name Both of these text fields are coded in exactly the same way They may include plain text which appears exactly as entered with or without control sequences which are replaced by variable text specific to the job or sheet as the job is processed Use the default values if you are in doubt about what you should include in these fields The default values have been selected to be compatible with many CIP3 PPF readers If you have problems with the defaults please check for recommendations from the supplier of your PPF reader Control sequences must start with a percent character This must be fol lowed immediately with either of e A character taken from the list below MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 375 26 CIP3 e An integer and then a character taken from the list below There must be no spaces between the percent character the integer if present and the control character itself The recognized control characters are F Inserts Front for the front of a two sided sheet and Back for the back All single sided sheets are regarded as front sides oe oe Q Inserts the signature number of the imposition This numb
269. nk set but you may click Copy to make a duplicate set and amend that instead To edit an ink set click Edit or to create a new one click New The Edit Ink Sets dialog box opens for both choices as shown in Figure 19 6 Using the controls in Edit Ink Sets you can create a new ink set or add new inks and amend inks in an existing ink set The inks that you include in the ink set should match those specified in the job itself as defined in the output device module under the set tings for Colors Normal trapping will be applied to any separation not listed in the ink set As necessary amend create inks using the Ink Name Type and Density controls If you do not know the neutral density value enter 1 0 and TrapPro will automatically determine the neutral density of the ink when the job is processed Edit Ink Sets x Name Ink Set New Ink Set Edit Selected Ink Cancel Ink Name New Ink Color b Type Normal 0 Normal X Density 1 0 Add Delete Figure 19 6 Edit Ink Sets dialog When you have done adding amending inks click OK to save your settings and return to the Ink Set Manager window then click OK to save your changes in the Ink Set Manager If you click Cancel your changes will not be saved MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 261 19 TrapPro 262 19 3 4 TrapPro Viewer If you choose View from the module pop up menu the TrapPro Viewer window opens showing a list of TrapPro modules that are on the workspace and a Me
270. nsumed by the mod ules and a message window showing module messages The controls available in the Optimizer Viewer are described in Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 The other features of the Viewer are described next 20 2 3 1 Devices tab Name This column lists the name of the Optimizer module is it appears in the workspace The module name is configured in the Optimizer setup dialog box as described in Device name on page 268 278 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 20 2 Optimizer controls Status This column indicates the current processing status of the module that is whether a module is currently idle or busy processing a job Log This column indicates if the module is set to generate messages as it pro cesses a job When set messages are output to the Log View window and also to the log file mwF Loc see Log file directory on page 15 for details on how to specify the location of this file Pause This column indicates the current stop start status of the Optimizer module To process a job a module must be started and any jobs passed to a stopped module will be held until the module is restarted 20 2 3 2 Jobs tab Job This column lists the jobs that have been processed by the Optimizer module Device This column shows which module processed the job Time In This column shows the time at which the Optimizer module began pro cessing the job Time Out This column show the ti
271. nt dots of one process color over the dots of another to pro duce a secondary color that is a combination of the primary colors If this check box is not selected such a process color component produces a knockout on the separation MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 313 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules 314 Drop white objects If this check box is selected white objects will disappear from separa tions If this check box is not selected the white object knocks out under lying objects even when overprinting is switched on By default this option is not selected This option is only available when the Overprint process colors check box is selected Overprint grays Select this check box to allow the Cyan Magenta and Yellow colorants to be overprinted rather than knocked out when a color is specified as gray and the job requests overprinting Overprint 100 black If this check box is selected MWF overprints 100 black rather then generating knockouts in the other separations When selected over printing occurs regardless of whether overprinting is switched on for that graphics object or not How the overprinting of the other separa tions is done depends on the Image only black option Image only black This check box controls whether solid black objects appear in the process color separations CMY when the Overprint 100 black option is selected If this check box is selected MWF will ignore the other process color
272. ntGarde Book Aavasaksa Book Substitution Z vantGarde BookOblique Aavasaksa BookOblique e AvantGarde Demi Aavasaksa Demi e AvantG arde DemiOblique Aavasaksa Demi0blique e Bookman Demi Puumala Demi e Bookman Demiltalic Puumala Demiltalic 66 lt Bookman Light Puumala Light ed an fa fonts x Cancel Figure 11 7 Fonts dialog You can use the Fonts dialog to create an available fonts list which should match the list of fonts available in the Harlequin RIP module Each kind of font in the Fonts dialog is distinguished by an icon in the margin Use the menu in the lower left corner of the dialog to select the type of fonts to be viewed The A11 fonts option displays all the available fonts 136 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 11 2 PreCheck controls Add New Click the Add New button to display the Add Fonts dialog box allowing you to select the folder where the PreCheck module can find the fonts you wish to add Add Fonts x List of fonts Folder C MWF_Data Config Drive ech Jaco z E MwF_Data Figure 11 8 Add Fonts dialog box You can select as many fonts as you like l Shift To select a block of several fonts select the first font in the block and then hold down the Shift key and select the last font in the block em To select several unconnected fonts hold down the Control key while making your selection To select all the fonts displayed in the list click the Select All button
273. ntially increasing number e A suffix For example the file name 01jobname ps00 GIF is composed of the page number of the job 01 the job name as a variable stem jobname ps a number to make the file unique 00 and the suffix GIF The options that you choose in the file naming section determine which char acter strings to include in the file name Use This menu contains the file naming options Job Name Prefix and Template Choose Job Name to use the job name as a variable stem in the file name of all output files This is the default setting If you choose Prefix a text box opens in which you can enter text to be used as the fixed stem of the file name If you choose Template a text box opens in which you can enter tags and fixed text to specify a template to use when generating file names If you choose this option all other file naming options are disabled MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 24 2 GIF controls The default file name template is lt NAME gt GIF which produces a file name of the form jobname ps c1F The following standard tags are avail able for use in a file name template e lt NAME gt the job name e g jobname ps e lt CcOLOR gt the color name e g Gray Cyan Magenta etc e lt PAGE gt the page number e g 1 2 etc e lt TITLE gt the name of the PostScript language file without the ps extension e g jobname If you use the naming convention feature in the SmartScan module t
274. o create other tags with different field names for example name1 you can also use these tags To use tags created by the naming convention fea ture you must precede them with pg_ for example lt pg_name1 gt The prefix pg_and the field names are not case sensitive and can be in any order See Name Convention on page 37 for further details If an Imposition module is part of your workflow the following stan dard tags are also available for use in a file name template e lt TIME gt the time at which the file was processed e g 153936 approxi mately 3 39 pm e lt DATE gt the date on which the file was processed e g 20000412 for a file processed on the 4th of April 2000 e lt PLATE gt the plate number e g 01 e lt PROJECT gt the project name as specified in the Imposition module e g Project_0 These tags do not require a prefix and are not case sensitive Strip Page No Select this check box to strips all page numbers from files being processed Suffix Enter the suffix to use for output files in this text box The default value is GIF By convention many applications expect the suffix of a GIF file to be gif or GIF MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 353 24 GIF Use 8 3 file names Select this check box to name output files using the DOS naming convention Maximum allowed characters are eight with a three character extension Must be unique Select this check box to ensure that all outpu
275. o of the image changes unless the values in the horizontal and vertical scaling boxes are the same Page adjustment Select this check box to resize the page proportionally to fit the Max width and Max height values as described in Media and page size options on page 308 By default this option is not selected 22 2 Color management options The options to control color management in the output module are accessible in the Colors tab as shown in Figure 22 2 Page Colors Screens Calibration Color profile Device I Generate Separations Recombine preseparated jobs Preserve monochrome and preseparated jobs M Input Document Controls 7 I Override color managment in job Simulate paper color of job Preserve 100 process black I Override overprint mode in job Add I Overprint process colors Del T Drop white objects I Overprint grays I All Spot Colors Omit Blank I Overprint 100 black I Use Level 1 spot colors J Image only black Output Controls for RGB Black generation type gnore x P Override black generation in job J Convert RGB black to true black MaxInk 1300 Max Black 100 Input Separations Detection Angles in Job Cyan 15 00 Magenta 75 00 Yellow fo o0 Black 45 00 rT Print Separation Names x fo inch M fo inch Figure 22 2 Colors tab MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 311 22 Common Controls
276. o a composite image then shows the resulting image in Preview window as shown in Figure 5 11 Similar in operation to the Compose files tool but you need only select one of the job separations to view the composed job Custom preview generation Search E Creates a preview image of a selected separation at a particular resolution The resolution currently chosen is displayed above the icon To choose another resolution click the arrow and choose a resolution from the menu To add an alternative resolution to the menu choose Custom DPI and enter a resolution in the Enter DPI for Preview text box Locates jobs in the Queuer according to some specified search cri teria The Search dialog box shown in Figure 5 10 allows you to search on any aspect of job detail job id page number job size format type and so on Any jobs found matching the search crite ria are highlighted in the Viewer S jae jobs Passed jobs Find Next Job ID Cancel Doc ID Name consist tt Page Color consist fi Date Type FY Size j Kb Dest consist sis Figure 5 10 Queuer Search dialog box MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 59 5 Queuer Show negative preview Ctrl N Previews images as negatives When this option is selected the icon image is shown as a negative 5 2 2 2 Preview window The preview window can be used to view raster images and PostScript lan guage files with embedd
277. o print the currently selected file S lt Select this icon to remove a file from the Media saver module 252 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 19 TrapPro D This module allows you to add TrapPro the advanced object based in RIP trapping solution from Global Graphics to your digital prepress workflow MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 253 19 TrapPro 254 19 1 The need for trapping In four color process printing the separations must be printed with perfect alignment if the inks are to register correctly as shown in Figure 19 1 a Because of the way the paper twists and stretches in the press perfect alignment is very difficult to achieve so there is always the possibility that the separations will misregister to leave unsightly gaps or light leaks in the finished print as shown in Figure 19 1 b light leak a A registered image b A misregistered image Figure 19 1 The same image printed registered and misregistered To counteract the effects of misregistration allowances are made in the job itself to compensate for possible misregistration This process is known as trapping The trap ping engine used by TrapPro examines the objects on the page and calculates where light leaks are likely to occur It then spreads expands or chokes contracts the ink boundaries at these places to compensate for any misregistration that may occur when the job is printed Once the TrapPro module has been implemented in your digital
278. oad Save As Password poo Ink set DefautCMYKInkSet Ed M Trap width Color Details Trap width po E Belative color step limit 10 0 Trap height po sl Sliding traps color limit 30 0 Feather steps fi Trap color density reduction foo Black trap width 101 f M Images Small object protection factor pse g Object to image trap placement Automatic Unit points Z PM Highlight traps color Red x Cancel Figure 19 4 TrapPro options dialog The following options are available Module name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules Trapping method Use the drop down menu to choose the method of trapping in your print processing The options are None Disables trapping including traps in the job that have been defined with settrap in QuarkXPress However any traps defined in the job using PostScript LanguageLevel 3 will be included 256 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 19 3 TrapPro controls TrapPro Enables TrapPro as the trapping solution Settrap Quark When selected trapping is handled by trapping param eters embedded in the job by QuarkXPress and its set trap PostScript language extension Password Type in your trapping password to enable TrapPro Load Click Load to load a TrapPro configuration Select a saved trp
279. obs tab is selected For more information on the controls displayed in the Viewer see Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 80 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 8 Enabler MWF s Enabler module offers a way for third party developers to integrate their own proprietary sub systems into the MWF system 8 1 Enabler module workflow Enabler accepts EPS PDF and PostScript language files Jobs entering the module are transferred to an output folder From here an external application that is an application that is not part of MaxWorkFlow can accept the job and process it further Afterwards the job is returned to MaxWorkFlow via the MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 81 8 Enabler input folder where processing continues with the other modules How a third party external application is integrated into MaxWorkFlow is illustrated in Figure 8 1 Modules a Enabler an o gt gt Job input Module Job Output W ff Input ob output folder i t folder External application Figure 8 1 Integrating an external application into MaxWorkFlow 8 2 Enabler controls Right click the Enabler module to display the pop up menu showing all the configuration and viewing options Setup F5 Application Setup Ctri F2 i F4 Clear Error Launch module Change Computer F6 Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 8 2 Enabler module pop up 82 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 8 2 Enabler controls The follow
280. ocument MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 301 21 PDF Creator 302 Font to substitute From the menu choose the font that you want to substitute with swap in The fonts in the menu are compiled from the master fonts list 21 5 PDF Creator Viewer The Viewer window shown in Figure 21 13 lists all the jobs that have been processed by the PDF Creator module as well as a list of messages generated by the module To access the Viewer double click the PDF Creator module or right click it and choose View from the pop up menu JAWS PDF Creator PrintReady gt Module View Help Menus je Microsoft Word Reports Spring doc il a FA mm Toolbar Jobs Job Device Time In Time Out fe Microsoft Word Reports Springa doc J PDF Creator PrintReady 16 01202 1 16 01 02 12 08 16 il Microsoft Word Reports Spring doc JAWS PDF Creator PrintReady 167 01 02 1 16 01 02 12 04 35 LC Microsoft Word Marketing Campaign JAWS PDF Creator PrintReady 16 01 021 16 01 02 12 01 21 gt Eticrosoft Word Widget Sales doc JAWS PDF Creator PrintReady 167012021 16 01 02 11 34 49 Job list C Microsoft Word Reports Spring doc JAWS PDF Creator PrintReady 16 01 021 16 01 02 11 28 32 Start processing job Microsoft Word Reports Spring doc at 12 01 43 End processing job Microsoft Word Reports Spring doc at 12 04 35 Start processing job Microsoft Word Reports Spring doc at 12 04 38
281. of the true page number So if the pages do not show up in the Available Files window in the exact order they need to be make sure this option is unchecked or you will find yourself having to rearrange the entire Run List page by page MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 215 17 Preps When files are marked select the Add files to list button to add the files to the File List E Available files ioj x Files 220f53 Device rite x KA v xr File Name Title Page Sizes Creator Color Received a 17 runlen_5312_final ps tunlen_53r2_final ps 1 8 50 11 00 MWF Optimizer 7 24 01 10 53 18 AM 18 runlen_53r2_final ps tunlen_5312_final ps 1 8 50 11 00 MWF Optimizer 7 24 01 10 56 06 AM 19 runlen_53r2_final ps tunlen_53r2_final ps 2 8 50x11 00 MWF Optimizer 7 24 01 10 56 06 AM 20 runlen_53r2_final ps tunlen_53r2_final ps 3 8 50 11 00 MWF Optimizer 7 24 01 10 56 08 AM 21 runlen_53r2_final ps tunlen_53r2_final ps 4 8 50 11 00 MWF Optimizer 7 24 01 10 56 10 4M 22 runlen_53r2_final ps tunlen_5312_final ps 5 8 50 11 00 MWF Optimizer 7 24 01 10 56 10 AM 6 8 50x11 00 MWF Optimizer 7 24 01 10 56 12 AM tunlen_53r2_final ps len_5312_final ps 24 runlen_53r2_final ps len_53r2_final ps 8 50 11 00 MWF Optimizer 7 24 01 10 56 14 AM tunlen_53r2_final ps len_5312_final ps 8 50x11 00 MWF Optimizer 7 24 01 10 56 14 AM tunlen_53r2_final ps len_5312_final ps 8 50 11 00 MWF Optimizer 7 24 01 10 56 16 AM tunlen_53r2_final ps len_5312_final ps 8 50x
282. om the storage folder If you choose this option ensure that your disk space does not become overloaded before deleting files manually Delete oldest file if free disk space lt nnn MB Retain files until the stored files reach a disk space limit at which point the oldest files are deleted until the free disk space is greater than the limit MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 5 2 Queuer controls Generate preview for raster files When selected a preview image is generated for TIFF and EPS image files entering the Queuer The image preview may be inspected in the Queuer Viewer and appropriate action taken by the operator after viewing To facilitate this turn on Hold devices for the output module and the job will be held in the Queuer until it is released deleted or reprocessed by the operator The resolution dpi of the preview image is set in the System tab of Manager options refer to page 15 for more information on setting this option Freeze when imagesetter is imaging Select this check box to ensure that priority is given to an Imagesetter module during data transfer to prevent data under run It is not neces sary to select this option if your imagesetter can automatically start and stop in the case of data under run It should be noted that when this option is selected the Queuer does not accept jobs nor can it release jobs while the imagesetter is being written to Be mindful that this could seriously stall the workflow on
283. omputer F6 Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 10 2 OPI pop up menu 120 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 10 2 OPI controls The following controls are available for the OPI module e Setup choose this option to enter configuration options for the module See OPI Setup on page 121 for a description of all the options available e View choose this option to open a module view window see OPI Viewer on page 127 for more information See Module shortcut menus on page 18 for details on the other general options in the pop up 10 2 1 OPI Setup To configure the OPI module choose Setup from the module pop up menu or select the OPI module and press F5 The OPI Setup dialog box appears as shown in Figure 10 3 The configuration options are described in the following subsections 10 2 1 1 General tab The options in the General tab allow you to name the module and direct high and low resolution images to their respective output folders 0 x dditional Replication Module name OPI High Resolution Directory CAMWF_D ata OPI HiRes f amp Low Resolution Directory EAMWF_D ata OPI LoRes f amp Low Resolution Directory structure OREERT fe a Just one directory I Auto delete after 4 hours Alphabetical sub directories Custom sub directories Structure Postscript comment I Printable EPS I Strip out preview from EPS Figure 10 3 General tab MaxWo
284. on the second side Again you end up with two complete pages front and back on each press sheet MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 15 2 Imposition controls Plate marks The Plate marks option lets you select various predefined plate marks The following options are available Cross marks Places a mark between individual pages in the layout Block cross marks Places a mark between step and repeat layouts of block signatures Trim box Places a trim box around all pages with programmable offsets Bleed box Places a bleed box around all pages with programmable offsets A bleed area is a printed area that when cropped runs off the edge of the paper Color bar When a job includes halftones the press sheet must have density bars outside of the page area Grayscale density bars should be included on both monochrome and process color work Color bars must be included on a process color press sheet The press operator uses these marks to check the job as it prints By measuring the gray balance shown in the gray scale density bars and the color combinations the operator can adjust the press as necessary to maintain the best quality for that press Plate text Job information can be placed on the non printable area of the plate by abstracting content from the PostScript language file Example date time plate color This places the contents on the plate without brackets It should be noted that color will label each pl
285. ons are TOUCH CENTER ENCLOSED Buffer size This option allows you to set aside a certain amount of memory for the Preps module so that it can work faster 240 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 17 4 Preps setup Tiling and Fitting The Tiling and Fitting options configure how the Preps module fits its output onto the media on which a Preps sheet is being imaged On selection the fol lowing dialog will appear Profile x M Fitting options A r Tiling options I Tile if necessary IV Reduce image to fit Vertical ting T Enlarge image to fit IV Auto rotate to best fit tal tiling K minor y I Allow spit page Border inch i inch M Auto place tile marks gt Tiling dimensions IV Center image on media Press inch Bunch tomeage marai 144 inch Miniman tie oyenap E inch narani 72 i Figure 17 13 The Tiling and Fitting dialog The following options are provided in this dialog Fitting options Tile if necessary If the press sheet is larger than the sheet of media click this option This will activate tiling The options below define how the tiling is produced Reduce image to fit If the press sheet is larger than the media click this option to reduce the press sheet to fit it onto a single sheet of media MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 241 17 Preps 242 Enlarge image to fit If the press sheet is smaller than the media click this option to incre
286. ons of speed and image quality which may depend on the printer s capabilities It is recommended that you use the Enhanced Microweave option because the calibration and color profiles were created using this quality setting otherwise choose according to the following criteria Choose Enhanced Microweave when you need optimum quality and are prepared to wait longer for the printed image Choose standard Microweave if you wish to compromise between speed and quality of output Choose Faster Microweave if you want fast output and color quality is not a high priority For example you should use this mode when pro ducing positioning proofs Compression The options that appear in this menu are methods of coding the data sent to the printer None sends the data uncompressed so the data size is always a predict able value though sometime larger than it need be Run Length performs a lossless compression that enables the exact data to be recreated For many images using Run Length will reduce the size of the data and the time taken to transmit it For some very complex pages containing large areas of fine detail it may take longer to send a page coded with Run Length than to send the same page coded with None MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 407 30 Epson Printer 408 30 2 2 Epson Printer Viewer If you choose View from the Epson Printer module pop up menu the Epson Printer Viewer window opens Epson Printer System View
287. ons tab is not selected see Early print on page 186 for informa tion The job is held until you tell it to impose 190 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual a se Fe 15 2 Imposition controls Select this icon to abort the current imposition Select this option to view the current script Highlight the page to be changed and click this option to change the page number of the page Select this option to remove the currently selected page from the imposi tion Select this option to refresh the Status window This is often required when new pages are processed MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 191 15 Imposition 192 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 16 Pairs module M The Pairs module imposes raster files into two up signature plates ready for output Once you have created a layout it can be saved to disk and re called for later use To configure the Pairs module select the module from the toolbar and drag and drop it onto the workspace MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 193 16 Pairs module 16 1 Pairs module workflow The Pairs module consumes and outputs raster data Therefore this module would often be situated after the Harlequin RIP module and direct its output to a selected device Scan 6 Harlequin RIP 4 Pairs 1 Ultre SCSI Imagesetter 1 t O It Scan 5 Pairs 3 Tiff 5 Figure 16 1 Pairs workflows In addition to this the Pairs module can act as a standalone spooler consum ing prev
288. ons to prevent over inking on the output device The collection of calibration data for all color separations is known as a cali bration profile because it characterizes the output device The options in this tab are described in Section 22 4 1 on page 328 and Section 22 4 2 on page 330 provides some general guidelines and a step by step guide on how to calibrate your device 22 4 1 General controls The main calibration graph in the Calibration tab shows calibration curves for each color separation These curves represent the color transfer that takes place between tint values requested in a job and the actual tint values pro duced by the output device By default the calibration curves are a straight line linear curve which means that no color adjustments are made by MWF You can change the calibration curves as follows e By specifically entering values into the Value Transfer boxes for each calibration point If you need to define the calibration profile in finer detail you can add more Value Transfer boxes by clicking the Add point button e By using your mouse to add new points onto the graph or by dragging the graph line into place Each new point will be added to the list of Value Transfer boxes from where they can be adjusted manually as described above When measuring the patches on a calibration strip from 100 0 the value for each patch must be higher than the next patch If this is the case the values produce a
289. ontrols 33 2 3 ECRM SCSI Imagesetter Viewer If you choose View from the ECRM SCSI Imagesetter module pop up menu the ECRM SCSI Imagesetter Devices Viewer opens ECRM SCSI Imagesetter Devices System View Help oe Name Status L Paused ECRM SCSI Imagesetter 3 ECRM SCSI Imagesetter 1 Ide Not ready Select imagesetter Figure 33 6 ECRM SCSI Imagesetter Devices Viewer This dialog box allows you to view the status of all the ECRM SCSI Imagesetter modules that are in the workspace This dialog consists of a table listing the status of each ECRM SCSI Imagesetter module as well as a log monitor window in which you can view progress and error messages All messages in the log monitor window are prefixed by the name of the module to which they refer Name This column lists the name of the ECRM SCSI Imagesetter module that appears in the workspace The name of the ECRM SCSI Imagesetter module is specified in the Device tab as described in Output options on page 427 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 33 2 ECRM SCSI Imagesetter controls Status This column indicates the status of the module Log This column indicates whether or not the module is set to record all mes sages in a log file yes no See Log file directory on page 15 for details on how to specify the location and other properties of the log file Paused This column indicates whether or not the module has been paused yes
290. oofing printer Notice that the number of Thumbnail layouts corresponds to the number of pages displayed in the File List Note An alternative and perhaps more efficient way of checking PostScript language files especially when submitting multi page files that need splitting into single pages is to place an Optimizer module before the Preps module The Optimizer must have the One output file per page option checked For more information see Chapter 20 Optimizer If individual PostScript language files are processed by the Optimizer you are assured that the pages will impose 17 4 1 3 Impose the job You impose a job by selecting a template and then flowing job pages into that template A number of commonly used layouts for different binding styles are provided with the Preps module If a template which suits your needs is already provided you are able to select and use that template To create a custom template you must use the full version of Preps Refer to Chapter 19 of the ScenicSoft Preps PRO PLUS User Guide for more information An automatic selection feature is provided In this mode Preps will select the largest full signature in the template that can accommodate the number of pages in the job The job pages are flowed through that signature as many times as required Then Preps flows the remaining pages through any partial signature configured within the template If no partial signature exists within the template
291. ool only becomes active when a large enough file is being processed otherwise the tool remains disabled MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 21 5 3 Devices tab 21 5 PDF Creator Viewer Click the Devices tab to see a list of all PDF Creator modules on the work space The headings in the devices list are as follows Name Status Log Paused 21 5 4 Jobs tab The name of the PDF Creator module Configured in the PDF Creator Setup dialog box see page Module name on page 285 The current active status of the modules this may be Idle or Busy Indicates if the message log feature has been enabled Messages are appended to the file wF Loc whose location is determined by the settings in the Manager options dialog box see Manager options on page 14 Indicates the current stop start situation of modules A module must be started before it can receive and pro cess jobs Select a module from the Device tab and then click the Jobs tab to see a list of jobs that have passed through that module The headings in the Jobs tab are as follows Job Device Time In Time Out Lists jobs that have been processed by a module Name of the PDF Creator module that processed the job Exact time the PDF Creator module started processing the job Exact time the PDF Creator module stopped processing the job MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 305 21 PDF Creator 21 5 5 Message log The View log area of the View windo
292. op This tool starts stops the Queuer module In MWF a module must be started before it can process jobs The button displays the current go stop status of the Queuer module clicking the tool STOP switches the module to the alternative state and the button icon changes accordingly Reprocess selected jobs 5 Reprocesses jobs that have already passed through the Queuer but S which have been retained for future processing in the passed jobs list The job is directed to the device as specified when the job was originally submitted If you want to redirect the job to a different device then you should use Redirect selected jobs as described next Redirect selected jobs Redirects jobs that have been retained by the Queuer for future processing listed in the passed jobs area of the Viewer to a differ ent output device From the Select destination devices dialog box shown in Figure 5 9 select the new output device and click OK The jobs are then moved into the processing jobs queue where they are subsequently released to the destination device Select destination devices 0j OK M O Tiff 13 Figure 5 9 Select a destination device MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 57 5 Queuer 58 Abort jobs J Aborts jobs and removes them from the list of jobs waiting to be processed The jobs are also deleted from the hard drive so they must be resubmitted if they are required again Delete X Removes jobs from the passe
293. or Gif 1 x Page Colors Calibration Color profile Device Device Name Gif1 Output Folder EAMWF_Data Output Gif 4 Backup Folder M File Naming Use ENEI IV Strip Page No Suffix GIF I Use 8 3 file names IV Must be unique Normal Color M Row Order Color Mode C Grayscale Interlaced Figure 24 3 Device tab for the GIF module The options in the Device tab fall into categories output options file naming options and file format options as described in the following subsections 24 2 1 1 Output options Device name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 351 24 GIF 352 Output Folder This is the location of the output folder to which GIF files will be sent You may either click within the text box and type in the path of your choice or click Fe alongside the text box Backup Folder This is the location of a folder to which backup copies of GIF files will be sent Select a backup folder in the same manner as described for select ing an output folder 24 2 1 2 File naming options In general the GIF module generates a name for each output file by combin ing characters from some of the following character strings e The page number of the job e Astem fixed or variable e A seque
294. ormat PDF files to multiple Harlequin RIP modules running on the network You can determine how files are distributed between the Harlequin RIP modules by choosing to use either load balancing polling or file masking The Load Balancer module also allows you to e Monitor multiple Harlequin RIP modules from a central location e Re queue files to different scan folders See Load Balancer Viewer on page 148 for further details on these file and RIP management features See below for further details on how the Load Bal ancer module fits into a typical workflow 12 1 Load Balancer workflow The Load Balancer module accepts PostScript language files Encapsulated PostScript and PDF files from a scan folder These files are then typically dis tributed amongst multiple Harlequin RIP modules by sending the files to the relevant scan folder for each Harlequin RIP module All the Harlequin RIP MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 141 12 Load Balancer modules must output to the same type of module for example the TIFF file format module or the HP Plotter module The figure below illustrates such a workflow t o If Scan folder 1 Harlequin RIP 1 Tiff 1 t t o Ik Scan folder LoadBalancer 1 Scan folder 2 Harlequin RIP 2 Tiff 2 t Ii Scan folder 3 Harlequin RIP 3 Tiff 3 Figure 12 1 Load Balancer workflow 12 2 Load Balancer controls Right click the Load Balancer module to display the pop up menu showing all the config
295. ou should note however that the stand alone Preps program is not started If you wish to create templates for example you must start up the stand alone version of Preps MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 17 2 Preps workflow Another indication that the Preps module and its Automation has started up properly is the presence of a yellow folder icon in the system tray situated in the lower right corner of the desktop Do not confuse the Preps icon with the SmartScan yellow folder that has a red arrow pointing into it 17 2 Preps workflow Preps accepts source files as PostScript language files EPS DCS and TIFF For Preps to process PostScript language source files those files must comply with Adobe s Document Structuring Conventions DSC DSC comments pro vides color font structure and image information Preps accepts EPS and DSC files that are pre separated The module is typically placed in the workflow before the Harlequin RIP module t ee Oo It SmartScan 1 Optimizer 1 Preps 1 Harlequin RIP 1 Tiff 1 Figure 17 1 Preps module workflow It is useful to place the Optimizer module before the Preps module to ensure that the PostScript language data is correct before processing The Optimizer also provides the option of splitting multi page documents into single pages Currently the Preps module does not accept or process multi page documents Therefore it is useful to place either an Optimizer or Page Splitter module before
296. p folders respectively 9 4 5 Proofing Fonts The Harlequin RIP allows you to produce a proof of any installed font automatically MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 107 9 Harlequin RIP Note The RIP cannot proof CID fonts If you request such a proof the RIP uses a substitute font which is Courier unless your supplier has configured a different substitute Palatino ltalic abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR 1234567890 UA amp _ Figure 9 7 An example of font proofing Proof Fonts You can proof fonts to any of the available output devices by selecting the fonts and then clicking Proof Fonts in the Fonts dialog box At this point a list of the available output devices appears in a pop up menu from which you should select the required device The RIP produces the proof by fitting as many fonts as possible on a page Figure 9 7 shows an example of a short format proof for one font You can select as many fonts as you like Shift To select a block of several fonts select the first font in the block and then hold down the Shift key and select the last font in the block en To select several unconnected fonts hold down the Control key while making your selection The RIP constructs a PostScript language job and then runs it If other jobs are pending the proof takes its place in the queue By default proofs only show a sample of the full character set in a font If you want a proof of the compl
297. pan lOw USER MANUAL Version 3 7 GLOBAL GRAPHICS GLOBAL GRAPHICS eure Copyright and Trademarks MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual Version 3 7 February 2003 Part number MWF 3 7 Copyright 1992 2003 Global Graphics Software Limited All Rights Reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmit ted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of Global Graphics Software Limited The information in this publication is provided for information only and is subject to change without notice Global Graphics Software Limited and its affiliates assume no responsibility or liability for any loss or dam age that may arise from the use of any information in this publication The software described in this book is furnished under license and may only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of that license ScriptWorks is a registered trademark and Harlequin the Global Graphics Software logo EasyTrap FireWorks FlatOut Harlequin Color Management System HCMS Harlequin Color Production Solutions HCPS Harlequin Color Proofing HCP Harlequin Full Color System HFCS Harlequin ICC Profile Processor HIPP Harlequin Standard Color System HSCS Harlequin Chain Screening HCS Harlequin Dispersed Screening HDS Harlequin Micro Screening HMS Harlequin Precision Screening HPS Harlequin Screening Library H
298. paration The separa tion disappears from the list You cannot delete process color separations All Spot Colors 312 Select this check box to produce separations for all spot colors found in a job MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 22 2 Color management options Omit Blank Select this check box to ensure that blank separations are not output This prevents you from wasting media Use level 1 spot colors Spot color support is not a standard part of the PostScript Lan guageLevel 1 specification It is a widely used convention that was defined later If you wish to produce spot colors using PostScript Lan guageLevel 1 select this box This check box has an effect only when producing spot colors 22 2 2 Input document controls Override color management in job Select this check box to override the color management in the job and use the options set in the Color profile tab If you do not check this box MWF uses a color space array embedded ICC profile or a color space resource if found in the job to transform the image and treats the image as a color independent color image Preserve 100 process black Select this check box if you do not want the black only part of your input to be converted to a CMYK equivalent color This option is particularly relevant for black text because it avoids colored fringes Overprint process colors If this check box is selected and overprinting is switched on for an object MWF will pri
299. prepress workflow trapping is handled automatically each time a job is processed Saving you time and wasted output due to press misregistration MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 19 2 The TrapPro workflow 19 2 The TrapPro workflow To create a workflow that implements in RIP trapping place a TrapPro module immediately after a Harlequin RIP module and link the output to your output device as shown is Figure 19 2 Queuers may be used in the workflow to facilitate workflow management Soe SmartScan 1 Queuer 1 Harlequin RIP 1 TrapPro 1 Queuer 2 Max Imagesetter 1 Figure 19 2 Example TrapPro workflow 19 3 TrapPro controls Right click the TrapPro module to display a pop up menu of the configuration and viewing options Lau module Change Computer F6 Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 19 3 TrapPro module pop up menu The pop up menu contains the following options for TrapPro e Setup see TrapPro setup below e View see TrapPro Viewer on page 262 See Module shortcut menus on page 18 for details on the other general options in the pop up MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 255 19 TrapPro 19 3 1 TrapPro setup TrapPro module options are specified in the Setup TrapPro dialog box which is shown in Figure 19 4 To access this dialog right click the module and choose Setup from the menu or use the shortcut key F5 Setup TrapWorks Module name frapwoks Trapping method Tao S y L
300. quin Dispersed Screening HDS are that it produces no moir effect it has better definition than conventional screen ing and registration is less critical HDS also has a visually pleasing screen structure and is generally more print able than other FM frequency modulated screens also known as stochastic screening Finally it should be noted that HDS is intended for use with a wide range of printing processes Type HDS Once you have entered a valid password to enable the use of HDS screening you can choose a particular type of HDS screening The finer HDS screens are best used with high quality imagesetters capable of holding single laser spots The coarser HDS screens are best selected on presses which cannot hold very fine detail such as high speed web MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 22 3 Halftone screening options offset presses The physical size of the HDS dot created with each of these options varies both with the imagesetter laser spot size and with the resolution at which it is driven HDS Super Coarse is designed to be suitable for use in newsprint applications on imagesetters at mid range resolutions that is 1000 through 1600 dots per inch dpi HDS Super Fine is designed for output devices where final copy is produced directly for example laser or inkjet printers However since output proofing devices vary widely in their methods of ink laydown it is suggested that testing be done on a couple of different
301. quirements of a font in DLD1 format and for the corresponding font in Type 1 and Type 4 formats Font type Disk space KB Memory KB DLD1 45 4 Type 1 100 50 Type 4 50 30 Table 9 1 Disk and memory requirements for font types Note It is difficult to give corresponding estimates for Type 3 fonts because they are inherently so flexible but they are not particularly efficient 9 4 4 Installing fonts If a job requires a particular font the font must already be installed in the Harlequin RIP before the job is processed unless the job itself contains the font definition If the font is not found the RIP instead prints the text in Cou rier or issues an error message depending on the setting for Abort the job if any fonts are missing in the Page Setup Options dialog box Depending on the font type you can install a font into the RIP by using the Install Fonts command or by downloading the font to the RIP In addition Mac users can download Mac fonts into the Harlequin RIP by using Harle quin s Fireworks font downloading utility To use this option you will need to select Publish AppleTalk Channel from the General tab which publishes a vir tual printer on the AppleTalk network and make the printer available to the Mac MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 103 9 Harlequin RIP 104 Table 9 2 summarizes how to install the various font types An entry in the Other column indicates that the RIP supports the use of the fonts
302. r automatic composition 1 Click the Hand icon to change the Preps module to Automatic mode 2 Either right click on the File List window and click Add pages from the pop up menu or click the Add pages icon The following dialog appears Add group of pages to page list x Page Count Group name X Save page as template Page Position Adjustment Odd page Horizontal 0 inch Vertical fo inch Even page Horizontal 0 inch Vertical fo inch T Ignore bounding box information Cancel Figure 17 9 The Add group of pages to page list dialog 3 The number entered into the Page count field determines how many pages the module will look for before it does a single imposition For example if you enter a small number like 16 pages for one signature s 228 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 17 4 Preps setup worth for perfect bound projects and feed hundreds of pages to the module the Preps module will automatically do an imposition for every 16 pages that come in Likewise you can enter in a large number of pages necessary for Saddle stitch projects The module will wait until all the pages appear before it starts its first imposition Consequently you must know how the final project will be processed at this stage The Page position adjustment options are exactly the same for the manual mode of operation See Adjusting page positions on page 222 The Save Page as Template option allows you to
303. r that you choose is displayed in this text box Select imagesetter Click this button to open the Select Imagesetter dialog box which con tains the following controls Interface Card Number Enter the slot number of the interface card to which your imagesetter is connected Imagesetter Choose the imagesetter to which you wish to send output from this menu If the number of the interface card is incorrect a message to this effect will appear in the window of this dialog Debug messages Enabled Select this check box to enable the production of debug messages when sending output to an imagesetter This may help you to diagnose a problem The messages appear in the View window for the module and are added to the general log file if the module is set to add messages to the log file Level 0 10 Enter the level of detail that you wish MWF to use when generating the debug messages Higher numbers provide more detail Margins Top Bottom Left Right You can specify page margins by entering values in these text boxes Choose the units of measurement from the menu alongside these text boxes 420 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 32 2 Max Imagesetter controls Black margins Select this check box to use black colored margins when printing to indicate the non printable area Buffer Size Enter a value specifying the buffer size in KB to use when processing files The default value is 512 KB Autologic Ill 3850 Select this c
304. ration Choose the paper that you wish to use to create a proof from this menu A pre installed calibration profile and color profile for your chosen device and paper type will be used to ensure the creation of an automat ically color managed proof 30 2 1 2 Password options Passwords for To enable output to your chosen printer you must enter a password for the device as well as passwords to enable the use of color management in the Harlequin RIP Choose the computer on which the Harlequin RIP is running from this menu and enter valid passwords in the Device HDS and ICC text boxes Device HDS You must enter a valid password in this text box to enable the use of your chosen device If necessary speak to your vendor to obtain a password You must enter a valid password in this text box to enable the use of HDS screening If necessary speak to your vendor to obtain a password You can choose the particular type of HDS screening that you wish to use in the Colors tab as described in Harlequin Dispersed Screening options on page 319 However you should not change the default screening which is HDS Super Fine because the calibration and color profiles were made using this type of screening MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 405 30 Epson Printer 406 ICC You must enter a valid password in this text box to enable the use of color profiles Color profiles are supplied with the module to ensure the production of color manag
305. reCheck module offer to do the substitution for you on the fly is the solution because all occurrences are guaranteed to be substituted 138 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 11 2 PreCheck controls 11 2 3 PreCheck Viewer If you choose View from the PreCheck module pop up menu the PreCheck Viewer window opens i CDBooklet c ps Start preflighting file CDBooklet c ps at 3 09 26 PM Page 1 Finish preflighting file CDBooklet c ps at 3 11 03 PM Figure 11 9 PreCheck Viewer This dialog box consists of two tabs described below which allow you to view the progress of jobs 11 2 3 1 Main tab The Main tab contains a table listing files that have been processed by the PreCheck module The time at which files were processed is listed A log monitor window is also displayed in this tab allowing you to view progress and error messages MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 139 11 PreCheck 11 2 3 2 Log tab The Log tab displays more detailed progress and error messages than those displayed in the Log monitor window in the Main tab If a problem occurs when processing a file you should always refer to this tab for further details For further details on the general controls in the dialog see Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 140 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 12 Load Balancer py The Load Balancer module allows you to direct PostScript language Encapsu lated PostScript EPS and Portable Document F
306. rkFlow 3 7 User Manual 4 2 SmartScan controls 4 2 4 SmartScan Viewer The SmartScan Viewer shown in Figure 4 11 lists all SmartScan modules on the workspace and shows the processing activity log file and pause status of each There is also has a message log area where SmartScan messages can be observed System View Module Help EE Name Status L Pause Macintosh Prepress Idle Windows Prepress yes PDF Input Idle yes yes Postscript Input Figure 4 11 SmartScan Viewer To open the Viewer window double click the SmartScan module or right click it and choose View from the pop up menu To close the Viewer click Hide If you wish you can detach the toolbar so that it floats on the desktop Click ing Hide then shows hides the module list but leaves the toolbar visible To completely close the Viewer drag the toolbar back to the Viewer then click Hide From the Viewer you may start stop SmartScan modules by selecting the rele vant module and clicking Start Stop in the toolbar You can also open the mod ule s setup dialog box by choosing System gt Options MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 45 4 SmartScan 46 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual OQueuer The Queuer has two primary functions in the prepress workflow e itis used to hold jobs before they are sent to an output device so they can be inspected redirected deleted or reprocessed e it manages job flow between several alike devices so that ea
307. rkFlow 3 7 User Manual 121 10 OPI 122 Module name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules High resolution directory Enter the directory location for storage of the high resolution images You can either enter the path directly or navigate using the navigation button If the location does not exist the module will create a folder for you Low resolution directory Enter the directory location for storage of the low resolution images You can either enter the path directly or navigate using the navigation but ton If the location does not exist the module will create a folder for you Low resolution directory structure Choose how the directory structure will be organized for low resolution images The following choices are available Just one directory Images are stored within the high resolution directory and low resolu tion directory no subdirectories Alphabetical sub directories A subdirectory will be created based on the first letter of the image file name Custom subdirectories Selecting this option opens the Structure dialog box as shown in Figure 10 4 which you can use to generate folder names for your images based on the job name For example you may want to store all files of type bmp in a folder called Bitmap Images To do this enter bmp in the File mask text
308. rkFlow Manager MaxWorkFlow Manager MWF Manager is the main program window of MWF It provides all the tools that you will need to create your digital pro cessing workflows and allows you to monitor the progress of your print jobs as they progress along the workflow MaxWorkFlow C MWF_Data Config test cfg Optimizer 1 Connected at 20 02 03 11 44 49 PDF Creator 1 Connected at 11 44 55 Queuer 1 Started at 20 02 03 11 45 08 Queuer 2 Started at 20 02 03 11 45 08 Queuer 4 Started at 20 02 03 11 45 08 Figure 2 1 The MaxWorkFlow Manager MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 11 2 MaxWorkFlow Manager 12 Jobs are processed in MWF by dropping modules onto the MWF workspace and linking them together to form a logical processing workflow Each module has a set of options to control how jobs should be processed Refer to the relevant chapter in this manual for a description of each option in a module 2 1 MWF Manager tools MWF Manager contains tools for creating workflows and configuring mod ules Most of the tools remain inactive until you select a module on the work space then you can click a tool and use it to work with the module Each tool is described next R Selector This tool is used to select items on the workspace Until you select a module you cannot work with it Click the tool then click the item that you want to work with or drag a selection box around the items if you want to select more than one thing on the wo
309. rkspace Message Log In MWF a message is generated whenever a module is placed on the workspace is started or stopped processes a job or issues an error To save these messages to a log file so they can be examined later select the module that you want to record and click the Message logging tool The location of the log file is determined by the Log file directory setting in the Manager Options dialog box as described on page 15 A small Eicon appears beneath the module when message logging is enabled in the module You may also access this command from the Modules menu or press Ctrl L on your keyboard Link Use this tool to link modules on the workspace to create workflows The Link tool will not allow you to link modules that would cause an illegal operation in the workflow MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 2 1 MWF Manager tools Change computer This tool allows you to run the selected module on another MWF installation Jobs entering a module that has been configured in this way are transferred to the remote MWF server where they are pro cessed and returned to the originating server See also Section 2 5 on page 19 for more information on networking MWF You may also access this command from the Modules menu or press F6 on your keyboard Delete Use this tool to delete selected items on the workspace Deleting a module does not delete its associated folders these need to be manually removed from the server
310. roviding various configuration options which are described in this section e General tab MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 195 16 Pairs module 196 e Page layout tab e Plate layout tab 16 2 1 1 General tab The options under this tab provide general configuration options for the Pairs module Module name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules Store directory This is the directory where the individual pages are stored until their paired partner is available for two up output Either enter a path to the directory in the text box or click the Select directory button and browse for the required directory Page order You can use the Page order option to decide how you want the page pairs to be recognized The following options are available Incoming order Pages are paired in the order in which they are received Name convention This option recognizes a particular part of a filename coming into the module and uses this to do the pairing Generally this feature is used by the scan folder to extract the page number from the file name and then the Page Pairs module just has the page number to work with when creating the pairs You must use this feature if you choose the binding style First and Last as described in Binding style on page 197 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual
311. rvices necessary for Macintosh connectivity and FTP server Minimum Disk space 500 MB free before installing For fast disk access a 4 GB fast ultra wide SCSI disk is recommended System memory 128 MB 256 MB recommended Network adapter Ethernet 10 MB Ethernet 100 MB recommended Applications Internet Explorer 5 0 or greater Imaging for Windows Server services Internet Information Server service Macintosh services TCP IP printing Clients supported Windows 95 98 ME NT4 2000 XP Mac OS 8 1 9 x or OS X Table 1 1 MWF system requirements 1 Attach the supplied MWF security dongle to your computer 2 Log on to Window as the administrator This will ensure you have suffi cient privileges to install MWF MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 1 2 Installing MaxWorkFlow 3 Insert the MWF installation disk Open it in My Computer and double click Setup exe to start the MaxWorkFlow v 3 7 Setup wizard MAXWorkFlow y 3 7 Setup Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for MAXWorkFlow The InstallS hield Wizard will install MAWorkFlow on your computer To continue click Next Figure 1 1 MaxWorkFlow v3 7 Setup wizard 4 Click Next in the wizard and follow the instructions in the wizard to complete the installation procedure You must provide a valid MWF license file when prompted The license file is provided on the floppy disk supplied with MWF 5 When asked if you want
312. s as described in the following subsections 23 2 1 1 Output options Device name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 339 23 TIFF Output This is the location of the output folder to which TIFF files will be sent You may either click within the text box and type in the path of your choice or click Fe alongside the text box Color Format This menu contains the color formats Monochrome GrayScale Composite RGB and Composite CMYK The color format you choose deter mines the color space and format of the output For example Composite CMYK produces a file in which each page of a job contains the information for all the process colors Cyan Magenta Yellow and Black If you wish to output separations you must choose Monochrome and specify which separations you want to produce in the Colors tab as described in Chapter 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules ECRM Config Click this button to open the ECRM Configuration dialog box which allows you to select a configuration file to use when sending TIFF files to a DesertCat device ECRM Config File l Media Type X Cancel Figure 23 4 ECRM Configuration dialog box ECRM Config File You can click in this text box and type in the path of your ECRM configuration file Alternati
313. s None which prints at the normal speed The other options are Fast Faster and Fastest You should experiment with these options to see which option provides the best compromise between speed and quality of output 28 2 2 HP Plotter Devices Viewer If you choose View from the HP Plotter module pop up menu the HP Plotter Devices Viewer window opens HP Plotter Devices System View Help EG Name Status L Paused HP Plotter HP Platter Office Idle HP Plotter Started 11 50 04 4M HP Plotter Start spooling Everglades c color Cyan at 4 3 01 11 50 22 AM HP Plotter End spooling Everglades c at 4 3 01 11 50 22 AM HP Plotter Start spooling Everglades c color Magenta at 4 3 01 11 50 24 AM Figure 28 4 HP Plotter Devices Viewer This dialog box allows you to view the status of all the HP Plotter modules that are in the workspace This dialog consists of a table listing the status of each HP Plotter module as well as a log monitor window in which you can view progress and error messages All messages in the log monitor window are prefixed by the name of the module to which they refer Name This column lists the name of the HP Plotter module that appears in the workspace The name of the HP Plotter module is specified in the Device tab as described in Printer options on page 389 Status This column indicates the status of the module MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 391 28 HP Plott
314. s of the log file Paused This column indicates whether or not the module has been paused yes no You can click the GO STOP button to start or stop the module There are also some device specific controls that are accessible from the System menu Media Feed If you choose this menu option the media in the imagesetter is advanced as discussed in Media Feed on page 423 Media Cut If you choose this menu option the media in the imagesetter is cut as discussed in Media Cut on page 423 For further details on the general controls in the dialog see Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 424 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 33 ECRM SCSI zi The ECRM SCSI Imagesetter module allows you to send files that have been processed by the Harlequin RIP to an ECRM SCSI imagesetter You can use this module to track the media used by the imagesetter and to specify other output options such as page layout and the punch mechanism controls 33 1 ECRM SCSI Imagesetter workflow The ECRM SCSI Imagesetter module is an output device module that accepts raster image data from the Harlequin RIP The raster image data is then passed to an ECRM SCSI imagesetter The figure below illustrates such a workflow Scan folder Harlequin RIP ECRM SCSI Imagesetter Figure 33 1 ECRM SCSI workflow MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 425 33 ECRM SCSI 33 2 ECRM SCSI Imagesetter controls Right click the ECRM SCSI Imagesetter module
315. s reversed By default this option is not selected Center Page on media width Select this check box to have the output centered across the width of the media By default this option is not selected Rotation Select the appropriate radio button to rotate each page of the job by either 0 default setting 90 180 or 270 degrees The image itself remains unchanged If the job was already set to rotate in the opposite direction the two rotations cancel giving non rotated output Similarly if the job rotates in the same direction the two rotations add 22 1 3 Resolution options Default resolution Depending on the output module you can either select a resolution set ting from a menu where the resolution settings supported by the output device are known or you can specify the Horizontal and Vertical dpi in two text boxes 22 1 4 Scaling options Scaling You may not always want to print your job at its original size The Vertical and Horizontal scaling text boxes allow you to print out any job at a specified scale This changes the page size All scales are expressed as a percentage of the original size Thus to print out a copy of a job at half the linear size specify 50 in both the horizontal and vertical scaling text MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 22 2 Color management options boxes To print it out at twice the size specify 200 You can specify differ ent horizontal and vertical scales if you wish Note that the aspect rati
316. s toward the binding Based on the values entered Preps calculates the distance to move the image area on all pages between the inner and outer pages with refer ence to the number of pages and selected binding style 5 Inthe Press Sheet Scaling section you are able to enter a value that scales the output This is useful when compensating for differences in flexo printing presses Generally the Horizontal and Vertical scaling percent ages would be the same MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 227 17 Preps 6 Bleed margins restrict the area within which bleeds are printed around the trim size of a page Bleeds are defined in the source files Preps will not add bleeds However Preps allows a default of 0 125 in for the bleeds set in the source file This value may be changed Preps will only add bleed if it is already present in the incoming Post Script language file The bleed margin adjustment in Preps is helpful if a large bleed has been set in the page layout application perhaps for mul tiple printing processes that require different bleed setups Preps allows you to control how much of that bleed is used in each page slot 7 When the values have been completed click OK 17 4 2 Automatic composition Automatic mode requires you to enter in all setup information before the module will work You cannot start submitting pages into the module without the File List Run List and Signature List completed Use the following procedure fo
317. se this option to view the selected separation at the resolution set by the Custom preview generation icon in the module toolbar as described on page 59 Save as Saves a copy of the PostScript language job Select all Selects all files in a job list when one of the jobs are selected Search Use the search tool to find specific jobs in the Process jobs list or the Passed jobs list You can search on any aspect of the job including name job id page number date color and size Search again Repeats the last file search Negative preview ON OFF Use this option to view all preview images as negatives MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 6 BarCode i o The BarCode module accepts PostScript language and PDF files and adds a barcode to the file before passing the job onto a RIP With this module you are able to specify the barcode type and configure its size rotation and position 6 1 BarCode workflow The BarCode module is typically placed between a SmartScan module and a Harlequin RIP it accepts and produces PostScript language and PDF files te lW amp 8 If SmartScan 1 BarCode 1 Optimizer 1 Harlequin RIP 1 Tiff 1 Figure 6 1 BarCode workflow MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 67 6 BarCode 68 6 2 BarCode controls Right click the BarCode module to display the pop up menu showing the con figuration and viewing options Setup F5 View F4 Cle i Lau dule Change Computer F6
318. sed from the Queuer Release Releases selected jobs from the process jobs list and passes them to the next module in the workflow The job is then placed in the Passed jobs list from where it can be resubmitted for further processing Change names Allows you to specify a new job name for a selected job in the Queuer The new job name is used by subsequent modules in the workflow Change priority Allows you to change the priority of a job so that its release order from the Queuer module is changed MWF releases jobs according to job pri ority which is automatically determined by the SmartScan module as explained on page page 33 Composed preview selected files Use this option to combine selected separations into a composite image and then preview in the Preview window Use your mouse and Ctrl key to highlight the separations that you want to combine You can also use this option to soft proof individual separations Note This feature only combines plates which are held in the Queuer and have already passed through the Harlequin RIP module MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 65 5 Queuer 66 Composed job preview Use this option to combine all plates in a job into a composite image and then preview in the Preview window You need only select a single sepa ration to view all the separations in a job If you want to view separa tions individually then use the Composed preview selected files option Custom preview generation U
319. selected job to be replicated to other OPI fold ers MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 11 PreCheck The PreCheck module allows you to check the elements of a particular file to ensure that it will be correctly processed by the Harlequin RIP module If an error occurs during the pre flight check a log file is generated and the file is sent to an Invalid jobs folder for correction This module can check the format of images and convert them to CMYK on the fly It also checks required fonts against the available fonts list and detects fonts that are not correctly embedded 11 1 PreCheck workflow The PreCheck module accepts PostScript language files Encapsulated Post Script and PDF files from the SmartScan module If files pass the pre flight check they are passed on to the Harlequin RIP module for further processing If the files fail the pre flight check they are sent to a specified Invalid jobs folder The figure below illustrates such a workflow B o it Scan folder PreCheck Harlequin RIP Tiff Figure 11 1 PreCheck workflow MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 129 11 PreCheck 11 2 PreCheck controls Right click the PreCheck module to display the pop up menu showing all the configuration and viewing options Setup F5 Fonts Ctrl F2 View F4 Lau dule Change Computer F6 Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 11 2 PreCheck module pop up The following controls are available for the PreChec
320. ser Manual 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 PDF Creator 281 PDF Creator example workflows 281 PDF Creator controls 283 PDF Creator options 284 Fonts in PDF Creator 299 PDF Creator Viewer 302 Common Controls for the Output Modules Page set up options 308 Color management options 311 Halftone screening options 317 Calibration options 327 Color profile tab 332 TIFF 337 TIFF workflow 337 TIFF controls 338 GIF 349 GIF workflow 349 GIF controls 350 DCS 357 DCS workflow 357 DCS controls 359 CIP3 365 CIP3 workflow 366 CIP3 controls 366 Windows Printer 381 Windows Printer workflow 381 Windows Printer controls 382 HP Plotter 387 HP Plotter workflow 387 HP Plotter controls 388 307 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 29 30 31 32 33 34 HP Printer 393 HP Printer workflow 393 HP Printer controls 394 Epson Printer 401 Epson Printer workflow 402 Epson Printer controls 403 Oc 411 Oc workflow 411 Oc controls 412 Max Imagesetter 417 Max Imagesetter workflow 417 Max Imagesetter controls 418 ECRMSCSI 425 ECRM SCSI Imagesetter workflow 425 ECRM SCSI Imagesetter controls 426 ULTRE SCSI Imagesetter 435 Ultre SCSI Imagesetter workflow 435 Ultre SCSI Imagesetter controls 436 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 1 Getting Started 1 1 Introducing MaxWorkFlow WELCOME to MaxWorkFlow the visual workflow design tool desi
321. settings to ensure the best proof possible HDS Super Fine may work well on grayscale color halftones and yet not work well on copy containing fine line drawings Password You must enter a valid password in this text box to enable the use of HDS screening Override Angle Select this check box to use the HDS screen angles instead of any angles specified in the job Override Dot Shape Select this check box to use the HDS dot shape instead of the dot shape specified in the job Override Frequency Select this check box to use the halftone frequency required by HDS instead of the frequency specified in the job Advanced Click this button to use Harlequin Precision Screening which allows you to add extra gray levels to your job as described in Section 22 3 3 on page 321 22 3 3 Harlequin Precision Screening options For very high quality output you can use Harlequin Precision Screening HPS This is a proprietary feature which eliminates objectionable moir pat terning when producing color separations HPS can be used with both regular MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 321 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules and HDS screening HPS also allows you to choose how rosettes are formed in the image and to generate extra gray levels allowing the use of higher screen frequencies than the resolution would normally allow Once correctly set up and with sufficient memory available output can be produced with HPS at speeds comparabl
322. soft Windows To do this you type text specifying a command and its options in a way simi lar to typing ina Windows command prompt window The command can be a simple batch file or a complex application provided that you can give the command all necessary options and information on the command line a com mand needing operator interaction is likely to cause problems You can use such post processing commands to extract information for use in reports There are several other possibilities such as emailing somebody confirmation that the file has been processed limited only by your ability to obtain or create a suitable application and to supply information to it The controls in this section of the dialog box are Post Processing Select this check box to enable a post processing command as entered in the Command text box Leave it unselected to disable post processing MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 23 2 TIFF controls Command Enter a string specifying a post processing application which must be available on the computer running MWF Optionally you can supply options understood by the application and data such as the name of the relevant input or output files The command string can contain substitu tion codes MWF expands the codes and runs the command at the end of each output file Table 23 1 below lists the recognized substitution codes The string should normally include the file extension and the full path name of the applic
323. ssage Log window for viewing module information System View Help Pe 4 OS OKS N Status Paused Traporks Started 11 00 03 Traporks Processing file Butterfly c ps TrapVVorks File Butterfly c ps done Figure 19 7 TrapPro Viewer The following information is available for each module Name This column lists the name of the TrapPro module is it appears in the workspace The module name is configured in the Setup TrapPro dialog box as described in Module name on page 256 Status This column indicates the current processing status of the module that is whether a module is currently idle or busy processing a job Log This column indicates if the module is set to generate messages as it pro cesses a job When set messages are output to the Message Log window and also to the log file mwF LoG see Log file directory on page 15 for details on how to specify the location of this file MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 19 3 TrapPro controls Pause This column indicates the current stop start status of the TrapPro mod ule To process a job a module must be started and any jobs passed to a stopped module will be held there until the module is restarted MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 263 19 TrapPro 264 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 20 Optimizer X The Optimizer consumes standard PostScript language EPS TIFF and PDF files and produces PostScript language files and EP
324. ssed file Run length produces a com pressed file The compression technique is lossless so there is no effect on image quality Encoding The options are Binary raw Hexadecimal and ASCII 85 This controls the storage format of the preview images giving various compromises between portability and file size but does not affect the image If you want to transfer the PPF file over networks where conver sion of the line end characters within the file is possible then you should use ASCII 85 or Hexadecimal If this is not the case use the more com pact Binary format MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 26 2 CIP3 controls CIP3AdmJob Name Enter fixed text or a code sequence or both to set a value for the CIP3AdmJobName comment in the PPF files See Coding text entries for Job Name and Sheet Name on page 375 for details of the possible codes and their meanings The default value is the code J which inserts the job name taken from the PostScript language job or a DIG comment if present Note Together with the setting for CIP3AdmSheet Name the settings you make here allow the CIP3 plugin to pass information to the PPF reader software that associates the sheets with a job and to identify sheets in a double sided job as being front or back sides CIP3AdmSheet Name Enter fixed text or a code sequence or both to set a value for the CIP3AdmSheetName comment in a PPF file The default value is the code Sheet S which inserts the stri
325. sts of a table listing the status of each scan folder as well as two log monitor windows in which you can view progress and error mes sages and details of where files have been sent Various file management functions are controlled via the toolbar of icons at the top of this dialog box This is a number allocated to the scan folder by the Load Balancer module that reflects the order in which it appears in the Scan folder table as described in Scan folder table on page 145 Name This is the name you assigned to the scan folder as described on page 146 Path This is the path of the scan folder as described on page 146 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 12 2 Load Balancer controls Message This column of the Scan folder table displays messages relating to the status of the scan folder Some icons in the toolbar of the Load Balancer dialog allow you to manage files and are particular to the Load Balancer module Hold and Release Directory You can use this button to stop and start the processing of files ina scan folder Highlight a scan folder in the Scan folder table and click this button to place all jobs in the scan folder on hold In this instance the page icon in the Name column changes from white to blue Move files from directory a5 You can use this button to transfer files between scan folders 6 Highlight the scan folder from which you wish to transfer files and click this button A dialog opens in whic
326. t Shape Advanced Override Frequency Figure 22 4 Screens tab The options generally comprise of regular screening Harlequin Dispersed Screening and Harlequin Precision Screening Each method is described in the following subsections 22 3 1 Regular screening options If you click Regular in the Screens tab you can set the options for regular screening To use Harlequin Dispersed Screening you must supply a pass word as described in Section 22 3 2 on page 319 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 317 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules 318 Separation This column in the separations list displays the name of the separation You can use the Colors tab to add spot color separations as described on page 312 Angle Enter the screen angles that you wish to use for the listed separations If the job contains embedded screen angle information you must select the Override Angle check box to use your own screen angles The ability to override screen angles is especially useful if the job has requested a set of angles that optimize the output quality for a particular output device such as a laser printer but may diminish the quality on other devices such as an imagesetter Dot shape The dot shape that you choose from this menu can greatly influence the amount of dot gain in an image MWF offers a variety of dot shapes your choice between them might depend on the output device resolu tion and media used and the type of ima
327. t a black generation type from this menu For GCR separations choose one of the GCR levels in Figure 22 3 and set ink limits For UCR separations select UCR and set ink limits Type Description Ignore No color translation resulting in an RGB error None GCR level Generates the color separation using no black plate Light GCR level Slightly decreases the effect of the Medium setting Medium GCR level Produces satisfactory results in most cases Use as the default setting Heavy GCR level Slightly increases the effect of the Medium setting Maximum GCR level Maps the gray value directly to the black generation value This option is useful for images that contain a large amount of solid black against a light background such as screen shots from a computer UCR Select if you wish to use under color removal color translation Figure 22 3 Black generation types Override black generation in job Select this check box to override GCR or UCR settings specified in the job MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 315 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules 316 Convert RGB black to true black Some applications and especially Microsoft Word use RGB colors for everything including solid black coded as 0 0 0 setrgbcolor or 0 0 0 in a DeviceRGB color space You should choose this option to force the RIP to intercept blacks coded in this way and convert them to 0 0 0 1 in a CMYK color space Max Ink
328. t box and type in the path of your choice or click alongside the text box MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 131 11 PreCheck Valid jobs folder This is the location of the folder to which files that have passed the pre flight check will be sent You may either click within the text box and type in the path of your choice or click alongside the text box If you have linked the PreCheck module to a Harlequin RIP module files that pass the pre flight check will automatically be sent to the Harlequin RIP mod ule Remove jobs from the list after hours Select this check box and enter an appropriate value in the accompanying text box to specify the amount of time to wait before removing files from the Valid and Invalid jobs folders If you do not wish to delete files deselect this check box 11 2 1 2 Document tab You can use the Document tab to specify that the file must be either a compos ite or pre separated file You can also specify the minimum number of pages in the file and the minimum and maximum page size Setup for PreCheck x Module Name PreCheck General Document Fonts Images ro I Document must NOT be preseparated I Number of pages must not be LESS than fi I Number of pages must not be MORE than fi I Page must not be smaller fas inche X fn inch Page must not be larger jes inch 11 inch Figure 11 4 Document tab 132 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 11 2 PreCheck controls
329. t files generated by the GIF module have a unique name A unique file name is created by adding a sequentially increasing number to the file name as shown in the exam ple on page 352 Having this box turned on will prevent files from being overwritten if the same file name is resubmitted to the workflow This is especially important with multipage preseparated files where each page separation may have the same title as the previous page This is quite common with Quark files 24 2 1 3 File format options Row Order The option you choose effects the way that the GIF image is repainted when viewed on screen Choose Normal if you wish the image to be repainted from top to bottom Choose Interlaced if you wish the image to be repainted in layers that is one color at a time Color Mode Choose Color if you wish to create a color image GIF file Choose GrayScale if you wish to create a grayscale image GIF file 354 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 24 2 GIF controls 24 2 2 GIF Devices Viewer If you choose View from the GIF module pop up menu the GIF Devices Viewer window opens Gif Devices System View Help 4 OS Name Status L Paused Gif Start colormap construction at 4 2 01 2 59 14 PM Gif Colormap construction completed at 4 2 01 2 59 14 PM Gif Finish writing to C MVVF_Data Output Gif01 BARINGTN PSOO GIF at 4 2 01 Figure 24 4 GIF Devices Viewer This dialog box allows you to view
330. t gt c printer output lt Out gt lt Name gt Windows Printer lt Name gt lt Device gt lt Device gt lt In gt c TIFF input lt In gt lt Out gt c TIFF output lt Out gt lt Name gt TIFF lt Name gt lt Device gt lt MWF_FILE_SETUP gt lt xml gt Setup cmd Enter the path to an application that you want to set up This is usually the same application specified for Run application To launch the applica tion right click Enabler and choose Application setup from the pop up menu The full path is required Change Icon To change the appearance of the Enabler icon click this button and navi gate to location of your ico file Output folder To specify the location of an output folder enter the path directly into the text box or click the folder button and navigate to the folder using your mouse Enabler uses this folder to pass jobs and other data to the external application for processing Be sure that the external application also has access to this folder 84 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 8 2 Enabler controls Input folder Similar to the Output folder option except this time the folder is used to retrieve jobs that have been processed externally Again this folder must be accessible to MaxWorkFlow and your third party application Run application Use this text box to enter the name of an external application to which jobs will be passed for processing Enter the full path to the application with the
331. t specifies how close the printed image in the middle of the magazine needs to be to the stapled edge The Page pairs module gradually creeps moves the pages in between the outside and the middle so that the magazine ends up smooth and uniform each page being moved a fraction of the total distance 204 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 16 2 Pairs module controls 16 2 2 Pairs Module viewer Select the View option from the pop up menu or double click the Pairs module to display the Page Pairs Viewer window Figure 16 6 Page Pairs Viewer For more information on the standard controls displayed in the Viewer see Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 Click this icon to display the Pairs status window This is the same as selecting Status from the View menu MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 205 16 Pairs module 206 16 2 2 1 Pairs status window The Pairs status window displays information about the pages being pro cessed by the module The window shown below is not how it appears when first opened Ot Pairs 1 BEE a 8 gt hy View page list style List gt Projects x cel Tift Page pagel ps 300 dpi CMYK halftone Page fi 7 amp Black Shift X in source file E inch Shift Y in source file fa inch Plate attributes Lett offset fi 000 inch Top offset 1 000 en Gutter i 000 inch Recreate plate Plate 2 Sent Figure 16 7 Pairs status window not default When
332. t to add messages to the log file Fast Print Select this check box to increase the printing speed of the imagesetter This may reduce the output quality 428 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 33 2 ECRM SCSI Imagesetter controls 33 2 1 2 Media tracking options Film Counter Use Film Counter Select this check box if you wish to track the media in your device In order to track the media in your device you must advance the media using the Feed and Cut pop up menu control as described in Feed and Cut on page 432 You must not advance the media using the imagesetter controls You must set the Film Left counter whenever you change a film roll Film Left Enter the length of the film roll when the film is changed Choose the units of measurement from the menu alongside this text box Once you have initially set the Film Left counter it changes to reflect the amount of film left in the imagesetter 33 2 1 3 Page layout options Page Layout Click this button to open the Page Layout dialog box Page Mode C CutTo Size Image Spacing 0 inch Auto Feed Cut After fi jobs I Centering Cancel Figure 33 4 Page Layout dialog box MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 429 33 ECRM SCSI The options in the Page Layout dialog box change depending on which radio button you have selected in the Page Mode section Page Mode Cut To Size Galley Centering Select this radio button to create a margin around t
333. te those files Failure to delete files in Available Pages List will cause errors in the resulting imposition It may also lead to all subsequent pages entering the module being flushed deleted at the time of each imposition MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 17 4 Preps setup A number of options are available from the drop down menus in both Auto matic and Manual mode 17 4 1 Manual composition Before creating a Preps job you must know the location of the source files and image files required for the job The following stages are required when using the Preps imposition module e Create a new Preps job e Add source files to the file list e Create the run list for the job e Impose the job using a template e Impose the job 17 4 1 1 Create a new Preps job To create a new Preps job right click the Preps icon and select Setup from the pop up menu A dialog containing three windows will appear The windows are entitled File List Run List and Signature List You create a Preps job by 1 Selecting a job mixed file or not to be output as a PostScript language file 2 Adding source files to the File List You can add files directly to the Run List which will automatically add them to the File List 3 Adding pages in the source file to the Run List if not already done in the previous step 4 Applying a template to flow the already selected pages into signatures MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 213 17 Preps 214
334. the RIP module itself For more information on the controls displayed in the Viewer see Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 To stop an individual RIP processing jobs select the RIP to be stopped in the Viewer followed by selecting the GO STOP button 118 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual The OPI Open Prepress Interface module takes a high resolution image and produces an equivalent low resolution image The low resolution image can then be used for page setups so alleviating the need to deal with memory hungry image files and at the same time lightening network traffic When the original high resolution image file is required such as at the RIP stage or in PDF creation the high resolution file replaces the low resolution preview file and the page is output with the correct image in place MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 119 10 OPI 10 1 OPI workflow The OPI module can accept raster images and PostScript language files directly from a SmartScan module However in practice it is more usual to first pass jobs through a PS PDF Optimizer module so that preview images are available when using OPI files in your on screen page makeup applica tions is Scan lt 3 Scan Optimizer Figure 10 1 OPI workflows 10 2 OPI controls Right click the OPI module on the workspace to display the module pop up menu where the module dialog screens can be accessed Setup F5 View F4 ear Error aur jodie Change C
335. the PDF document You may also use this password to open the document Note It is not possible to open a password protected document without entering either the Open Document password or the Change Security pass word Because of this you should always keep a secure record of these passwords The other options in the Security dialog box can be used to control the ability of the user to change add comments or print the document Select the appro priate check box to restrict the reader of the PDF from using that feature 21 4 Fonts in PDF Creator PDF Creator maintains a list of fonts that it can embed and substitute in the PDF documents it creates To access the fonts list right click a PDF Creator module and choose Fonts from the pop up window to open the Fonts dialog box shown in Figure 21 10 Using the controls in this window you may add and remove fonts and determine how fonts will be substituted in PDF docu ments that are generated Fonts x B Bookman Demi 2 Bookman Demiltalic 2 Bookman Light Z Bookman Lightltalic e Courier F Courier Bold F Courier BoldOblique F Courier Oblique F Helsinki Sr Helsinki Bold ie a fa fonts z Puumala Demi Puumala Demiltalic Add New Remove Puumala Light Puumala Lightltalic cr ps Substitution crrb ps X 52 gt Fonts crrbo ps cme crro ps hls ps hisb ps Figure 21 10 Fonts list window MaxWorkF
336. the option selected in the Page origin field Select the down arrows to decide the required units and then enter values into the text fields MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 6 2 BarCode controls Scale Use this option to change the size of the barcode This scale functionality should be used with caution as it may cause a barcode to become unreadable Scaling may squeeze or enlarge both the printed bars and the spaces between them Page origin This option defines the point on the page from which the X Y position options define the exact position of the barcode If barcode cannot be created This option defines the actions of the module if a barcode cannot be cre ated The options are process job With this option selected the job will process without the barcode error job With this option the job will generate an error use default string If this option is selected a default string will be used Enter into the text box a string which you know works If an error occurs with the string defined in the Encoded string field this default string will be used instead When the Setup BarCode dialog has been completed click OK MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 71 6 BarCode 6 2 2 BarCode Viewer Select the View option from the pop up menu or double click the BarCode module to display the BarCode module Viewer System View Help E Name Status Log Paused BarCode 1 Processing
337. the pop up menu Alter natively press F4 on the keyboard The Viewer is split into two main areas the upper area lists jobs that are cur rently waiting to be released from the Queuer the lower area lists jobs that have been processed and which have been retained for possible future pro cessing These jobs are stored on the hard disk in the Storage folder as speci fied in the Queuer setup dialog box described in Storage directory on page 50 System View Jobs Help o O2 GAIA IO vee D 8 5x11 Job ID Processing Job _ Page Color Date Time T Size Destination ood 45 httpwww globa 4 Gray 19 03 02 11 21 50 RAST 356 54Kb Tiff1 45 httpwww globa 3 Gray 19 03 02 11 21 49 RST 37277Kb Tiff1 45 httpwww globa 2 Gray 19 03 02 11 21 47 RST 348 76Kb Tiff1 1 1 1 1 45 httpwww globa Gray 19 03 02 11 21 46 RST 356 07Kb Tiff1 44 max_rip pdf Gray 19 03 02 11 19 27 RST 128 64Kb Tiff1 3 globe tif Gry 19 03 02 11 17 18 RST 45 89Kb Tiff 1 1 Queuer workfl Gray 19 03 02 11 13 03 RST 28 97Kb Tiff1 x Job ID Passed Job Page Color Date Time T Size Destination A ao 11 16 z RST 45 98Kb Tiff1 2 G 03 02 iaEY RAST 130 24Kb Tiff1 Queuer 2 File httpwww globalgraphics compdfssoftwareworkflowmax_output_prep pdf spooling at 19 03 02 11 21 51 Queuer 2 File httpwww globalgraphics compdfssoftwareworkflowmax_output_prep pdf spooled at 19 03 02 11 21 52 Figure 5 7 Queuer Viewer Each job
338. the remaining job pages are flowed through the full signature using blank pages where necessary MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 219 17 Preps 1 Choose a template using one of the following options e Click the Signature setup icon at the top of the Page setup dialog e Right click the Signature List and select Signature selection from the pop up menu The Signature selection dialog will appear 2 Select the drop down menu in the Binding style option and choose the required binding style For more information see Binding styles on page 221 A Template folder will appear in the window below 3 Select the icon until you can view the various options 4 Click on the required template for the job 5 Click Auto Select to impose the entire job This will automatically selected the required signatures within the template Note Auto Select will only be available for use if it has been designed into the signature template It is a special feature that you must activate when designing a new template in Preps Alternatively click Add to impose each signature individually When using the Add option you must make sure you have selected the right number of signatures to accommodate all the pages Therefore you may have to click Add more than once You can change the position of the selected signature in relation to the page number of the job by clicking the signature in the Signature selection dialog box then clicking Move up Move do
339. the status of all the GIF modules that are in the workspace This dialog consists of a table listing the status of each GIF module as well as a log monitor window in which you can view progress and error messages All messages in the log monitor window are prefixed by the name of the module to which they refer Name This column lists the name of the GIF module that appears in the work space The name of the GIF module is specified in the Device tab as described on page 351 Status This column indicates the status of the module which can be Idle or Busy Log This column indicates whether or not the module is set to record all mes sages in a log file yes no See page Log file directory on page 15 for details on how to specify the location and other properties of the log file MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 355 24 GIF Paused This column indicates whether or not the module has been paused yes no You can click the GO STOP button to start or stop the module For further details on the general controls in the dialog see Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 356 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 25 DCS ngs The DCS Desktop Color Separations module allows you to convert files that have been processed by the Harlequin RIP to DCS files compatible with the DCS 2 0 or 1 0 file specification DCS files contain information that allows you to produce color separations using desktop prepress applications DCS files may
340. this check box to ensure that all output files generated by the CIP3 module have a unique name A unique file name is created by adding a sequentially increasing number to the file name as shown in the exam ple on page 368 26 2 1 3 Extents and Transforms options There are several tabs in this section one each for Film Plate Press and Paper You can set all of these values or leave some at the default values Extents refer to the physical area of the image Transforms are the offsets rota tion and mirroring that it is possible to apply The transforms are cumulative and executed in the order of the tabs shown in this dialog box For example the transforms defined for Film are applied in moving from the raster data to the film image the transforms for Plate are applied in moving from the film image to the plate and so on A sufficiently big offset or inappropriate rotation can cause loss of image data as Figure 26 4 shows In each of the cases the bold outline represents the total area of the film and the light outline represents the image area The shaded gray areas show where parts of the image are not imaged because of a transform No transform Offset Rotation Figure 26 4 Transforms and possible image clipping MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 26 2 CIP3 controls The CIP3 PPF specification defines all geometry with respect to an origin at the bottom left of the relevant coordinate system However the specificatio
341. trim and bleed offsets Under the Page pull down menu you can store by name all the different section specifications and then choose whichever one you need for each section of plates MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 201 16 Pairs module 16 2 1 3 Plate Layout tab The Plate Layout tab provides options for configuring the output plate olx E Pairs module setup General M Layout style 4 eH First page rotation fo x C Vertical Second page rotation fo z m Plate sizes Take from Custom x Width 27 000 Height ja 000 M Plate sheet sizes Width 25 000 Height fi 9 000 Left offset 1 000 Top offset fi coa M Gutter Fixed 1 000 C From fi 000 To fi 000 Figure 16 5 Plate layout tab Layout style You can use this option to decide if pages are to be displayed side by side Horizontal or top to bottom Vertical First page rotation Use this option to specify the rotation of the first page of the pair Second page rotation Use this option to specify the rotation of the second page of the pair Plate sizes Plate size is the size of the media often a piece of aluminum or polyes ter that comes out of the plate output device 202 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 16 2 Pairs module controls Taken from This option provides you with the option of using the
342. two options ASCII or Binary and the type you choose will largely depend on your processing environment As a general rule for compatibility reasons you should use ASCII encoding if your page creation platforms incorpo rate a mix of NT and Macintosh workstations Backup folder Enter the location of the folder where backup files are stored Backup files can help safeguard against losing your files in the event of a system failure Click within the text box and type in the path directly or click f and use your mouse to navigate to the folder Error folder Enter the location of the folder where files which fail the optimization process are sent Click within the text box and type in the path directly or click and use your mouse to navigate to the folder MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 271 20 Optimizer 20 2 1 2 Images tab General Images Additional D fre DPI I Compress Using zP x Compression Guelity E gh z M Grayscale I Downsample at fr2 DPI I Compress Using zP 7 Compression Guality JH Jh z M Monochrome I Downsample at 72 DPI I Compress Using ZIP v Compression Figure 20 4 Images tab Downsample at Select this check box and specify the resolution to which images found in a PostScript language file are reduced Compress using Select this check box and choose ZIP Flate or JPEG from the drop down menu Some experimentation may be necessary to find the compression
343. u to finish adjusting anything on the sheet Plate width height This is this actual width and height of the plate from the plate device usually aluminium or polyester Enter the width and height of the actual plate This must be filled out before the signature is activated Plate sheet width height The sheet width and height represents the size of the sheet of paper that goes through the printing press and gets printed on Imageable area is the area on that sheet of paper that can be printed affected by things such as non printing gripper margins non printing gutters and folds and so on Therefore plate sheet sizes are usually larger than the imageable area 170 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 15 2 Imposition controls Enter the width and height of the plate sheet This can be the same or less but may not exceed the plate width and height This must be filled out before the signature is activated Page image offset Enter the X offset left side of pages and Y offset bottom of the pages to trim the pages Script Manual plate design only This option provides you with the ability to choose the Visual Basic code that is used to design plates Options include ImpText vbs e Perfect_Bound amp Sheetwise vbs Perfect_Bound amp Work and tumble vbs Perfect_Bound amp Work and turn vbs e Saddle_Stitched amp Work and tumble vbs e Saddle_Stitched amp Work and turn vbs e Successive vbs To create manua
344. ual 33 4 SmartScan Windows share When selected MaxWorkFlow creates a shared folder on the Microsoft network This folder is known as a hot folder and users may place Ps EPS PDF and TIFF files into it for processing The hot folder name is defined by Share name which will be the name seen by users on your network Macintosh share and Share name This option is the same as for Windows share and Share name except in this case the hot folder is published on an AppleTalk network Mac Share name Enter the name of the hot folder as it will appear to Macintosh clients 4 2 1 3 Virtual printers The Virtual printers tab lets you create a network printer that allows clients to send jobs directly to the workflow from an application such as Microsoft Word or QuarkXPress The virtual printer generates the PostScript language 34 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 4 2 SmartScan controls file and places it in the scan directory where it is picked up by the SmartScan module and processed by the workflow The controls in the tab are described next SmartScan Setup Figure 4 4 Virtual printers tab Mac printer Select this check box to publish the MWF virtual printer on an AppleTalk network This allows Macintosh clients to submit jobs from an application directly to MWF by printing to the virtual printer The virtual printer handles the PostScript language rendering process and places the job in the scan directory Printer Name
345. ult location is set to C MAXWORKFLOW Storage if you installed the application on the c drive although you may enter your own location directly into the text box or by clicking the button to the right and navigating to a folder 50 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 5 2 Queuer controls Multiplex When this option is selected job output is distributed evenly between connected output devices ensuring that each device is used in turn Figure 5 4 shows an example workflow where a pair of imagesetters are used to output ripped jobs The Queuer module set to multiplex shares the output between the two imagesetters ensuring that both are used This feature only works with hardware devices that have a bi directional communication capability examples of which include Highwater Cards LPT1 LPT2 and so on This is not a software spooling function The option is not selected by default yy Bs An nese 1 a m NG Job input folder Harlequin RIP Trapping Queuer ara aay Max Imagesetter 2 Figure 5 4 Multiplexed workflow Copy Multiplex This control has no function in this release of MWF It will be imple mented in a future release of the product Last job on top When this check box is selected the latest job entering the Queuer is placed at the top of the job list and is consequently released from the Queuer prior to those jobs which entered before it It should be noted however that jobs with higher priorities take precedence and will
346. um ICC profiles are industry standard color profile definitions that describe the output characteristics of printers printing processes scanners presses and other equipment The Harlequin RIP uses the ICC profile to ensure a job is ripped according to the color characteristics of the output device General Additional Virtual Printers Name Convention ICC Input Profiles RGB sRGB ba CMYK Commercial A ed Figure 4 7 ICC Input Profiles tab The options in the ICC Input Profiles tab are RGB Choose the ICC input profile for RGB color separations CMYK Choose the ICC input profile for CMYK color separa tions To implement ICC profiles you will also need to configure the Harlequin RIP module as described in Install ICC Profile on page 110 as well as the rele vant output module refer to the module s chapter in this manual for details MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 4 2 SmartScan controls 4 2 2 Create rulers test To test vertical and horizontal spacing on your output device you can create a calibration page by choosing Create rulers test from the module pop up menu The Rulers Generation dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4 8 Y ruler length cm 25 X ruler length cm 15 vo Figure 4 8 Rulers generation dialog box for leading calibration Y ruler length cm Enter the length of the vertical ruler to be printed X ruler length cm Enter the length of the horizontal ruler to
347. uration and viewing options Setup F5 View F4 Launch module Change Computer F6 Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 12 2 Load Balancer module pop up 142 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 12 2 Load Balancer controls The following controls are available for the Load Balancer module e Setup see Load Balancer Setup below e View see Load Balancer Viewer on page 148 See Module shortcut menus on page 18 for details on the other general options in the pop up 12 2 1 Load Balancer Setup To configure the Load Balancer module choose Setup from the Load Balancer module pop up The Load Balancer Setup dialog box opens Module name LoadBalancer File Transfer Que Central Error Directory Load Balance CAMWF_Data QueCentral f amp Polling I Suspend output to directory fo files exits Suspend output to directory if sum of file s sizes more then fo Kb I Override existing files a ol fe MWF_Data Input Scan 1 C M WF_Data Input Scar C MWF_Data Input Scan Hold C Use File Mask RIP 1 RIP 2 C MWF_Data Input Scan 2 C M WF_Data lnput Scan C MWF_Data Input Scan Hold RIP 3 C MWF_Data Input Scan 3 C M WF_Data Input Error C M WF_Data Input LogFi 4 Add Edit Delete Load from file Save to file Figure 12 3 Load Balancer Setup dialog box The options in the Load Balancer Setup dialog box are all output options This dialog box
348. ure setup icon or selecting Signature selection from the right click pop up menu See Impose the job on page 219 for more information 232 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 17 4 Preps setup 17 4 4 Preps setup options Preps has a number of options available which globally affect the module To change the Preps module options select Edit gt Options from the Preps setup This will display the following dialog Module Options x Module name Peesi s SSCs Storage folder CAMWF_Data lmposiion Preps Oo g Output folder Pofle MwF o Ea New I Overwrite files Incoming page numeration for automation mode only e A Pace Incoming order Name convention OK Cancel Figure 17 10 Preps Options dialog This dialog provides the following options Module name This is the name of the module as it appears on the MWF workspace Storage folder This is the location for all data pertaining to the Preps module including configuration files Output folder This is the location for output files generated by the Preps module In most circumstances the output folder is defined in the output module at the end of the work flow For example the TIFF module decides the location of the output files However the Output folder defined within Preps allows you to either save a backup of the imposition or define a final destination for the output files if no output module is attached to the end of the work
349. utput It is not necessary for the high resolution image data to be available to PDF Creator since it passes the file name through to the output PDF Creator produces only an OPI 1 3 dictionary only an OPI 2 dictionary or both depending on whether the PostScript language file input uses one or both versions of the OPI comments Default Page size The width and height boxes let you to specify the default page size for the PDF page It should be noted that these values are only effective when the file does not already contain page size information In general PostScript language files and TIFF files do contain page size information 292 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 21 3 PDF Creator options so the values entered here have no effect on the printed page size for these file types Choose the unit of measurement from the drop down list 21 3 3 Compression The Compression tab provides options for the output format of images from the PDF Creator module This option handles images in three different catego ries Color Grayscale and Monochrome Also provided are options to re sample images in all three categories using subsampling average downsampling or bicubic resampling Setup for JAWS PDF Creator 16 x General Compression Font Embedding Security M Color Images Downsample Average x Resolution fiso dpi Compression zip x M Grayscale Images Downsample Average x Resolution fiso dpi Compression zP x
350. vely click the button to the right of the text box to open a file browser which you can use to select a configuration file from any accessible system drive Media Type Select the media type that you are using from this menu 340 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 23 2 TIFF controls 23 2 1 2 File naming options In general the TIFF module generates a name for each output file by combin ing characters from some of the following character strings e The page number of the job e Astem fixed or variable e The name of the separation e A sequentially increasing number e A suffix For example the file name 01jobname psGray00 TIF is composed of the page number of the job 01 the job name as a variable stem jobname ps the sepa ration name G for Grayscale c for Cyan etc a number to make the file unique 00 and the suffix TIF The options that you choose in the file naming section determine which char acter strings to include in the file name Use This menu contains the file naming options Job Name Prefix and Template Choose Job Name to use the job name as a variable stem in the file name of all output files This is the default setting If you choose Prefix a text box opens in which you can enter text to be used as the fixed stem of the file name If you choose Template a text box opens in which you can enter tags and fixed text to specify a template to use when generating file names If you choose this
351. w F4 Lau jule Change Computer F6 Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 23 2 TIFF module pop up The following controls are available for the TIFF module e Setup all output modules share common controls These are described in Chapter 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules For details on device specific controls see Device specific controls below e View see TIFF Devices Viewer on page 346 See Module shortcut menus on page 18 for details on the other general options in the pop up MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 23 2 TIFF controls 23 2 1 Device specific controls To configure the TIFF module choose Setup from the TIFF module pop up The Setup for TIFF dialog box opens The options in the Device tab Alt D allow you to select device specific settings Setup for Tiff x Page Colors Screens Calibration Color profile Device Device Name Tiff Output EAMWF_Data Qupu Tif EA Color Format MonoChrome E ECRM Config File Naming Use flobName iM St Sufis TIF I Use 8 3 file names IV Must be unique Byte ordering fiem PC x Compression zw z Tiff format Multiple strips x I Reverse bit order I Pad to 32 bit alignment Post Processing JO Greate Window Figure 23 3 Device tab for the TIFF module The options in the Device tab fall into categories output options file naming options file format options and post processing option
352. w displays messages generated by the module A message is generated whenever the module is started or stopped when a job is processed or when an error occurs These messages allow you to observe job throughput and to help resolve problems You can also output these messages to a log file so they can be viewed later in a text editor The Message log tool described in Message log on page 306 provides details on how to do this 306 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules In addition to the SmartScan module which acts as an input mechanism for the workflow every workflow must also contain at least one output module so jobs can be finished As you would expect MWF contains a wide selection of output modules from printers plotters imagesetters and presses to image formats and PDF file types Most of these modules share a common set of output controls that control page set up color management device screening and calibration profiles This chapter describes each of these controls MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 307 22 Common Controls for the Output Modules 22 1 Page set up options The page set options for the output modules are accessible in the Page tab as shown in Figure 22 1 Setup for Tiff 1 x Colors Screens Calibration Device Page Roll width 38 inch Trim Max width 8 5 inch Miror Max height 11 inch T Negative Rotation I Center page on media width
353. when they are embedded in PostScript language or PDF jobs A following PS or PDF indicates that embedding is possible only in that format Font type Install Fonts Download to RIP Other Type 1 fonts excluding Jv Jv Multiple Master fonts Type 3 fonts Jv y Multiple Master fonts y y TrueType fonts J J Z PDF Type 0 composite fonts Jv Character identifier CID J Jv y fonts Character map CMAP files J Jv Jv Compact Font Format A vZ PDF CFF Type 2 fonts Type 42 fonts ZPS Type 32 fonts Y PS Table 9 2 Installing fonts in the Harlequin RIP Install Fonts The Install Fonts command and downloading fonts to the RIP are described in the next two sections See Removing Fonts on page 109 for details about deleting the fonts you have installed MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 9 4 Fonts Setup When you click the Install Fonts button in the Fonts dialog box the RIP displays the Install Fonts dialog box shown in Figure 9 6 Look in a fonts x c cl ptb a Gnc pfb la Gnili____pfb a Grxbd__ a Gnb pfb a Gneb___ pfb a Gnlic__ pfb Sab a Gnbc___ pfb ia Gni pfb ia Gnis___ pfb a Sabi a Gnbi____pfb ba Gnic____ pfb a Gns ptb a Sai d a Gnbic__ pfb ba Gni_ pfb a Sar fa Gnbxc__ pfb fa Gnlc___ pfb i File name Gnube be Files of type Font Fies pfa O l Cancel Figure 9 6 Install Fonts dialog box To install a single font do the following 1
354. when you have a job in the form of PS PDF or EPS that has already been created with a MWF printer correctly configured for the eventual output device Both these methods of submitting jobs require you to configure the SmartScan module to create the MWF printer and shared folder Once this has been done clients running document creating applications can use these resources to submit jobs directly to MWF for processing For more information on creating g virtual printers and shared folders refer to Section 4 2 1 2 on page 31 and Section 4 2 1 3 on page 34 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 3 Example Workflow To help you get started with MWF and to show you how easy it is to create workflows follow the instructions in this section to set up the example work flow shown in Figure 3 1 MaxWorkFlow C MWF_Data Config Example cfg A 4 Si Queuer 1 Paused at 21 02 03 11 03 00 Harlequin RIP 1 Paused 21 02 03 11 03 00 Queuer 2 Paused at 21 02 03 11 03 00 Figure 3 1 The example workflow MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 21 3 Example Workflow In the example workflow jobs are received into the workflow and passed through the Optimizer module which optimizes it for output and adds a low resolution screen preview file into the job for OPI purposes The job is then passed to the Harlequin RIP module which passes it to the TrapPro module for trapping before rasterizing the page Lastly the page is output to an imag esetter
355. wing the configuration and viewing options Setup F5 View F4 WIEer Enrar Launch module Change Computer F6 Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 18 2 Media Saver pop up The following controls are available for the Media Saver module e Setup see Media Saver setup below e View see Media Saver Viewer on page 251 See Module shortcut menus on page 18 for details on the other general options in the pop up 18 2 1 Media Saver setup To configure the Media Saver module select Setup from the pop up menu Media saver setup xi Module name Media saver Left margin pooo inch Right margin pooo inch Gap i tS inch Gutputwidth 38 SSS T Early printing cont Figure 18 3 Media Saver setup dialog box This dialog provides access to various configuration options 250 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 18 2 Media Saver controls This module works by storing each output raster on a flat until the full width of the media is achieved At this point the flat is output If you would like to change the units of measurement of any of the options in the Media Saver module select the down arrow at the right side of the dialog Module name Allows you to enter a new name for the module The module name is used wherever the module is referenced on the workspace in log files when linking to and from other modules Left Right margins This option defines the non printable are
356. wn or Renumber You can also change the start page number of a signature by double clicking it and changing the First Page Number text box Make sure you also check the Locked option so that the numbering takes affect 6 If required you are able to edit the layout details of a complete template or individual page signature For more details see Adjusting page posi tions on page 222 7 When the Signature list is completed click OK 8 Click Impose to impose the job 220 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 17 4 Preps setup Binding styles A number of binding styles are provided in the Preps module e Flatwork no binding This option should be chosen for non folded signature templates that is jobs which are not bound together such as poster work step and repeat work business cards and so on With this binding style you are able to combine different page sizes and orientations on a press sheet for gang up jobs In addition to this you are able to step and repeat pages overlap them and nest them for media saving purposes and for double burns where one image is overlaid by another When a job is imposed with a flatwork binding style Preps flows the pages into the signature by matching the number of the Run List with the number of the template page If a template page number appears twice in a signature the corresponding Run List page is imposed twice e Perfect bound Perfect binding is used for books and some magazines
357. xample if your page calls for Helvetica Regular the bold italic black condensed and compressed variations of the font will not be embedded in the PDF file and consequently it may not be possible to edit this text on a users machine unless they already have the font installed Use original True Type fonts This option prevents the module from trying to substitute similar look ing but not exactly the same Type 1 fonts MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 297 21 PDF Creator 21 3 5 Security The Security tab options Figure 21 9 enable security features in generated PDF documents There are several options available that provide varying levels of protection for documents Setup for JAWS PDF Creator 16 General Compression Font Embedding Security m Do Not Permit Users to Iv Eint the document WV Change the document Ks M Add if Graphics hange farm felds or notes Figure 21 9 PDF module security settings Encrypt PDF Files Open document This text box allows you to specify a password which must be entered before the document can be opened The user will be prompted for this password when the document is opened 298 Select this check box to enable security features in the PDF document MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual Change security 21 4 Fonts in PDF Creator This text box allows you to specify a password that a user must enter before security changes can be made to
358. xt box Password You must enter a password for the CIP3 module in this text box and choose the computer on which the Harlequin RIP is running from the accompanying text box 26 2 1 2 File naming options In general the CIP3 module generates a name for each output file by combin ing characters from some of the following character strings e The page number of the job e Astem fixed or variable e A sequentially increasing number e A suffix For example the file name 01jobname ps00 PPF is composed of the page number of the job 01 the job name as a variable stem jobname ps the sepa ration name G for Grayscale c for Cyan etc a number to make the file unique 00 and the suffix PPF The options that you choose in the file naming section determine which char acter strings to include in the file name Use This menu contains the file naming options Job Name Prefix and Template Choose Job Name to use the job name as a variable stem in the file name of all output files This is the default setting If you choose Prefix a text box opens in which you can enter text to be used as the fixed stem of the file name MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 26 2 CIP3 controls If you choose Template a text box opens in which you can enter tags and fixed text to specify a template to use when generating file names If you choose this option all other file naming options are disabled If you use the naming convention f
359. y a substring of ps or tif so that extraction stops when the job name suffix is reached Set Characters are extracted until one of the values listed in the set is found For example you can set up a list of possible values Cyan Magenta Yellow and Black for files that have the color name in their name Use Add and Delete to manage the set list Field value translation If you select this check box the Field translation dialog box is opened and is used to map an extracted field value to another value For example if the color of the file is encoded in the filename as a number 1 for Cyan 2 Magenta 3 Yellow and so on you can setup the MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 4 2 SmartScan controls translation table in such a way that those numbers being extracted from the filename will be translated into the full color name When you have defined a rule you can test it to make sure it performs as intended In the list highlight the rule and click the Test button In the dialog box that appears locate the file to test and click OK A pop up dialog displays the result of the test which you can use to verify that your rule worked suc cessfully Save your rules by clicking Save convention specifying a name and location The other buttons in the Name Convention tab allow you to edit delete load and clear your rules MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 41 4 SmartScan 42 4 2 1 5 ICC Input Profiles International Color Consorti
360. y both with your workflow and with the PPF reader or readers that you intend to use In the following examples the job name defined in the job is 8476065 Master Document In Job Name In the PPF file Notes J 8476065 Master Default Document 7J 8476065 8476065 Master Document SIG001 P J 1 8476065 Master Matches CIP3 Document plugin v1 18 and earlier Table 26 1 Useful Job Name values In Sheet Name In the PPF file Notes Sheet S Sheet 1 Default S G 1 1 P J 1 8476065 Master Matches plugin Table 26 2 Useful Sheet Name values MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual Document v1 18 and earlier 377 26 CIP3 378 26 2 1 5 DIG Comments If DIG comments are present in incoming jobs the controls in this section allow you to use some of the names included in these comments as parts of CIP3 comments specified in the Contents section of this dialog box Digital Imposition Geometry DIG comments follow a specification created and maintained by ScenicSoft Inc The comments are included in PostScript language files produced by Preps from ScenicSoft and ImpoStrip from Ultimate Technographics Inc The comments provide enhanced support for large format imagesetters using more than one imaging head It is safe to select these check boxes for jobs that do not contain the relevant DIG comments Read Title Select this check box to read the title given in any SsiDIGTitle com ment from the incoming job This
361. y in the Mask text box that only PDF files pd will be submitted to that module as described on page 147 Load Balancer Error Directory This is the location of the folder to which files that cannot be accepted by the Load Balancer module will be sent You may either click within the text box and type in the path of your choice or click alongside the text box 144 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 12 2 Load Balancer controls Suspend output to directory files exist Click this check box and enter a number in the text box to specify the maximum number of files allowed in a folder before changing scan fold ers when load balancing Suspend output to directory if the sum of the file s sizes more than Kb Click this check box and enter a number in the text box to specify a limit on the total file size of all files in a scan folder when load balancing Once this limit is reached files are sent to the next available scan folder Override existing files Select this check box if you wish to overwrite files with the same name when sending files to scan folders 12 2 1 2 Scan folder table The Scan folder table lists the scan folders to which files can be sent You can add or delete scan folders from the table or you can edit the details for a selected scan folder The order in which scan folders appear in the Scan folder table determines the order in which they are processed For example when load balancing the Load Balancer
362. y name assigned by PDF Creator Overwrite an existing PDF file Select this check box if you wish to overwrite any PDF in the output folder that has the same name as the newly created PDF Deselect the box if you want to stop PDF Creator overwriting existing PDFs MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 289 21 PDF Creator 21 3 2 Advanced Click Advanced in the General dialog box to access the Advanced options as shown in Figure 21 6 These options generally apply to prepress environ ments M Color Options Transfer functions ed I Convert CMYK to RGB I Convert device independent colors to device dependent colors I Preserve Halftones I Preserve Overprint I Preserve Under Color Removal and Black Generation information M Document Structuring Conventions DSC Use BoundingBox for Nothing 7 I Preserve OPI comments M Default Page Size Width fjes inch Height fn inch OK Figure 21 6 PDF module advanced settings Transfer functions Provides options for preserving applying or removing transfer func tions from the PostScript language file The options are as follows Apply The document is displayed the same on screen as when printed Preserve Transfer functions are preserved in the PDF file Remove Transfer functions are removed in the PDF file Convert CMYK to RGB This option affects any color images that are present in the job When enabled any four color CMYK images in the job
363. y the location and other properties of the log file Paused This column indicates whether or not the module has been paused yes no You can click the GO STOP button to start or stop the module MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 385 27 Windows Printer For further details on the general controls in the dialog see Monitoring job processing in MWF on page 17 386 MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 28 HP Plotter 5 The HP Plotter module allows you to send files that have been processed by the Harlequin RIP to a HP Plotter printer The printer can be connected directly to the computer running MWF or through a suitable network adapter as specified in this document You can also print to file and transfer this file for output to a HP printer 28 1 HP Plotter workflow The HP Plotter module is an output device module that accepts raster image data from the Harlequin RIP The raster image data is then passed to a HP Plotter printer The figure below illustrates such a workflow o f Scan folder Harlequin RIP HP Plotter Figure 28 1 HP workflow MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 387 28 HP Plotter 28 2 HP Plotter controls Right click the HP Plotter module to display the pop up menu showing all the configuration and viewing options Setup F5 View F4 Lau jule Change Computer F6 Delete Del About Module Ctrl F1 Figure 28 2 HP Plotter module pop up The following controls are available for the HP Plotter
364. you miss one or two occurrences where the font was used the processing time would be wasted Having the RIP module offer to do the substitution for you on the fly is the solution because all occurrences are guaranteed to be substituted 9 5 Install ICC Profile To select an ICC International Color Consortium profile for installation into the Harlequin RIP module choose Install ICC profile from the pop up menu This command supports the use of industry standard color profile files which enable portable definitions of the characteristics of printers printing pro cesses presses scanners and other equipment 9 6 Creating a calibration profile The Harlequin RIP module allows you to create a calibration target for your output device Using Genlin a small utility built into the RIP module you can read a calibration target and produce a CMY gray balanced target for your output device The following sub sections describe the procedure for creating a calibration profile MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 9 6 Creating a calibration profile 9 6 1 Printing a calibration target To print a calibration target set up a workflow containing the Harlequin RIP module and your target output device as shown in Figure 9 8 SmartScan Harlequin RIP Epson printer Figure 9 8 Example workflow Start the workflow and right click the RIP module and choose Print Calibration from the pop up menu The Print Calibration dialog box opens as shown i
365. ystem memory for the spooling of files by Smart Scan The recommended setting depends on the amount of memory RAM in your PC e 128 Mb RAM set buffer to 2048 Kb e 256 Mb RAM set buffer to 4096 Kb e 512 Mb RAM set buffer to 8192 Kb Queuer Job priority Use this option to assign a priority number to jobs The Queuer module uses this number to determine job processing order that is jobs with a high priority are processed before those with a low priority This option only works when a Queuer module is placed immediately after the multiple SmartScan modules or is preceded by only a PreCheck module Modules such as the Optimizer and Page Splitter will discard the priority information Use Config Snap This option allows you to dynamically change module settings accord ing to which of the SmartScan modules in the workflow receives a job A config snap takes a snapshot of the settings configured in each of the workflow modules and saves them to disk Select Use Config Snap and choose a saved config snap from the Always use Config Snap drop down menu When a job is received into the Smart Scan module SmartScan will update the workflow module parameters using the selected config snap Default DPI Enter a default resolution to be used if the incoming file does not specify a resolution For example some TIFF files created by digital cameras do not specify a resolution The default value is set at 72 dpi MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Man
366. zes transparent backgrounds such as Adobe Illustrator In other words you must be able to see through the top page in order for the final Preps MaxWorkFlow 3 7 User Manual 239 17 Preps imposition to show both the master items on page 1 and the additional double burn items on pages 2 9 that are layered on top of page 1 Places the actual punch mark With this option checked the Preps module prints the punch target on the media as an aid to matching the position of the imposition template to that of the image setter punch If the punch mark is off center or is punching along the wrong edge of the imposed flat you can use the options in the punch location dialog to make adjustments see Punch location on page 235 for more information Convert all spot colors to CMYK This option will convert all spot colors in the incoming file to equivalent CMYK separations This option should only be used if there is no output module in the workflow the files generated by the Preps module are going to be stored for future use and the preferred file type is preseparated CMYK files In most workflows the spot color conversion should be performed within the output module therefore this option should usually be left unchecked Do index files for single page files Clicking this option ensures that index files are created for incoming single page files Image overlap This option determines image placement when tiling The opti

MaxWorkFlow 3.6.1

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents